JP2023077849A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To enhance the interest of a game.SOLUTION: A Pachinko game machine PY1 includes a game control microcomputer 101 capable of determining whether or not a big winning is achieved on the basis of the entry of game balls in a first start port 11 or a second start port 12 to be won, a performance control microcomputer 121 capable of controlling a predetermined performance, and a display unit 50a capable of displaying a predetermined performance. The performance control microcomputer 121 can display a predetermined icon indicating that execution of determination whether or not the big winning is achieved is reserved on the display unit 50a or determination whether or not the big winning is achieved is executed, and can execute a second icon change performance in which the display mode of a predetermined icon is changed from a change suggestion display mode to a development suggestion display mode.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 35

Description

TECHNICAL FIELD The present invention relates to gaming machines typified by pachinko gaming machines and the like.

In a conventional pachinko game machine, on the condition that a game ball enters a starting hole, a hit determination is performed to determine whether or not a hit has occurred. A gaming machine that executes a winning game (special game state) is known.

In addition, in the conventional pachinko game machine, like the game machine described in Patent Document 1 below, on the liquid crystal (display unit), a suspension icon (predetermined icon) indicating that the hit determination is suspended, It is known to perform an effect of displaying the relevant pending icon (predetermined icon) corresponding to the special symbol being displayed in a variable manner.

JP 2013-240379 A

However, in recent years, there are many game machines capable of displaying predetermined icons such as those described in Patent Document 1, so simply displaying predetermined icons on the display unit may lack interest. had room for improvement.

The gaming machine of the present invention is
game control means capable of determining whether or not to control to a special game state advantageous to the player based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
Production control means capable of controlling a predetermined production,
and a display unit capable of displaying the effect,
The production control means is
In the display unit, it is possible to display a predetermined icon indicating that the execution of the determination is suspended or that the determination has been performed;
making it possible to execute a change effect for changing the display mode of the predetermined icon from a specific display mode to a special display mode different from the specific display mode;
It is a gaming machine characterized by

According to the present invention, it is possible to enhance the amusement of the game.

1 is a front view of a game machine; FIG. It is a front view of a game board unit. It is a front view which shows a 2nd big prize-winning apparatus etc. in detail. It is a front view of display devices. (A) is a front view of the production unit when the on-board mobile device and the lower-board mobile device are in a standby state, and (B) is the production unit when the on-board mobile device and the lower-board mobile device are in operation. It is a front view. It is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration on the main control board side. 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration on the sub-control board side; FIG. (A) is a table showing general-purpose random numbers, and (B) is a table showing special-related random numbers. (A) is a hit determination table, (B) is a normal pattern variation pattern determination table, and (C) is an auxiliary game control table. (A) is a jackpot determination table, (B) is a jackpot symbol type determination table, and (C) is a ready-to-win determination table. It is a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table. It is a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table. It is a prefetch determination table. It is a jackpot game control table. It is explanatory drawing of a game state. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of production|presentation mode. It is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of normal variation of special figure variation production. It is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of N reach of special figure fluctuation production. It is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the SP reach of special figure fluctuation production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a pending|holding production|presentation. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of movable body production|presentation. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of operation effects; 4 is a flowchart of main control main processing; 10 is a flowchart of main-side timer interrupt processing; 9 is a flowchart of sub-control main processing; 10 is a flowchart of 1 ms timer interrupt processing; 10 is a flowchart of 10 ms timer interrupt processing; It is a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table of the non-time saving state of the first embodiment. (A) A table showing the allocation rate of the special figure 1 variation pattern selected in the case of the non-time-saving state and jackpot of the first embodiment, (B) In the case of non-time-saving state and reach loss of the first embodiment It is a table showing the distribution rate of the special figure 1 variation pattern to be selected, and shows the distribution rate of the special figure 1 variation pattern selected in the case of non-time saving state and reach no loss of the first embodiment (C) is a table. It is the 1st look-ahead determination table of the non-time saving state of a 1st embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display mode of the said icon of 1st Embodiment, and the kind of display mode of a pending|holding icon. It is explanatory drawing which shows the said icon and a pending|holding icon of 1st Embodiment. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram showing types of scenario patterns for display of pending icons according to the first embodiment; 4 is a scenario pattern selection table for hold icons according to the first embodiment; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing types of scenario patterns for displaying the icon in the first embodiment; 4 is a scenario pattern selection table for hold icons according to the first embodiment; It is a front view of the on-board movable body of 1st Embodiment. It is an execution lottery table of the first icon change effect of the first embodiment. It is an effect mode selection table of the first icon change effect of the first embodiment. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing the execution timing of the first icon change effect in the first effect mode; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing the execution timing of the first icon change effect in the second effect mode; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the first icon change effect of the first embodiment; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the first icon change effect of the first embodiment; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the first icon change effect of the first embodiment; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the first icon change effect of the first embodiment; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the first icon change effect of the first embodiment; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the first icon change effect of the first embodiment; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the first icon change effect of the first embodiment; It is the execution lottery table of the second icon change effect of the first embodiment. It is the execution lottery table of the third icon change effect of the first embodiment. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing execution timings of a second icon change effect and execution timings of a third icon change effect; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a second icon change effect according to the first embodiment; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a third icon change effect according to the first embodiment; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a third icon change effect according to the first embodiment; It is a figure which shows the production|presentation flow of the special figure fluctuation production|presentation of 1st Embodiment. It is a sub-variation pattern selection table for SPSP reach. (A) An execution lottery table for the cut-in effect suggesting before battle according to the first embodiment, and (B) an execution lottery table for the cut-in effect suggesting before joining battle according to the first embodiment. (A) An execution lottery table for the development suggestive effect of the first embodiment, and (B) an execution lottery table for the super hot suggestive effect of the first embodiment. It is a table which shows the jackpot expectation degree of SPSP reach. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing execution timings of a pre-suggestion cut-in effect and execution timings of a development-suggestion effect; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing execution timings of a pre-suggestion cut-in effect and execution timings of a super hot suggestion effect; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing execution timings of a pre-suggestion cut-in effect and execution timings of a development-suggestion effect; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing execution timings of a pre-suggestion cut-in effect and execution timings of a super hot suggestion effect; It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the branch production|presentation of 1st Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the branch production|presentation of 1st Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the branch production|presentation of 1st Embodiment. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of the battle reach of the first embodiment. It is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of joint struggle reach of the first embodiment. 7 is a flowchart of received command analysis processing according to the first embodiment; It is a flow chart of processing at the time of starting winning of the first embodiment. It is a flow chart of the fluctuation effect start processing of the first embodiment. FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration on the side of a main control board according to the second embodiment; FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration on the sub-control board side according to the second embodiment; It is a perspective view showing the back side of the gaming machine. It is a front view which shows a 7 segment display. It is a figure which shows an excessive prize ball prevention function. It is a figure which shows the reset of the difference ball number. (A) It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect in case of over-prize-ball abnormality, (B) It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect in case of magnetic detection abnormality. (A) is a diagram showing an over-prize ball notice image, and (B) is a diagram showing a game stop notice image. (A) is a diagram in which a purple edged image is displayed when in a high probability high base state, and (B) is a diagram in which a red edged image is displayed when in a high probability high base state. (A) It is a figure which shows when a special reset switch is pressed down, (B) It is a figure which shows when a customer waiting state has passed for 1 hour. 10 is a flowchart of main-side timer interrupt processing according to the second embodiment; It is a flow chart of input processing. It is a flow chart of difference ball number measurement processing. 4 is a flowchart of special action processing; It is a flowchart of a special symbol standby process. It is a flow chart of customer waiting measurement processing. It is a flowchart of special design decision processing. It is a flowchart of a game state management process. 6 is a flowchart of output processing; 9 is a flowchart of outer-end signal output processing; It is a figure which shows the excessive prize ball prevention function in the modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the reset of the number of difference balls in the modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the case where the difference ball number is displayed with a 7 segment display in the modification of 2nd Embodiment. They are a jackpot determination table, a jackpot symbol type determination table, a small hit symbol type determination table, a losing symbol type determination table, and a reach determination table according to the third embodiment. It is a determination table of the big hit design type and the small hit design type according to the third embodiment, and is a table for explaining the types of the big hit and the small hit. FIG. 10 is a determination table for the type of lost symbols according to the third embodiment, and is a table for explaining types of lost symbols. FIG. It is a table|surface which shows the kind of the hit determination table which concerns on 3rd Embodiment, the normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table, and the open pattern table of an electric chew. It is a special figure variation pattern determination table according to the third embodiment. 14 is a flowchart of game state management processing according to the third embodiment; It is a figure explaining the outline of the game flow of the gaming machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure etc. which show the display screen of each production mode which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the RUSH rush production|presentation which concerns on 3rd Embodiment.

Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the gaming machine of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings. In each figure referred to, the same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and redundant descriptions of the same parts are omitted in principle. In this specification, for simplification of description, by describing a symbol or code that refers to information, a signal, a physical quantity, or a member, the name of the information, signal, physical quantity, member, etc. corresponding to the symbol or code is omitted or may be abbreviated. Further, in any flow chart described later, a plurality of processes in a plurality of arbitrary steps can be arbitrarily changed in execution order or executed in parallel as long as there is no contradiction in the processing contents.

1. Structure of Gaming Machine A pachinko gaming machine PY1, which is the first embodiment of the gaming machine of the present invention, will be described. First, the structure of the pachinko game machine PY1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 5. FIG. In the following description, the left, right, up and down directions of each part of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 are the left, right, up and down directions for the player facing the pachinko gaming machine PY1 (as seen from the front). In addition, "forward" is the direction from the pachinko gaming machine PY1 toward the player facing the pachinko gaming machine PY1, and "backward" is the direction from the player facing the pachinko gaming machine PY1 toward the pachinko gaming machine PY1. and

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 has a gaming machine frame 2. As shown in FIG. The game machine frame 2 includes an outer frame 22 and a front door 23 that can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 22.例文帳に追加Further, the front door 23 includes a game board mounting frame 2A to which a game board unit YU, which will be described later, is mounted, and a front frame 23m rotatably supported by the game board mounting frame 2A via hinges 2B. The front frame 23m can be opened and closed with respect to the game board mounting frame 2A. A transparent plate 23t is attached to the front frame 23m. When the front frame 23m is closed, the game board 1 attached to the game board attachment frame 2A faces the transparent plate 23t. Therefore, when the pachinko game machine PY1 is installed in a game parlor, a player in front of the pachinko game machine PY1 can visually recognize the game area 6 formed on the game board 1 through the transparent plate 23t. A transparent glass plate, a transparent synthetic resin plate, or the like can be used as the transparent plate 23t. It is sufficient if the game area 6 can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko game machine PY1.

A rotatable handle 72k for shooting game balls is provided at the lower right portion of the front surface of the front frame 23m. The amount (rotational angle) by which the handle 72k is operated is associated with the magnitude (firing strength) of the force applied to the game ball for firing the game ball (the amount that the firing device 72, which will be described later, drives the firing solenoid). It is Therefore, the game ball is shot with a shooting intensity corresponding to the rotation operation of the handle 72k. A lower decorative body 36 projecting greatly forward is provided at the lower center of the front surface of the front frame 23m. An upper plate 34 is formed on the upper surface of the lower decorative body 36 for storing game balls supplied to the handle 72k. A lower tray 35 is provided in the center of the lower part of the front face of the lower decorative body 36 for storing surplus game balls that cannot be accommodated in the upper tray 34 .

An operable first input device (hereinafter referred to as “normal button”) 40 is provided on the upper surface of the lower decorative body 36 in front of the upper plate 34 . The normal button 40 is composed of, for example, a button having a pressing surface, a lever having a grip portion, or the like. Further, an operable second input device (hereinafter referred to as "special button") 41 is provided on the right decorative body 32 formed so as to protrude forward from the right edge of the surface of the front frame 23m. The special button 41 (operating means) is composed of, for example, a button having a pressing surface, a lever having a grip portion, or the like.

A speaker 52 capable of outputting sound is provided on the bottom surface of the upper decorative body 31 formed so as to protrude forward from the upper surface of the front frame 23m. The speaker 52 consists of a left speaker 52L arranged on the left side and a right speaker 52R arranged on the right side. Frame lamps 53 capable of emitting light are provided on the right edge of the front frame 23m and on the left and right sides of the lower plate 35 on the front side of the lower decorative body 36 . Further, a movable frame moving device 58 is attached as a performance device for increasing the interest in the game on the upper side of the left edge and right edge of the front frame 23m. The frame movable device 58 is composed of a left frame movable device 58L arranged on the left side and a right frame movable device 58R arranged on the right side.

It should be noted that the positions and numbers of the members and devices provided in the game machine frame 2 can be appropriately changed within a range that does not interfere with the game.

Next, the game board unit YU will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 2 to 5. FIG. The game board unit YU has a game board 1 and a performance unit 1U attached to the back side of the game board 1. - 特許庁First, the game board 1 will be explained. The game board 1 is made of a transparent synthetic resin plate. A generally circular opening 1A is formed in the approximate center of the game board 1 when viewed from the front. Along the opening 1A, a substantially ring-shaped inner wall portion 1B for defining a game area 6 in which game balls can flow down is formed so as to protrude forward. A substantially ring-shaped outer wall portion 1C for partitioning the game area 6 is also formed outside the inner wall portion 1B so as to protrude forward.

A game area 6 surrounded by an inner wall portion 1B, an outer wall portion 1C, and the like is formed on the front surface of the game board 1. As shown in FIG. That is, the front surface of the game board 1 is partitioned into a game area 6 and other areas by the inner wall portion 1B and the outer wall portion 1C.

The game area 6 is an area where a game ball shot by operating the handle 72k can flow down, and is provided for playing a game in the pachinko game machine PY1. Note that the game area 6 is provided with a large number of game pegs (not shown). The game nail is a game ball that enters the game area 6 and flows down the game area 6 through a first start opening 11, a second start opening 12, a general winning opening 10, a gate 13, a first big winning opening 14, In addition, a route is configured to moderately guide the player to the second prize-winning port 15 or the like.

In the game area 6, there is a first start winning device 11D formed with a first start opening 11 into which a game ball can enter, and a second start winning device 11D that enables or disables entry into the second start opening 12. A device (a so-called “electric chew”) 12D is provided.

The first start winning device 11D is stationary. Therefore, the first starting port 11 is constant (unchangeable) without changing the ease with which a game ball enters. The winning of the game ball to the first start port 11 is the lottery of the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "special figure 1") (acquisition and determination of special figure 1 related random numbers described later: hereinafter, "special figure 1 lottery" ) and the variable display of special figure 1. Also, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 11, a predetermined number (for example, 4) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

The electric chew 12D has an actuatable electric chew opening/closing member 12k. The electric chew opening/closing member 12k is normally (in a normal state) in a closed position where entry of a game ball into the second starting port 12 is impossible or extremely difficult. Then, when the special state is reached, the game ball moves to the open position where the game ball can be entered into the second starting port 12.例文帳に追加In this way, the movement of the electric chew opening/closing member 12k to the open position is also referred to as the “open state” of the second starting port 12 or the electric chew 12D. It is possible to enter the ball. On the other hand, the fact that the electric tube opening/closing member 12k is in the closed position is also referred to as the "closed state" of the second starting port 12 or the electric tube 12D. In addition, when the second starting port 12 or the electric tube 12D is in the "open state", it is also called "the electric tube 12D opens", and when the electric tube 12D is in the "closed state", it is called "the electric tube 12D is closed". ” is also called.

The winning of the game ball to the second start port 12 is the lottery of the second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "special figure 2") (acquisition and determination of special figure 2 related random numbers described later: hereinafter, "special figure 2 lottery" ) and the variable display of special figure 2. Also, when a game ball enters the second starting port 12, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

In addition, the game area 6 is provided with a general prize winning opening 10 into which game balls can enter. When game balls enter the general winning hole 10, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

In addition, the game area 6 is provided with a gate 13 through which game balls can pass. Passage of the game ball through the gate 13 is the trigger for the normal pattern (hereinafter referred to as "normal pattern") lottery (that is, normal pattern random number acquisition and determination: hereinafter referred to as "normal pattern lottery") and the variable display of the normal pattern. It's becoming The power chew 12D is released by executing the auxiliary game. That is, the auxiliary game is a game accompanied by the opening of the electric chew 12D.

Also, the game area 6 is provided with a first big winning device 14D (hereinafter also referred to as "normal AT 14D") having a first big winning hole 14 into which a game ball can enter.

The first big prize winning device 14D has a normal AT opening/closing member 14k that can be operated in an open state and a closed state. The normal AT opening/closing member 14k is operated to open/close the first big winning hole 14.例文帳に追加Normally, the AT opening/closing member 14k is normally in a closed state to block the first big winning hole 14, and it is impossible or extremely difficult for the game ball to enter the first big winning hole 14.例文帳に追加When the normal AT opening/closing member 14k operates in the open state, it becomes possible for the game ball to enter the first big winning hole 14.例文帳に追加In this way, it is possible for the game ball to enter the first big winning hole 14 only when the normal AT opening/closing member 14k is in the open state. When game balls enter the first big winning hole 14, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

In addition, the game area 6 is provided with a guiding stage 12g that guides the game ball to the second starting port 12. As shown in FIG. In addition, the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the guidance stage 12g can flow down toward the second starting port 12. As shown in FIG.

Further, the game area 6 is provided with a second big winning device 15D (hereinafter also referred to as "VAT 15D") having a second big winning opening 15 into which a game ball can enter. The second big winning device 15D has an operable VAT opening/closing member 15k. The VAT opening/closing member 15k normally closes the second big winning hole 15, and it is impossible or extremely difficult for the game ball to enter the second big winning hole 15.例文帳に追加The VAT opening/closing member 15k can be in an open state. When the VAT opening/closing member 15k is in an open state, it becomes easy for the game ball to enter the second big winning hole 15.例文帳に追加On the other hand, the state in which the VAT opening/closing member 15k closes the second big winning opening 15 is also called "closed state". In this manner, the second big winning opening 15 is opened and closed by the operation of the VAT opening/closing member 15k. When game balls enter the second big winning hole 15, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Here, with reference to FIG. 3, the second big winning device 15D will be described in detail. Inside the second big winning device 15D, a gate-shaped second big winning hole sensor 15a capable of detecting a game ball entering the second big winning hole 15 and allowing the game ball to pass downward is provided. It is

A specific area 16 through which a game ball can pass (enter) and a non-specific area 17 are provided in the downstream area of the second big winning hole sensor 15a. A game ball that has passed through the second big winning hole sensor 15a is sorted into a specific area 16 or a non-specific area 17 by a sorting device 16D. The distribution device 16D includes a distribution member 16k made of a substantially rectangular flat plate, and a distribution solenoid 16s that drives the distribution member 16k. The distribution member 16k is configured to be slidable left and right by driving a distribution solenoid 16s.

When the distribution solenoid 16s is not energized, the distribution member 16k is in the first state (passage prevention state: the left end of the distribution member 16k in the front view of FIG. 3A) that prevents passage of the game ball to the specific area 16 is positioned slightly to the right of the left end of the specific region 16, and the distribution member 16k covers the specific region 16 directly above it). When the sorting member 16k is in the first state, it is impossible or extremely difficult for the game ball that has entered the second big winning hole 15 to pass through the specific area 16 after passing through the second big winning hole sensor 15a. It is difficult and passes through the non-specific area 17 . The route of the game ball flowing down from the second big winning hole 15 to the non-specific area 17 is called a first route.

On the other hand, when the distribution solenoid 16s is energized, the distribution member 16k is in a second state (passage permission state: swinging in the front view of FIG. The left end of the dividing member 16k is positioned slightly to the left of the right end of the specific region 16, the distribution member 16k does not cover the specific region 16 directly above it, and the specific region 16 is open directly above it). When the distribution member 16k is in the second state, the game ball that has won the second big winning hole 15 can easily pass through the specific area 16 after passing through the second big winning hole sensor 15a. The route of the game ball flowing down from the second big winning port 15 to the specific area 16 is called a second route.

Basically, the distribution member 16k is held in the first state. That is, it can be said that the first state is the normal state of the distribution member 16k. Only in a predetermined round game (for example, 10R), the distribution solenoid 16s is energized and can be changed to the second state.

The specific area 16 and the non-specific area 17 are provided with a specific area sensor 16a and a non-specific area sensor 17a that detect game balls passing through (entering) the respective areas 16 and 17 and pass the game balls downward. .

Only one of the first big winning device 14D and the second big winning device 15D can be provided as long as the game is not hindered.

Also, at substantially the bottom of the game area 6, there are provided two out holes 19 for discharging the game balls that have been hit into the game area 6 but have not won in any of the winning holes to the outside of the game area 6. there is Also, the game board 1 is provided with a board lamp 54 capable of emitting light.

By the way, the game area 6 in which game balls can flow can be divided into a left game area (first game area) on the left side of the center in the horizontal direction and a right game area (second game area) on the right side. The operation mode of the handle 72k that shoots the game ball so that the game ball flows down the left game area is called "left hitting". On the other hand, the operation mode of the handle 72k that shoots the game ball so that the game ball flows down the right game area is called "right hitting". In the pachinko game machine PY1, a flow path through which a game ball can flow down when a game ball is shot left-handed is called a first flow path R1, and a game ball flows down when a game ball is shot right-handed. A possible flow path is referred to as the second flow path R2. The first flow path R1 and the second flow path R2 are also composed of a large number of game nails and the like.

A first starting port 11 and two general winning ports 10 are provided on the first flow path R1. Therefore, the player can aim to win the first starting hole 11 or the general winning hole 10 by shooting the game ball so as to flow down the first flow path R1 by hitting to the left. On the other hand, a second starting port 12, a gate 13, a first big winning port 14, and a second big winning port 15 are provided on the second flow path R2. Therefore, the player shoots the game ball so as to flow down the second flow path R2 by hitting to the right, thereby passing the gate 13, the second starting port 12, the first big winning port 14, or the second It is possible to aim to win a prize to the big prize opening 15.例文帳に追加

In addition, game balls that did not enter any of the winning openings (first starting opening 11, second starting opening 12, general winning opening 10, first big winning opening 14, and second big winning opening 15) It is guided to the out port 19 and discharged. Also, the number of winning balls to be awarded to each winning hole can be appropriately set.

In addition, a display device 8 is arranged below and to the left of the game area 6 formed on the front surface of the game board 1 (part other than the game area 6). As shown in FIG. 4, the display devices 8 include a special figure 1 indicator 81a that variably displays the special figure 1, a special figure 2 indicator 81b that variably displays the special figure 2, and a general figure that is variably displayed. A normal map display 82 is included. In addition, the display device 8 has a special figure 1 reservation indicator 83a that displays the number of special figures 1 pending (U1: the number of variable display of the special figure 1 by the special figure 1 indicator 81a is suspended), which will be described later. And the special figure 2 reservation indicator 83b which displays the special figure 2 reservation number (U2: the number that the variable display of the special figure 2 by the special figure 2 indicator 81b is withheld) which will be described later is included.

The variable display of the special figure 1 is executed when the special figure 1 lottery is performed with the winning of the game ball to the first start port 11 as a trigger. Also, the variable display of the special figure 2 is executed when the special figure 2 lottery is performed with the winning of the game ball to the second start port 12 as a trigger. Winning of the game ball to the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12 corresponds to "establishment of a predetermined condition" of the present invention. In the following description, the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are collectively called the special figure, and the special figure 1 lottery and the special figure 2 lottery are collectively called the special figure lottery. In addition, the special figure 1 indicator 81a and the special figure 2 indicator 81b are collectively referred to as the special figure indicator 81. Furthermore, the special figure 1 reservation indicator 83a and the special figure 2 reservation indicator 83b are collectively referred to as the special figure reservation indicator 83.

The variable display of the special figure notifies the result of the special figure lottery. In the variable display of the special figure, it is stopped and displayed after the special figure is variably displayed. The special figure to be stopped and displayed (stop special figure, special symbol derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) is one special figure selected from a plurality of kinds of special figures by a special figure lottery. When the stop special figure is a predetermined special figure (a special figure of a specific stop mode, i.e., a jackpot pattern), the large winning openings (the first large winning opening 14 and the second large winning opening 15) are opened. A jackpot game (an example of a special game) is performed.

The special figure indicator 81 is composed of, for example, eight LEDs (Light Emitting Diodes) arranged side by side, and displays a special figure according to the result of the special figure lottery by its lighting mode. For example, when the result of the special drawing lottery is a jackpot (one of a plurality of types of jackpots described later), the special drawing indicator 81 displays "□□■■□□■■" (□: lighting, ■ : off), the jackpot pattern consisting of the lighting of the 1st, 2nd, 5th, and 6th LEDs from the left is displayed. In addition, when the result of the special figure lottery is a loss, the special figure indicator 81 displays a losing pattern composed of lighting only the rightmost LED, such as "■■■■■■■□". do. In addition, the lighting mode of the LED corresponding to the result of the special drawing lottery is not limited, and can be set as appropriate. Therefore, for example, all the LEDs may be extinguished as a lost pattern.

In addition, in the variable display of the special figure, the special figure is variably displayed over a predetermined fluctuation time before the special figure is stopped and displayed. The aspect of the variable display of the special figure is, for example, the aspect in which each LED is lit so that the light flows repeatedly from left to right. In addition, the aspect of the variable display of the special figure is not particularly limited, and if each LED is not displayed (lighting display in a specific aspect), all LEDs may be set as appropriate, such as blinking all at once.

By the way, in the pachinko game machine PY1, when a game ball enters the first start hole 11 or the second start hole 12, various random numbers (numerical information and determination information) for performing special lottery etc. example) may be acquired. These various random numbers are temporarily stored in the special figure reservation storage unit 105 described later as special figure reservation. In the following, various random numbers obtained by winning (entering the game ball) to the first start port 11 are referred to as "special figure 1 related random numbers", and winning the game ball to the second start port 12 Various random numbers obtained by (entry) are referred to as "special figure 2 related random numbers". Here, the special figure 1 relation random number is stored in the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a in the special figure reservation storage unit 105 as the special figure 1 reservation. On the other hand, the special figure 2 relation random number is stored in the special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b in the special figure reservation storage unit 105 as the special figure 2 reservation. To the number of special figures 1 reservation that can be stored in the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a (number of special figures 1 reservation) and the number of special figures 2 reservations that can be stored in the special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b (number of special figures 2 reservations) can set an upper limit (for example, 4). In the following, the special figure 1 reservation and the special figure 2 reservation are collectively referred to as "special figure reservation", and the special figure 1 reservation number and the special figure 2 reservation number are collectively referred to as "special figure reservation number". In addition, the special figure 1 relation random number and the special figure 2 relation random number are collectively referred to as "special figure relation random number".

In the pachinko game machine PY1, when the variable display of the special symbol is not performed immediately after the game ball enters the first start port 11 or the second start port 12, specifically, the variable display of the special symbol is being executed. If there is a prize during the execution of the jackpot game (special game state), the variable display of the special figure for the prize (or the right of the special figure lottery) can be reserved. The special figure reservation stored in the special figure reservation storage unit 105 is terminated when the variable display of the special figure based on the special figure reservation becomes possible. That is, the digestion of the special figure reservation means that the special figure relation random number etc. corresponding to the special figure reservation is determined, and the variable display of the special figure for showing the determination result is executed.

And the special figure reservation number is displayed on the special figure reservation indicator 83 . Each of the special figure 1 reservation indicator 83a and the special figure 2 reservation indicator 83b is composed of, for example, four LEDs, and displays the special figure reservation number by lighting the LED for the special figure reservation number. Is possible.

In addition, the variable display of the general map notifies the result of the general map lottery. In the variable display of the normal map, after the normal map is displayed variably, the display is stopped. The normal map to be stopped and displayed (stop normal map, normal map derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) is one normal map selected from a plurality of types of normal map lottery. When the stop-displayed normal pattern is a predetermined specific normal pattern (predetermined stop mode normal pattern, ie, winning pattern), an auxiliary game is performed to open the second starting port 12 (electric chew 12D). .

The general pattern indicator 82 is composed of, for example, two LEDs, and displays the general pattern according to the results of the general pattern lottery by its lighting mode. When the result of the normal pattern lottery is winning, the normal pattern display 82 displays a winning pattern composed of lighting of both LEDs such as "□□" (□: lighting, ■: lighting off). In addition, when the result of the normal drawing lottery is a loss, a losing pattern composed of only the right LED lighting is displayed, such as "■□". A mode in which all the LEDs are extinguished may be adopted as the lost pattern. In addition, the lighting mode of the LED corresponding to the result of the normal drawing lottery is not limited, and can be set as appropriate.

Also, before the normal map is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the normal map is performed for a predetermined fluctuation time. The mode of the variable display of the normal map is, for example, a mode in which both LEDs are lit alternately. In addition, the aspect of the variable display of the normal figure is not particularly limited, and if each LED is not displayed stopped (lighting display in a specific aspect), all LEDs may be set as appropriate, such as blinking all at once .

In the pachinko game machine PY1, when a game ball passes through the gate 13, a normal symbol random number (an example of numerical information or determination information) for performing a general pattern lottery may be obtained. This random number is stored in the general pattern reservation storage unit 106, which will be described later, on condition that the normal pattern variable display or the auxiliary game is not being executed. It is possible to set an upper limit (for example, four) to the number of normal pattern reservations (the number of normal pattern reservations) that can be stored in the general pattern reservation storage unit 106 . In the following, the normal symbol random number obtained by passing the game ball through the gate 13 is also referred to as "normal symbol related random number".

Next, the production unit 1U attached to the back surface of the game board 1 will be described with reference to FIG. The production unit 1U is formed by unitizing a plurality of devices that mainly produce production. An image display device 50, a first panel movable device (hereinafter referred to as "on-board movable device") 55, and a second panel movable device (hereinafter referred to as "under-board movable device") 56 are mounted on the effect unit 1U.

The image display device 50 is composed of, for example, a 20-inch 3D liquid crystal display, a dot display, a 7-segment display, and the like, and has a display section 50a (display section) capable of displaying patterns and the like.

The on-board movable device 55 is arranged in front of the display section 50a, is movable along the display section 50a, and includes a decorated on-board movable body 55k (movable body). The underboard movable device 56 is arranged in front of the display section 50a, is movable along the display section 50a, and includes a decorated underboard movable body 56k.

FIG. 5(A) schematically shows how the on-board movable body 55k and the lower-board movable body 56k are held in a normal standby state (initial position) in which they are not in operation. When the drive source of the on-board movable device 55 is driven, the on-board movable body 55k moves downward (falls), and when the drive source of the under-board movable device 56 drives, the under-board movable body 56k moves upward (rises). do. At this time, the image display device 50 is covered with the lowered upper board movable body 55k or the raised lower board movable body 56k, and the image display device 50 becomes difficult to see.

It should be noted that the positions and numbers of members and devices provided in the game board unit YU can be appropriately changed within a range that does not interfere with the game.

2. Electrical Configuration of Gaming Machine Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 and 7. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, the pachinko game machine PY1 has a special figure lottery, a variable display of a special figure, a jackpot game, a game state setting described later, a normal figure lottery, a variable display of a normal figure, an auxiliary game, and the like. A game control board (hereinafter referred to as "main control board") 100 that controls game profits (progress of the game), game effects according to the progress of the game by the main control board 100 (special figure fluctuation effect (determination result suggestion effect), suspension effect, jackpot game effect), customer waiting effect, operation promotion effect that prompts operation during the period when the operation of the normal button 40 or the special button 41 is valid (operation valid period), etc. A control board") 120, and a payout control board 170 for controlling the payout of game balls, etc. are provided further behind the image display device 50 of the game board 1. FIG. The main control board 100 can be positioned as a game control unit that controls games. In addition, the sub-control board 120 can be positioned as an effect control section that controls effects together with the image control board 140, the lamp control circuit 151, and the sound control circuit 161, which will be described later. In addition, the effect control unit includes at least a sub-control board 120, and uses effect means (image display device 50, speaker 52 (output means), frame lamp 53, board lamp 54, and movable devices 55, 56, etc.) It is sufficient if the game effect, the customer waiting effect, and the operation promoting effect can be controlled.

Moreover, the pachinko game machine PY1 is provided with a power board 190. As shown in FIG. The power board 190 supplies power to the main control board 100, the sub-control board 120, and the payout control board 170, and supplies necessary power to other devices via these boards. A backup power supply circuit 192 is provided on the power supply board 190 . The backup power supply circuit 192 supplies power to the game RAM 104 of the main control board 100 and the performance RAM 124 of the sub control board 120, which will be described later, when power is not supplied to the pachinko game machine PY1. Therefore, the information stored in the game RAM 104 of the main control board 100 and the effect RAM 124 of the sub-control board 120 is retained even when the pachinko game machine PY1 is powered off. A power switch 191 is connected to the power board 190 . By turning the power switch 191 ON or OFF, the power is turned on and off. A backup power supply circuit for the game RAM 104 of the main control board 100 may be provided on the main control board 100 , or a backup power supply circuit for the performance RAM 124 of the sub control board 120 may be provided on the sub control board 120 .

As shown in FIG. 6, the main control board 100 is mounted with a game control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter "game control microcomputer") 101 for controlling the progress of the game of the pachinko game machine PY1 according to a program. The game control microcomputer 101 includes a game ROM (Read Only Memory) 103 storing programs, tables, etc. for controlling the progress of the game, a game RAM (Random Access Memory) 104 used as a work memory, and A game CPU (Central Processing Unit) 102 for executing a program stored in a game ROM 103 is included.

The game ROM 103 stores programs for performing main control main processing, main side timer interrupt processing, and the like, which will be described later. In addition, the game ROM 103 contains a jackpot determination table, a jackpot pattern type determination table, a reach determination table, a special figure variation pattern determination table, a look-ahead determination table, a jackpot game control table, a hit determination table, and a normal figure variation pattern determination table. , Auxiliary game control table, etc. are stored. Note that the game ROM 103 may be externally attached. In addition, the game RAM 104 is provided with the above-described special figure reservation storage unit 105, normal figure reservation storage unit 106, and the like.

In addition, the main control board 100 has a game I/O (Input/Output) port unit 118 for inputting and outputting data and signals, and a game CPU 102 for clearing information stored in the game RAM 104. A RAM clear switch 119 is mounted for this purpose.

Various sensors MS and various actuators MA are connected to the main control board 100 via a predetermined relay board (not shown). Therefore, signals output from various sensors MS are input to the main control board 100 . The main control board 100 also outputs signals to various actuators MA.

The various sensors MS connected to the main control board 100 include a first starting hole sensor that detects a game ball that has entered the first starting hole 11, and a second starting hole sensor that detects a game ball that has entered the second starting hole 12. A starting opening sensor, a general winning opening sensor that detects a game ball that has entered the general winning opening 10, a gate sensor that detects a gaming ball that has passed through the gate 13, and a first winning opening that detects a game ball that has won a first large winning opening 14. A big winning hole sensor, a second big winning hole sensor 15a that detects the game ball that has won the second big winning hole 15, a specific area sensor 16a that detects a game ball that has passed through the specific area 16 (entered the specific area 16), And, a non-specific area sensor 17a for detecting a game ball that has passed through the non-specific area 17 (entered the non-specific area 17) is included. When each sensor detects a game ball, it outputs a signal to the main control board 100 according to the content of the detection. The types and number of sensors connected to the main control board 100 can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game.

In addition, the various actuators MA connected to the main control board 100 include an electric throttle solenoid for driving the electric throttle opening/closing member 12k of the electric throttle 12D, and a normal AT opening/closing member 14k for the first prize winning device 14D. 1 big winning opening solenoid, the second big winning opening solenoid that drives the VAT opening/closing member 15k of the second big winning device 15D, and the distribution solenoid 16s that drives the distribution member 16k of the distribution device 16D are included. . The type and number of actuators connected to the main control board 100 can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game.

Furthermore, the main control board 100 is connected with the display devices 8 (special figure display device 81, normal figure display device 82, and special figure reservation display device 83). Display control of these display devices 8 is performed by a game control microcomputer 101 .

The main control board 100 also transmits various commands to the payout control board 170 and receives signals from the payout control board 170 for payout monitoring. The payout control board 170 includes a card unit CU (which is installed adjacent to the pachinko game machine PY1 and enables ball lending based on information such as an inserted prepaid card) and a prize ball payout device 73. , and a launcher 72 is connected via a launch control circuit 175 . The firing device 72 includes a handle 72k (see FIG. 1).

The payout control board 170 pays out prize balls using the prize ball payout device 73 and the rental ball payout device 74 based on the signal from the game control microcomputer 101 and the signal from the connected card unit CU. Or pay out rental balls. The number of game balls to be paid out is output to the payout control board 170 .

The shooting device 72 is also provided with a touch switch capable of detecting contact with a handle 72k (see FIG. 1) by a person such as a player. When the player operates the handle 72 k , the touch switch detects the player's contact with the handle 72 k and outputs a detection signal to the payout control board 170 . Also, the firing device 72 is connected to a firing volume knob capable of detecting the rotation angle (operation amount) of the handle 72k. The shooting device 72 drives the shooting solenoid so that the game ball is shot with the strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 72k detected by the shooting volume knob. In addition, in the pachinko game machine PY1, one game ball is shot about every 0.6 seconds while the rotation operation to the handle 72k is maintained.

In addition, the main control board 100 transmits various commands including information on the game to the sub-control board 120 according to the progress of the game. Based on various commands sent from the main control board 100 , the sub-control board 120 can grasp the progress of the game (game control details) by the main control board 100 . The connection between the main control board 100 and the sub control board 120 is a unidirectional communication connection that allows only transmission of signals from the main control board 100 to the sub control board 120 . That is, between the main control board 100 and the sub-control board 120, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode) (not shown) is interposed as communication direction control means.

As shown in FIG. 7, the sub-control board 120 is mounted with an effect control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter "effect control microcomputer") 121 for controlling the effect of the pachinko game machine PY1 according to a program. The performance control microcomputer 121 (performance control means) includes a performance ROM 123 storing a program or the like for controlling performance with the progress of the game by the main control board 100, a performance RAM 124 used as a work memory, and A performance CPU 122 for executing a program stored in a performance ROM 123 is included.

Further, the effect ROM 123 stores programs for performing sub-control main processing, reception interrupt processing, sub-side timer interrupt processing, and the like, which will be described later. Note that the performance ROM 123 may be externally attached.

Also, the sub-control board 120 is mounted with an effect I/O port section 138 for inputting and outputting data and signals, and an RTC (Real Time Clock) 139 . The RTC 139 measures the current date and time (date and time). The RTC 139 is operated by the power supplied to the pachinko game machine PY1 from a predetermined island power supply (not shown), and when the power is not supplied from the island power supply, the power board 190 operates. It operates by power supplied from a backup power supply circuit 192 provided. Therefore, the RTC 139 can measure the current date and time even when the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is not powered on. A backup power supply circuit for the RTC 139 may be provided on the sub-control board 120 . A circuit including a capacitor or an internal battery (button battery or the like) can be adopted as the backup power supply circuit.

An image control board 140 is connected to the sub control board 120 . The effect control microcomputer 121 of the sub control board 120 is based on the command received from the main control board 100, that is, according to the progress of the game by the main control board 100, the image display device to the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140. 50 display control is performed. The connection between the sub-control board 120 and the image control board 140 enables both transmission of signals from the sub-control board 120 to the image control board 140 and transmission of signals from the image control board 140 to the sub-control board 120. two-way communication connection.

The image control board 140 includes an image ROM 142 storing programs for image control, an image RAM 143 used as a work memory, and an image CPU 141 for executing the programs stored in the image ROM 142. . The image control board 140 also includes a CGROM 145 storing image data to be displayed on the image display device 50, a VRAM 146 used for developing image data stored in the CGROM 145, and a VDP (Video Display Processor) 144. It has Of course, all or part of these electronic components may be configured as one chip. The CGROM 145 stores, for example, image data (still image data and moving image data, specifically characters, items, figures, letters, numbers, symbols, etc.) for displaying images to be displayed on the image display device 50. (including background images) and image data such as background images) are stored.

The VDP 144 reads the image data from the CGROM 145 and develops it in the development area in the VRAM 146 according to the display list created by the image CPU 141 based on the command from the effect control microcomputer 121 . Then, the developed image data are appropriately synthesized and an image is drawn in the frame buffer in the VRAM 146 . Then, the image drawn in the frame buffer is output to the image display device 50 as RGB signals. As a result, various effect images are displayed on the display section 50a.

Note that the display list is composed of a command group for instructing execution of drawing on a frame-by-frame basis. The display list contains information on various parameters such as the type of image to be drawn, the position to draw the image, the order of priority of display, the display magnification, and the transmittance of the image.

Based on the command received from the main control board 100, that is, according to the progress of the game by the main control board 100, the performance control microcomputer 121 outputs voice, music, effect sound, etc. from the speaker 52 via the voice control circuit 161. to output

Sound data such as sound output from the speaker 52 is stored in the performance ROM 123 of the sub-control board 120 . A CPU may be mounted on the audio control circuit 161 as a substrate. In this case, the CPU may be caused to execute voice control. Furthermore, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the board and the voice data may be stored in the ROM. Alternatively, the speaker 52 may be connected to the image control board 140 to cause the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 to perform audio control. Furthermore, in this case, the audio data may be stored in the image ROM 142 of the image control board 140 .

Further, various switches serving as input units, various actuators SA serving as drive sources, and various lamps SL are connected to the sub-control board 120 via a predetermined relay board (not shown). Signals output from various switches are input to the sub-control board 120 . Also, the sub-control board 120 outputs signals to various actuators SA. Also, the sub-control board 120 performs lighting control of various lamps SL via the lamp control circuit 151 based on commands received from the main control board 100 .

Various switches connected to the sub-control board 120 include a normal button detection switch 40a and a special button detection switch 41a. The normal button detection switch 40a detects that the normal button 40 has been pressed. The special button detection switch 41a detects that the special button 41 has been pressed. Each detection switch 40a, 41a outputs a signal to the sub-control board 120 according to the detected content. The type and number of switches connected to the sub-control board 120 can be appropriately changed within a range that does not interfere with the game.

The various actuators SA connected to the sub-control board 120 include motors for driving the on-board movable device 55, the under-board movable device 56, the frame movable device 58, and the like. It is possible to cause a predetermined operation to be performed. Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 121 creates operation pattern data that determines the operation mode of each movable device, and controls the operation of each movable device via the lamp control circuit 151 . The type and number of actuators connected to the sub-control board 120 can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game.

Various lamps SL connected to the sub-control board 120 include a frame lamp 53, a board lamp 54, etc., and each lamp emits light. Specifically, the production control microcomputer 121 creates light emission pattern data (data for deciding on/off, light emission color, etc., also called lamp data) that determines the light emission mode of each lamp, and controls the light emission of each lamp according to the light emission pattern data. Control. Note that data stored in the performance ROM 123 of the sub-control board 120 is used to create the light emission pattern data.

A CPU may be mounted using the lamp control circuit 151 as a substrate. In this case, the CPU may be caused to execute lighting control of each lamp and operation control of each movable device. Furthermore, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the substrate, and data relating to light emission patterns and operation patterns may be stored in the ROM. Also, the type and number of lamps connected to the sub-control board 120 can be appropriately changed within a range that does not interfere with the game.

3. Principal Games Performed by Gaming Machine Next, the principal games performed by the pachinko gaming machine PY1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 to 15. FIG.

3-1. Games Related to Universal Figures First, games related to universal charts will be described. The pachinko game machine PY1 conducts a normal drawing lottery when the shot game ball passes through the gate 13. - 特許庁When the general pattern lottery is performed, the general pattern display device 82 performs variable display of the general pattern (stop display after performing variable display). Here, the normal symbols to be stopped and displayed include winning symbols and losing symbols. In addition, the losing pattern of the normal map is also called "losing universal map" in order to distinguish it from the losing pattern of the special pattern, which will be described later. When the winning symbols are stopped and displayed, the auxiliary game is executed, and the game related to the passage of the gate 13 ends. On the other hand, when the losing normal figure is stopped and displayed, the auxiliary game is not performed, and the game related to passing through the gate 13 ends. Also, in the following, the passage of the game ball through the gate 13 when the variable display of the normal pattern or the auxiliary game is not performed is referred to as "establishment of the normal pattern fluctuation start condition".

The pachinko gaming machine PY1 acquires a general-pattern related random number when the general-pattern fluctuation start condition is satisfied in performing such a series of games (normal-pattern lottery, variable display of the general-pattern, auxiliary game). As shown in FIG. 8(A), normal pattern random numbers are included in general pattern related random numbers to be acquired. The normal symbol random number is a random number (determination information) for performing a hit determination. Each random number is appropriately bounded.

3-1-1. Hit Judgment Hit judgment is a judgment for determining whether or not there is a hit (whether or not an auxiliary game is executed) using one or a plurality of hit determination tables as shown in FIG. 9(A). The hit determination table can be associated with a game state, which will be described later. That is, the game state includes a non-time-saving state and a time-saving state, and the hit determination table used in the non-time-saving state (non-time-saving hit determination table) and the time-saving state hit determination table (for time-saving It is possible to distinguish between the hit determination table) and the In each hit determination table, the determination value of the normal symbol random number (normal symbol random number) is distributed to the hit and the loss, which are the results of the hit determination. Therefore, the pachinko game machine PY1 collates the acquired normal symbol random numbers with the hit determination table, and performs hit determination as to whether it is a hit or a miss. Then, based on the result of the hit determination, the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination for performing the variable display of the normal pattern is performed. If the result of the hit determination is hit, basically, the hit pattern is displayed in a variable display of the normal pattern and stopped. On the other hand, if the result of the hit determination is a loss, basically, the lost normal figure is stopped and displayed in variable display of the normal figure. Also, the probability of winning a prize can be changed as appropriate.

3-1-2. Normal figure fluctuation Normal figure fluctuation pattern determination is a determination for determining a normal figure fluctuation pattern using one or more normal figure fluctuation pattern determination tables as shown in FIG. 9(B). The normal pattern fluctuation pattern is identification information related to predetermined matters related to the variable display of the normal pattern, such as the normal pattern fluctuation time.

Normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table can be associated with the gaming state. That is, as the normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table, the normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table used in the non-time saving state (non-time saving normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table) and the normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table used in the time saving state ( It is possible to distinguish between time-saving normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table).

In each normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination table, one normal pattern fluctuation pattern, which is the result of the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination, is stored for each normal pattern to be stopped. That is, the pachinko game machine PY1 can vary the normal figure fluctuation time between the non-time saving state and the time saving state. For example, in a non-time-saving state, for the variable display of the normal figure when stopping the normal figure of loss (losing general figure), the normal figure fluctuation time is determined to be a normal figure fluctuation pattern, for example, 30 seconds, and the winning pattern For the variable display of the normal pattern in the case of stop display, the normal pattern fluctuation time is determined to be, for example, 30 seconds. In addition, in the time saving state, the variable display of the normal pattern when the losing normal pattern is stopped and displayed is determined to be a normal pattern fluctuation pattern in which the normal pattern fluctuation time is, for example, 5 seconds, and when the winning pattern is stopped and displayed For the variable display of the figure, a normal figure variation pattern is determined in which the normal figure variation time is, for example, 5 seconds. The variable display of the normal pattern fluctuation time associated with the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determined by this determination is performed by the normal pattern display device 82 . Moreover, it is possible to appropriately change these normal pattern fluctuation times. In this way, by performing the hit determination and the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination, the normal pattern display device 82 performs variable display of the normal pattern.

3-1-3. Auxiliary game Auxiliary game is a variable display of the general pattern, and as a display result (the result of the general pattern lottery), it is executed when the winning design is stopped and displayed (derived).

Auxiliary games include elements (auxiliary game components) that constitute the auxiliary game, that is, various elements such as the number of times the electric chew 12D is opened and the opening time for each opening. Each of these elements is associated with a game state. The pachinko game machine PY1 controls the auxiliary game using one or more auxiliary game control tables as shown in FIG. 9(C) based on the game state. The auxiliary game control table is associated with the game state. Each auxiliary game control table stores auxiliary game components. Also, the number of times of opening and the opening time in each of these elements can be changed as appropriate.

The pachinko game machine PY1 can vary the opening time of the electric chew 12D between the auxiliary game in the non-time saving state and the auxiliary game in the time saving state. For example, in the auxiliary game in the non-time-saving state, the electric chew 12D is opened only for the first opening time (time (for example, 0.08 seconds) in which it is difficult for the game ball to win the electric chew 12D). In addition, below, the auxiliary game in the non-time saving state is also referred to as "short opening auxiliary game". In addition, in the auxiliary game in the time saving state, the electric chew 12D is held for a second opening time longer than the first opening time (a time (for example, 3.00 seconds) that makes it easy to win the game ball with the electric chew 12D). Open. In addition, below, the auxiliary game in the time saving state is also referred to as "long open auxiliary game".

3-2. Games Related to Special Figures Next, games related to special figures will be described. The pachinko game machine PY1 performs a special figure 1 lottery when the launched game ball wins the first start hole 11.例文帳に追加When the special figure 1 lottery is performed, the special figure 1 variable display (stopped display after performing the variable display) is performed on the special figure 1 display device 81a to notify the result of the special figure 1 lottery. Here, the stop-displayed special figure 1 includes a jackpot symbol and a losing symbol. That is, the results of the special figure 1 lottery include a big hit and a loss. When the jackpot symbols are stop-displayed, the jackpot game is executed, a new game state is set, and the game based on the winning is finished. On the other hand, when the losing symbol is stopped and displayed, the big win game is not performed, and the game based on the winning is finished.

Similarly, the pachinko game machine PY1 performs a special figure 2 lottery when the launched game ball wins the second start hole 12.例文帳に追加When the special figure 2 lottery is performed, the special figure 2 variable display (stop display after performing the variable display) is performed in the special figure 2 display device 81b to notify the result of the special figure 2 lottery. Here, the stop-displayed special figure 2 includes a big hit pattern and a losing pattern. That is, the results of the special figure 2 lottery include a big hit and a loss. When the jackpot symbols are stop-displayed, the jackpot game is executed, a new game state is set, and the game based on the winning is finished. On the other hand, when the losing symbol is stopped and displayed, the big winning game is not performed, and the game based on the winning is finished.

In the following, the winning of the game ball in the first starting hole 11 is called "establishment of the first starting condition", and the winning of the game ball in the second starting hole 12 is called "establishment of the second starting condition". It says. Also, "satisfaction of the first starting condition" and "satisfaction of the second starting condition" are collectively referred to as "satisfaction of the starting condition". In addition, the special design losing pattern is also called "loss special pattern" in order to distinguish it from the above-mentioned normal pattern losing pattern.

When the pachinko gaming machine PY1 performs such a series of games (special figure lottery, variable display of special figures, jackpot game, game state setting), it acquires a special figure related random number by establishment of the start condition, Various decisions are made on random numbers. As shown in FIG. 8B, the special symbol-related random numbers to be acquired include special symbol random numbers (jackpot random numbers), jackpot symbol type random numbers, reach random numbers, and special symbol variation pattern random numbers. The special symbol random number is a random number for judging the jackpot. The jackpot symbol type random number is a random number for judging the jackpot symbol type. A reach random number is a random number for performing reach determination. The special symbol variation pattern random number is a random number for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol. Each random number is appropriately bounded. Note that the random number is also called determination information.

3-2-1. Jackpot Judgment Jackpot judgment is a judgment for determining whether or not a jackpot (whether or not to execute a jackpot game) using one or a plurality of jackpot determination tables as shown in FIG. 10(A). The game state includes a normal probability state and a high probability state, and the jackpot determination table is associated with whether it is the normal probability state or the high probability state. That is, as the jackpot determination table, it is possible to distinguish between a jackpot determination table used in a normal probability state (normal probability jackpot determination table) and a jackpot determination table used in a high probability state (high probability jackpot determination table). It is possible.

In each big hit determination table, the judgment value of the special symbol random number (special symbol random number value) is distributed to the big hit and loss, which are the results of the big hit determination. The pachinko game machine PY1 collates the acquired special symbol random numbers with a big win determination table to determine whether it is a big win or a loss. As shown in FIG. 10(A), the high-probability jackpot determination table has more special symbol random number determination values that are determined to be a jackpot than the normal-probability jackpot determination table. In addition, it is possible to appropriately change the probability of winning the jackpot.

3-2-2. Jackpot pattern type determination The jackpot pattern type determination is, when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, uses one or more jackpot pattern type determination tables as shown in FIG. ) is a judgment for determining It is possible to associate the content of the big win, in other words, the constituent elements of the big win including the game privilege given to the player, for each type of the big win symbol.

The jackpot symbol type determination table is associated with the type of the special symbol that is variably displayed, in other words, the type of the starting port where the winning caused by the jackpot symbol type determination (that generated the jackpot symbol type determination) was performed. is possible. That is, as the jackpot symbol type determination table, the jackpot symbol type determination table (first jackpot symbol type determination table) used when performing the variable display of the special figure 1, and the jackpot used when performing the variable display of the special figure 2 It is possible to distinguish from the symbol type determination table (second jackpot symbol type determination table).

There are multiple types of jackpot patterns, and in each jackpot pattern type determination table, the judgment value of the jackpot pattern type random number (jackpot pattern type random number) is distributed to the jackpot pattern type that is the result of the jackpot pattern type determination. there is Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 collates the acquired jackpot design type random number with the jackpot design type determination table to determine the type of the jackpot design. In the first jackpot symbol type determination table and the second jackpot symbol type determination table, the jackpot symbol type random numbers are appropriately distributed to various jackpot symbols. In addition, it is possible to appropriately change the distribution rate of the jackpot symbol type. Also, the types of jackpot symbols can be increased or decreased as appropriate.

For example, as shown in FIG. 10(B), the distribution rate of the jackpot pattern type by the jackpot pattern type determination for the special pattern 1 is set to 50% for the jackpot pattern X and 50% for the jackpot pattern Y, and for the special pattern 2 It is possible for the jackpot pattern Z to make the distribution rate of the jackpot pattern type determined by the jackpot pattern type determination 100%. In this way, in the special figure 1 lottery performed by winning the game ball in the first start port 11 and the special figure 2 lottery performed by winning the game ball in the second start port 12, the swing of the jackpot symbol type Different fractions are possible.

3-2-3. Reach determination Reach determination, when the result of the big hit determination is a loss, uses one or more reach determination tables as shown in FIG. This is a judgment for determining whether

The reach determination table can be associated with the gaming state. That is, as the reach determination table, the reach determination table (non-time-saving reach determination table) used in the non-time-saving state and the reach determination table (time-saving reach determination table) used in the time-saving state are distinguished. Is possible.

In each reach determination table, the reach random number determination value (reach random value) is distributed to the reach determination results "with reach (generate reach)" and "no reach (not generate reach)". . Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 collates the obtained reach random number with the reach determination table to determine whether there is reach or not (whether or not to generate reach). As shown in FIG. 10(C), it is possible to change the number of reach random numbers determined to be “with reach (generate reach)” between the non-time-saving reach determination table and the time-saving reach determination table. is. In the following, "with reach (generate reach)" performed on the premise that the result of the jackpot judgment is "losing" is referred to as "losing with reach", and "no reach (not generating reach)". )” is sometimes called “no reach”.

3-2-4. Toku-zu variation Toku-zu variation pattern determination uses one or more special symbol variation pattern determination table (special figure variation pattern determination table) as shown in FIGS. It is a determination for determining (special figure variation pattern), and is performed in any case of a big hit or a loss as a result of the big hit determination. The special figure fluctuation pattern is identification information for identifying predetermined matters related to the special figure fluctuation time and the production flow (production content) of the special figure fluctuation production described later. It should be noted that the special figure fluctuation pattern, in addition to the special figure fluctuation time and production flow (production content) of special figure fluctuation production, it is possible to include identification information regarding the result of jackpot determination and the result of reach determination. As a special figure variation pattern, it is possible to use a plurality of types of special figure variation patterns with different identification information, respectively, and the number can be changed as appropriate.

The special figure variation pattern determination table can be associated with the type of special symbol that performs variable display to be determined, in other words, the type of starting opening where the winning caused by the special figure variation pattern determination is performed. That is, as a special figure variation pattern determination table, a special figure variation pattern determination table (special figure 1 variation pattern determination table: FIG. 11) used when performing variable display of special figure 1, and a variable display of special figure 2 It is possible to distinguish the special figure variation pattern determination table (special figure 2 variation pattern determination table: FIG. 12) used when.

Each special figure variation pattern determination table can also be associated with the gaming state. That is, as a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table, a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table (non-time saving special figure 1 variation pattern determination table) used in the non-time saving state, and a special figure 1 used in the time saving state It is possible to distinguish from the variation pattern determination table (time saving special figure 1 variation pattern determination table). On the other hand, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table is also used when the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table (special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for non-time saving) used in the non-time saving state and the time saving state It is possible to distinguish from the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table (time saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table). In addition, the special figure variation pattern determination table may not be divided for each game state.

In addition, each special figure variation pattern determination table associated with the gaming state can be further associated with the jackpot determination result, the jackpot symbol type determination result, or the reach determination result. That is, the non-time-saving special figure 1 variation pattern determination table and the non-time-saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table each have a jackpot (for each jackpot symbol type), a reach loss, and a reach loss loss. Similarly, the time-saving special figure 1 variation pattern determination table and the time-saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table each have a jackpot (for each jackpot symbol type), a reach loss, and a reach loss.

Furthermore, the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for each reach no loss can be associated with the number of special figures pending. For example, the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for reach no loss used when the special figure 1 reservation number (U1) is 0 to 2, and the special figure 1 reservation number (U1) is used when it is 3 to 4 It is possible to distinguish between the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for reach no loss. In addition, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for each reach no loss can be associated with the number of special figures pending. For example, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for reach no loss used when the special figure 2 reservation number (U2) is 0 to 2, and the special figure 2 reservation number (U2) is used when it is 3 to 4 It is possible to distinguish between the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for reach no loss.

Then, the variable display of the special figure of the special figure variation time according to the special figure variation pattern determined by each special figure variation pattern determination is performed by the special figure display device 81 . Then, in the special figure variable display, when the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed as a display result (special figure lottery result), the next special figure variable display is not performed immediately, and the jackpot game is executed subsequently. be.

In addition, each special figure fluctuation pattern can be associated with the effect flow of the special figure fluctuation production as shown in the second column from the right of the table of FIGS. 11 and 12.

In addition, as shown in the rightmost column of the table of FIGS. 11 to 12, the special figure fluctuation pattern can be named in association with the special figure (jackpot determination result) and the production contents of the special figure fluctuation production. be. For example, the special figure variation pattern related to the jackpot is called "jackpot variation". On the other hand, in the loss with reach, SP reach, which is a type of reach, is performed. The figure fluctuation pattern is "L loss fluctuation", the special figure fluctuation pattern where the special figure fluctuation production ends with N reach (normal reach production), which is a type of reach, in the loss with reach "N loss fluctuation", The special figure variation pattern related to reach no loss is called "normal loss variation". In addition, N reach corresponds to the "specific reach effect" of the present invention.

3-2-5. Prefetching determination Pachinko game machine PY1 performs prefetching determination using one or a plurality of prefetching determination tables as shown in FIG. 13 based on the acquired special figure-related random numbers. For the look-ahead determination, for example, determination of whether or not the special symbol random number is determined to be a big hit in the big hit determination, determination of which jackpot symbol type the jackpot symbol type random number is determined in the jackpot symbol type determination, special There is a determination of which special figure variation pattern the figure variation pattern random number is determined in the special figure variation pattern determination. The look-ahead determination table can be associated with the type of starting opening related to the starting prize. That is, as the lookahead determination table, a lookahead determination table (first lookahead determination table) when winning the first start opening 11 and a lookahead determination table (second lookahead determination table) when winning the second start opening 12 are used. , can be distinguished.

Also, the look-ahead determination table can be associated with the game state. That is, as the prefetching determination table, the prefetching determination table used in the non-time-saving state (non-time-saving prefetching determination table) and the prefetching determination table used in the time-saving state (time-saving prefetching determination table) are distinguished. Is possible.

That is, the look-ahead determination table includes the first look-ahead determination table used in the non-time-saving state, the first look-ahead determination table used in the time-saving state, and the second look-ahead determination table used in the non-time-saving state. It is possible to distinguish between this and the second look-ahead determination table used in the time saving state. It should be noted that it is possible to appropriately change what kind of determination is included in the prefetch determination.

3-3. Jackpot Game Next, the jackpot game will be described. The jackpot game includes multiple round games with opening and closing of the jackpot (first jackpot 14 or second jackpot 15), and the time between the start of the jackpot game and the start of the first round game. It includes an opening (also referred to as OP) and an ending (also referred to as ED) from the end of the final round game to the end of the jackpot game. Each round begins with the end of the opening or the end of the previous round and ends with the beginning of the next round or the beginning of the ending. Moreover, it is possible not to provide OP and ED. In addition, below, the round game of the predetermined number of times (predetermined order) is simply referred to as "round". For example, the first round game is called "1 round (1R)", and the tenth round game is called "10 rounds (10R)".

Elements that make up such a jackpot game (jackpot game components) include the number of round games, the number of openings of the big winning port (first big winning port 14 or second big winning port 15) in each round game, Includes the type and opening time of each opening (opening pattern), the time to close until the next opening (closing time), the opening time (opening time), and the ending time (ending time). ing. The pachinko game machine PY1 controls the jackpot game using one or a plurality of jackpot game control tables as shown in FIG. 14 after the stop display of the special figure. The jackpot game control table stores jackpot game components for each jackpot game. As jackpot games, it is possible to control one type or a plurality of types of jackpot games.

For example, as shown in FIG. 14, from 1R to 10R, the round game in which the first big winning opening 14 opens for a maximum of 29.5 seconds, or the first big winning opening 14 opens for a maximum of 0.1 seconds. A round game to open is performed. Then, in 10R (final round), there is a round game in which the second large prize winning port 15 opens for a maximum of 29.5 seconds, or a round game in which the second large prize winning port 15 opens for a maximum of 0.1 seconds. done. Further, in each round game, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are detected by the big winning opening sensor, even before the maximum opening time of the big winning openings 14 and 15 elapses, End the round game.

Also, the number of times and time for each element can be changed as appropriate. In addition, the jackpot game can be performed using both the first big winning hole 14 and the second big winning hole 15 or using only one of them.

Here, the specific area 16 will be described in detail. Since the specific area 16 takes a closed state in which a prize cannot be won and an open state in which a prize can be won by the distribution member 16k, the operating mode of the distribution member 16k can be said to be the opening/closing mode of the specific area 16. FIG. Hereinafter, the operating mode of the distribution member 16k is also referred to as "opening/closing mode of the specific region 16". In this way, the distribution member 16k is controlled in a constant operation mode (a constant opening and closing mode of the specific region 16), but a constant operation mode of the distribution member 16k (a constant opening and closing mode of the specific region 16), The difficulty (easiness) of entering the game ball into the specific area 16 in the big win game is set in combination with the opening/closing mode of the second big winning hole 15 in the big win game. Note that hereinafter, the open state of the specific region 16 is also referred to as “V open”.

The distribution solenoid 16s is energized for 15 seconds after the opening of the second big prize opening is started, and the distribution member 16k is controlled to the second state (FIG. 3(B)). Therefore, in a round game in which the second large winning opening 15 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds, the opening time and timing of the second large winning opening 15 and the time and timing during which the distribution member 16k is controlled to the second state Due to the timing, it is easy for the game ball to pass through the specific area 16 (to make the game ball enter the specific area 16). On the other hand, in the round game in which the second large winning opening 15 is opened for a maximum of 0.1 seconds, the opening time and timing of the second large winning opening 15, the time and Due to the timing, it is almost impossible (difficult) for the game ball to pass through the specific area 16 (to make the game ball enter the specific area 16). Thus, in the jackpot game, during the jackpot game, the VAT opening and closing member with the first opening pattern (V long opening pattern) that makes it easy for the game ball to pass through the specific area 16 (hereinafter also referred to as "V passage") The VAT opening/closing member 15k and the distribution member 16k are operated in the jackpot game in which the 15k and the distribution member 16k operate, and in the second opening pattern (V short opening pattern) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area 16. It is possible to execute a jackpot game. Thus, the big hit game in which the VAT opening/closing member 15k and the distribution member 16k operate in the V long open pattern is called "V long big hit". On the other hand, a big hit game in which the VAT opening/closing member 15k and the distribution member 16k operate in the V short open pattern is called "V short big hit".

3-4. Game State Next, the game state will be described. Pachinko machine PY1, as shown in FIG. It is possible to make it into any game state of "jackpot game state". In addition, "low probability low base game state" is "low probability low base state", "low probability high base game state" is "low probability high base state", and "high probability low base game state" is "high probability". "Low base state" and "high probability high base gaming state" can be abbreviated as "high probability high base state", respectively. As states constituting the game state, there are a state related to the probability of being determined as a "big win" in the big win determination and a state related to the ease of opening the electric chew 12D. The former includes a normal probability state and a high probability state. On the other hand, the latter includes a non-time-saving state and a time-saving state.

The normal probability state is set in the "low-probability low-base game state" or "low-probability high-base game state", and is a state in which the probability of being judged as a big hit in the jackpot judgment is a normal probability. The high-probability state is set in the "high-probability low-base game state" or "high-probability high-base game state", and is a state in which the probability of being judged as a big hit in the jackpot judgment is higher than the normal probability. Therefore, it can be said that the high-probability state is more advantageous to the player than the normal-probability state. When the pachinko game machine PY1 is powered on for the first time, a normal probability state is set. Then, by winning a jackpot, it becomes possible to switch from the normal probability state to the high probability state. For example, it is possible to switch to a high probability state by passing a game ball through the specific area 16 in a jackpot game. It is also possible to switch to a high probability state depending on the type of jackpot symbol. The high-probability state can be switched from the high-probability state to the normal-probability state by performing a predetermined number of jackpot determinations without winning the jackpot, or by winning the next jackpot.

The non-time saving state is set in the "low probability low base game state", "high probability low base game state" or "jackpot game state". The time-saving state is set in the "low-probability high-base game state" or "high-probability high-base game state", and compared to the non-time-saving state, the game state in which the opening time of the electric chew 12D in one auxiliary game tends to be longer. is. For example, in the time-saving state, the opening time (eg, 3.00 seconds) is longer than the opening time (eg, 0.08 seconds) of the electric chew 12D in the non-time-saving state. Also, in the time saving state, using the special figure variation pattern determination table that is determined so that the special figure variation pattern with a short special figure variation time is selected more than the non-time saving state, the special figure variation pattern determination is (See FIGS. 11 and 12). As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace of digestion of the special figure reservation becomes faster, and the effective winning to the starting opening (the winning that can be stored as the special figure reservation) is likely to occur. Therefore, it is possible to aim for a big hit under the smooth progress of the game.

Moreover, compared with a non-work-saving state, a time-saving state can make normal figure fluctuation|variation time short easily. For example, in the time saving state, the normal figure fluctuation time (5 seconds) shorter than the normal figure fluctuation time (30 seconds) determined in the non-working time saving state is determined. Therefore, the number of executions of the normal drawing lottery per unit time is greater in the time saving state.

Moreover, the time saving state can be made easier to be determined to be a hit in the hit determination as compared with the non-time saving state. For example, in the time saving state, it is determined to be a hit with a probability (eg, 59936/65536) higher than the probability (eg, 6600/65536) determined to be a hit in the non-time saving state. Therefore, the time-saving state has a larger number of hit determinations per unit time.

Thus, in the time-saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 12D per unit time is longer than in the non-time-saving state, and the game balls are likely to enter the second starting port 12 frequently. As a result, the base, which is the ratio of the number of balls awarded to the number of balls fired, increases. Therefore, in a time-saving state with a high base, it is possible to aim for a jackpot election without greatly reducing the number of game balls possessed. Therefore, it can be said that the time-saving state is more advantageous to the player than the non-time-saving state.

When the pachinko game machine PY1 is powered on for the first time, a non-time-saving state is set. Then, for example, by winning a jackpot, a time saving state can be set. The time-saving state can be changed from the time-saving state to the non-time-saving state by performing a predetermined number of big win determinations without winning the big win or by winning the next big win.

In addition, in the time-saving state, it is easier to win a win than in the non-time-saving state. There are three points about the game related to the normal figure, which are set to be advantageous to the player. However, the points that are set in favor of this player may be some of them.

In addition, the game state after the pachinko game machine PY1 is powered on for the first time is a "low-probability low-base game state" in which the normal probability state and the non-time-saving state are set. This game state is also called "normal game state". In addition, in the "jackpot game state", the hit determination is performed, but the jackpot determination is not performed, so a non-time-saving state is set with the start of the jackpot game. As for the game state, it is possible to use all or part of the game states described above.

4. Main Effects by Game Machine Next, main effects performed by the pachinko game machine PY1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 to 22. FIG.

4-1. Production Mode First, the production mode will be described. The production mode is a division of production (or a higher-level attribute). The pachinko game machine PY1 can set, as production modes, a customer waiting production mode, a normal production mode, a variable probability production mode, a short working hours production mode and a jackpot production mode.

In the customer waiting production mode, a special variable production is performed in the "low probability low base game state", "low probability high base game state", "high probability low base game state" and "high probability high base game state". It is a production mode that can be set when there is no special figure fluctuation production and indicates that it is in a standby state. A customer waiting performance is performed when the customer waiting performance mode is set. In the customer waiting effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 16A-1, a customer waiting demonstration video G100 introducing the pachinko game machine PY1 is displayed on the display section 50a. Further, when the normal button 40 is operated while the customer waiting demonstration video G100 is being displayed, a setting screen G101 for setting the effects of the pachinko game machine PY1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 16(A-2). is displayed. Settings related to effects include volume setting of sound output from the speaker 52, brightness setting of the display unit 50a (“light amount setting”), frequency setting of effects to be executed (“effect setting”), and the like.

Normal production mode can be set when special figure fluctuation production is performed in "low probability low base game state" or "high probability low base game state", and it is a production mode indicating that it is a non-time saving state be. In the normal effect mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 16B-1, a first normal effect mode in which a background image (daytime normal background image G102) representing a daytime mountain view is displayed on the display unit 50a. Then, as shown in FIG. 16(B-2), a second normal effect mode in which a background image (ordinary evening background image G103) representing the scenery of the mountains in the evening is displayed on the display unit 50a; As shown in -3), there is a third normal effect mode in which a background image (normal nighttime background image G104) representing a mountain view at night is displayed on the display unit 50a. It can be switched as one condition that the special figure fluctuation effect is performed once or more times. Further, each of the first to third normal performance modes includes a normal front-stage performance mode before reach is established and a normal rear-stage performance mode after reach is established in the special figure fluctuation performance. In the normal front stage effect mode, any one of the daytime normal background image G102, the evening normal background image G103, and the nighttime normal background image G104 is displayed on the display unit 50a. A custom background image will be displayed. Also, a special performance mode that is set only in the "high probability low base game state" may be provided.

The probability variable production mode is a production mode that can be set when the special figure fluctuation production is performed in the "high probability high base game state", and is a production mode indicating that it is a high probability state and a time saving state. In the probability variation effect mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 16B-4, a background image representing the universe (probability variation background image G105) is displayed on the display section 50a. Furthermore, the probability variation performance mode includes a probability variation front stage performance mode before the reach is established and a probability variation rear stage performance mode after the reach is established in the special figure fluctuation performance. In the variable probability front stage effect mode, the probability variable background image G105 is displayed on the display unit 50a, but in the variable probability latter stage effect mode, a dedicated background image corresponding to the type of reach is displayed.

The time-saving performance mode is a performance mode that can be set when a special figure variation performance is being performed in the "low-probability high-base game state", and is a performance mode indicating a normal probability state and a time-saving state. In the time saving effect mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 16B-5, a background image representing the sky (time saving background image G106) is displayed on the display unit 50a. Furthermore, the time reduction performance mode includes a time reduction front stage performance mode before reach is established and a time reduction rear stage performance mode after reach is established in the special figure fluctuation performance. In the time saving front stage production mode, the background image G106 for time saving is displayed on the display unit 50a, but in the time saving rear stage production mode, a dedicated background image corresponding to the type of reach is displayed.

The jackpot production mode is a production mode that can be set when a jackpot game is being performed in the "jackpot game state", and is a production mode indicating that the jackpot game is being performed. In the jackpot production mode, for example, during the opening of the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. A big win opening effect is performed in which a winning image G108 is displayed. During the round of the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 16(C-2), the display unit 50a displays a round image G109 indicating the number of rounds and a prize ball number image G110 indicating the number of prize balls paid out. A round production will be performed. During the ending of the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 16 (C-3), the ending image G111 suggesting the effect mode set after the jackpot game and the total number of awarded balls are indicated on the display unit 50a. A jackpot ending production is performed in which the total prize number image G112 is displayed.

It should be noted that the types of production modes can be changed or added as appropriate.

4-2. Special figure fluctuation production Next, the special figure fluctuation production (also simply referred to as "variation production") will be described. Pachinko gaming machine PY1, when the variable display of the special figure is started, the special figure variation pattern and the special figure lottery result related to the variable display of the special figure (jackpot determination result, jackpot pattern type determination result, reach determination result, and Based on the special figure fluctuation pattern determination result) etc., the special figure fluctuation production is executed. In the special figure variation effect, the variation display of the effect symbol is performed in the display unit 50a so as to be superimposed on a predetermined background image. The production pattern is composed of, for example, number patterns of 1 to 9, and in the variable display of the production pattern, the production pattern fluctuates with the start of the variable display of the special figure, and the production pattern with the end of the variable display of the special figure. stops. That is, after the special figure fluctuation time and the variable display of the effect design are performed, the variation is stopped and the stop display of the effect design is performed. Then, the result of the special figure lottery is informed by the stop display of the production pattern.

In addition, in the special figure fluctuation production, in addition to the fluctuation display of the production pattern, various functions such as the image display device 50, the speaker 52, the frame lamp 53, the board lamp 54, the movable devices 55, 56, 58, the normal button 40, and the special button 41 It is possible to perform other productions using a production device. In this case, other effects can be continued even after the stop display of the effect symbols.

4-2-1. Effect Symbol Display Area In the display portion 50a of the image display device 50, as shown in FIG. It is possible to provide a symbol area 50b1, a middle effect symbol area 50b2, and a right effect symbol area 50b3. The left effect symbol area 50b1 is an area for displaying the left effect symbol EZ1 when the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in the special figure fluctuation effect. Similarly, the middle production design area 50b2 and the right production design area 50b3 are areas for displaying the middle production design EZ2 and the right production design EZ3.

Further, as shown in FIG. 17A, it is possible to provide a small pattern area 50c in a section at the left end (upper left corner) of the upper end of the display section 50a. The small pattern area 50c is an area for variably displaying the small patterns KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 when the special symbols are variably displayed. The small patterns KZ1, KZ2, KZ3 are composed of numeral patterns 1-9, for example.

In FIG. 17(A), the left effect pattern area 50b1, the medium effect pattern area 50b2, the right effect pattern area 50b3, and the small pattern area 50c are indicated by two-dot chain lines, but this is the left effect symbol area 50b1. , middle effect symbol region 50b2, right effect symbol region 50b3, and small symbol region 50c, but are not actually displayed.

4-2-2. Normal variation The pachinko game machine PY1 can perform normal variation first in the special figure variation effect. The normal variation functions as an effect suggesting that the variable display of the special figure has started.

When the variable display of the special figure is started, for example, as shown in FIG. Left small pattern KZ1, medium and small pattern KZ2, and right small pattern KZ3 are stopped and displayed, variable display of special symbols is not performed, and from the state of waiting for variable display of special symbols, FIG. 17 (B) , along with the start, the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 is started, and the variable display of the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 is started. In addition, "↓" in FIG. 17 indicates that the symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Then, when the special figure fluctuation pattern of the variable display of this special figure is, for example, "normal loss fluctuation", as shown in FIG. 17 (C-1), the left production pattern EZ1 and the right production pattern EZ3 are different. After temporarily stopping in the stop mode, the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are stop-displayed in a stop mode (so-called split eyes) suggesting a loss, as shown in FIG. 17(D). At this time, the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are all stopped and displayed in a stop mode suggesting a failure. There are a plurality of types of stop modes that indicate a failure, such as "1, 1, 2" and "2, 4, 6", in which the symbols on the left and right sides are not the same. On the other hand, when the special figure fluctuation pattern of the variable display of the special figure is a special figure fluctuation pattern with reach such as "N loss fluctuation", as shown in FIG. and the right effect symbol EZ3 are temporarily stopped in the same stop mode (so-called reach eye), and the reach is established. At this time, the fluctuation display of the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 is continuously performed, and the ready-to-win performance corresponding to the special figure fluctuation pattern is performed. It should be noted that the stop order and stop mode of the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 can be changed as appropriate.

4-2-3. The N-reach pachinko game machine PY1 can perform N-reach when the reach is established in the normal variation. The N reach is an effect suggesting that the result of the big win determination may have been a "big win", and functions as an effect for making the player expect a big win.

In the N reach, as shown in FIG. 18 (A), the state in which the reach is established is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), and as shown in FIG. decelerates to Then, when the special figure fluctuation pattern of the variable display of the special figure is, for example, "N loss fluctuation", as shown in FIG. Symbols EZ1, EZ2 and EZ3 are stopped and displayed. At this time, the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are also stopped and displayed all at once in a stop mode suggesting reach-losing. There are a plurality of types of stopping modes that suggest reach-losing, such as "7, 6, 7" and "5, 3, 5", in which the left and right symbols are the same and the middle symbols are different from the left and right symbols. On the other hand, when the special figure fluctuation pattern of the variable display of the special figure is, for example, "N jackpot fluctuation", as shown in FIG. indicate. There are a plurality of types of stop modes suggesting a big win, such as "7, 7, 7" and "2, 2, 2", in which the left and right symbols are the same. At this time, the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are all stopped and displayed in a stop mode suggesting a big win. It should be noted that the content of the N reach effect is not limited to the gradual deceleration of the medium effect symbol EZ2, and can be changed or added as appropriate.

4-2-4. SP reach The pachinko game machine PY1 can perform SP reach after N reach. The SP reach is an effect suggesting that the possibility that the result of the big win determination is a "big win" is higher than the N reach, and functions as an effect for making the player expect a big win.

In SP reach, after N reach, for example, as shown in FIG. An image (SP reach start title image) G1 indicating that reach has started is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 19B, an SP ready-to-win effect (for example, a battle effect) is performed. Then, when the final phase of the SP reach-only production is reached, the special figure fluctuation pattern of the special figure variable display is, for example, "SP jackpot fluctuation", as shown in FIG. 19 (C-1), the display unit At 50a, an effect suggesting a big win (for example, a display in which the main character is happy to have won a battle) is performed, and the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are stopped in a stop mode (so-called double eyes) suggesting a big win. indicate. At this time, the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are all stopped and displayed in a stop mode suggesting a big win. On the other hand, when the special figure variation pattern of the variable display of the special figure is, for example, "SP loss variation", as shown in FIG. ) is performed, and performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are stop-displayed in a stop mode suggesting reach-losing. At this time, the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are all stopped and displayed in a stop mode suggesting a failure. It should be noted that it is possible to appropriately change or add the contents of the effect of the SP reach.

Here, the possibility that the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 for each ready-to-win are stopped in a mode indicating a big win (big win expectation) will be described in detail. The degree of jackpot expectation for each reach is determined by the execution probability based on the result of jackpot determination. For example, if the execution probability of N reach is set to 10% when the result of the jackpot determination is “losing” and is set to 100% when the result of the jackpot determination is “jackpot”, the execution probability of SP reach is If the result of the jackpot determination is "losing", it is set to 4%, and if the result of the jackpot determination is "jackpot", it is set to 100%. Can be set higher. In addition, SP reach A and SP reach B are made executable as SP reach, the execution probability of SP reach A is set to 2% when the result of big hit determination is ``losing'', and the result of big hit determination is ``big hit''. In the case of 20%, the execution probability of SP reach B is set to 2% if the result of the jackpot determination is "losing", and 30% if the result of the jackpot determination is "jackpot". For example, it is possible to set the SP reach B jackpot expectation higher than the SP reach A jackpot expectation. In this way, by appropriately setting the execution probability according to the result of the judgment of the big win, it is possible to set the expected degree of the big win.

4-3. Suspended Icon Display Area The display unit 50a of the image display device 50 can be provided with a suspended icon display area 50d consisting of four display areas, as shown in FIG. 20(A). The pending icon display area 50d is composed of a first display area 50d1, a second display area 50d2, a third display area 50d3 and a fourth display area 50d4, depending on the number of special figures 1 pending or the number of special figures 2 pending, each A pending icon HA (hold display) can be displayed in the display areas 50d1, 50d2, 50d3, and 50d4. For example, when the special figure 1 reserved number is "1", the reserved icon HA is displayed in the first display area 50d1, and when the special figure 1 reserved number is "2", the first display area 50d1 and the second 2 display area 50d2 and the pending icon HA is displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 20A, an icon display area 50e (predetermined display position) consisting of one display area can be provided in the vicinity of the reserved icon display area 50d. The icon display area 50e can display the icon TA that is the same as or different from the pending icon HA in accordance with the start of the special figure variation effect. Note that the pending icon HA and the icon TA correspond to the "predetermined icon" of the present invention.

It should be noted that the number of display areas constituting the pending icon display area 50d can be changed as appropriate. Further, the pending icon display area 50d can be a display area that displays both the special figure 1 pending number and the special figure 2 pending number, or a display area that displays only one of them.

4-3-1. Suspension effect The pachinko game machine PY1 can perform a suspension effect in response to the winning of the game ball in the first start port 11 or the second start port 12. - 特許庁The pending effect can notify the player of the number of special figure 1 suspension or special figure 2 suspension.

In the pending effect, when the game ball wins the first starting port 11 when the special figure 1 pending number is "0", the special figure fluctuation effect is started, for example, as shown in FIG. 20 (B), the icon The icon TA is displayed in the display area 50e. Then, when two more game balls win the first starting hole 11 during the special figure fluctuation production, as shown in FIG. A pending icon HA is displayed at 50d2, and the player is notified that the special figure 1 pending number is "2". After that, when the special figure variation effect is completed and a new special figure variation effect is started, as shown in FIG. HA moves to the icon display area 50e and is displayed as the icon TA, and the pending icon HA displayed in the second display area 50d2 of the pending icon display area 50d moves to the first display area 50d1 and is displayed. The player is notified that the special figure 1 pending number is "1".

4-4. Notice Effect The pachinko game machine PY1 can perform a notice effect at an arbitrary timing during the special figure variation effect. The notice effect is the effect using the image display device 50, the speaker 52, the frame lamp 53, the board lamp 54, the movable devices 55, 56, 58, the input devices 40, 41, etc., and the result of the jackpot determination and the special figure variation pattern. It is possible to suggest the result of the judgment.

4-4-1. Movable Body Effect The pachinko game machine PY1 can perform a movable body effect using the movable devices 55, 56, and 58 as an advance notice effect. The movable body performance is a performance for operating the movable devices 55, 56, 58, and functions as a performance for making the player expect a big win.

In the movable body production, for example, when developing from N reach to SP reach, as shown in FIG. It is suggested that the lower movable body 56k moves so as to overlap the display section 50a from the player's point of view, developing into SP reach. At this time, the effect image is displayed in the space of the display unit 50a that does not overlap the on-board movable body 55k and the under-board movable body 56k. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 21(B), the on-board movable body 55k and the lower-board movable body 56k return to the normal standby state (initial position) and develop into SP reach. Note that the movable body presentation is not limited to suggestions for developing SP reach, and can be changed or added as appropriate. In addition, it is possible to appropriately change or add the operation contents of the movable device in the movable body presentation.

4-4-2. Operation Effect The pachinko game machine PY1 can perform an operation effect using the normal button 40 and the special button 41 as an advance notice effect. The operation performance is a performance in which the player operates the normal button 40 or the special button 41, and functions as a performance for making the player expect a big win.

In the operation effect, for example, in SP reach, a period during which the pressing operation of the special button 41 is valid (button operation valid period) occurs, and as this button operation valid period occurs, as shown in FIG. , an effect for prompting the operation of the special button 41 (button operation promotion effect) is performed. In the button operation promotion effect, a button operation promotion image G3 is displayed on the display section 50a. The button operation prompting image G3 includes an image (button image G31) simulating the special button 41, an image (button pressing operation image G32) representing the operation mode (that is, pressing operation) of the special button 41, and a button operation valid period. and an image representing the remaining time (operation valid period remaining time image G33). Note that the operation valid period remaining time image G33 is composed of a generally curved progress bar, and changes with the passage of time so that the player can easily understand the remaining time of the operation valid period. Thereafter, when the special button 41 is pressed during the button operation valid period, or after the button operation valid period elapses without the special button 41 being operated during the button operation valid period, FIG. , the board movable device 55 is activated, and the board movable body 55k moves so as to overlap the display section 50a from the player's point of view, suggesting the degree of expectation for a big win. Note that the operation effect is not limited to the operation of the on-board movable device 55, and can be changed or added as appropriate.

4-4-3. Prefetching Effect The pachinko game machine PY1 can perform a prefetching effect for the special figure 1 reserve or the special figure 2 reserve in which the special figure lottery is not performed as the notice effect. The look-ahead performance functions as a performance for suggesting in advance the lottery result of the special figure lottery for the special figure 1 reservation or the special figure 2 reservation.

In the look-ahead effect, for example, if the result of the look-ahead determination for the special figure 1 suspension is "jackpot", as shown in FIG. may be displayed as "☆". Further, when the result of the pre-reading determination is "missing", the pending icon HA may be displayed as "*" as a so-called fake effect. In addition, the look-ahead effect can be performed for both or one of the special figure 1 reservation and the special figure 2 reservation. Moreover, it is not limited to changing the display mode of the hold icon HA, and it is possible to change or add as appropriate. For example, it is possible to change the stop mode of the production symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 in the special figure fluctuation production.

5. Game Control by Game Control Microcomputer 101 Next, game control by the game control microcomputer 101 (game control means) will be described with reference to FIGS. Note that counters, timers, buffers, and the like appearing in game control by the game control microcomputer 101 described below are provided in the game RAM 104 .

[1. Main control main processing]
The game control microcomputer 101 provided on the main control board 100 reads and executes the main control main processing program shown in FIG. 23 from the game ROM 103 when the pachinko game machine PY1 is powered on. As shown in the figure, in the main control main process, first, power-on process (S001) is performed. In the power-on process, access permission setting to the game RAM 104, setting of the game CPU 102, setting of SIO, PIO, CTC (circuit for managing interrupt time), etc. are performed.

Following the power-on process, interrupts are prohibited (S002), and a normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S003) is executed. In this normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S003), the counter values of various random numbers shown in FIGS. 8A and 8B are updated by adding 1 to them. When the counter value of each random number reaches the upper limit, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0", or may be changed randomly. At least some of the random numbers may be so-called hardware random numbers generated using a known random number generation circuit such as a counter IC.

When the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S003) is completed, an interrupt is permitted (S004). While interrupts are enabled, it is possible to execute main-side timer interrupt processing (S005). The main-side timer interrupt processing (S005) is executed based on an interrupt pulse that is repeatedly input to the game CPU 102 at a cycle of, for example, 4 msec. That is, the main-side timer interrupt processing (S005) is executed at a cycle of 4 msec. Then, after the main side timer interrupt processing (S005) is completed, before the next main side timer interrupt processing (S005) is started, various types of normal symbol/special symbol main random number update processing (S003) The process of updating the random number counter value is repeatedly executed. When an interrupt pulse is input to the game CPU 102 in the interrupt disabled state, the main timer interrupt processing (S005) is not started immediately, but is started after the interrupt is permitted (S004).

[2. Main side timer interrupt processing]
Next, the main-side timer interrupt processing (S005) will be described. As shown in FIG. 24, in the main timer interrupt process (S005), the output process (S101) is first executed. In the output process (S101), commands set in the output buffer provided in the game RAM 104 of the main control board 100 in each process described below are output to the sub control board 120, the payout control board 170, and the like.

In the input process (S102) performed subsequent to the output process (S101), the game control microcomputer 101, for example, captures the detection signal from the lower tray full switch for detecting the fullness of the lower tray 35, and plays the game as the lower tray full data. stored in the output buffer of the RAM 104 for use.

The normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S103) performed next is the same as the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S003) performed in the main control main process of FIG. That is, the update processing of the counter values of various random numbers shown in FIGS. 8A and 8B includes the execution period of the main-side timer interrupt processing (S005) and the other period (main-side timer interrupt processing ( S005) is completed and the period until the next main side timer interrupt process (S005) is started).

After the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S103), the game control microcomputer 101 performs sensor detection process (S104), then performs normal operation process (S105), and further performs special operation process (S106). conduct. Sensor detection processing, normal operation processing, and special operation processing will be described later.

After the special operation process (S106), a sorting device control process for controlling the sorting device 16D is performed (S107).

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 executes other processing (S108) and terminates the main side timer interrupt processing (S005). As other processing (S108), a power-off monitoring process when the power is turned off, a timer provided in the game RAM 104, and the like are performed. Further, as other processing (S108), a payout control processing for paying out prize balls to the player is performed. In the payout control process, a prize ball request signal is transmitted to the payout control board 170 in accordance with the winning of the game ball into each winning hole. That is, the payout control board 170 pays out prize balls based on the prize ball request signal.

Then, the game control microcomputer 101 repeatedly executes the processing of steps S002 to S004 of the main control main processing until an interrupt pulse is input to the game CPU 102 next time (see FIG. 23), and an interrupt pulse is input. (After about 4 msec), the main side timer interrupt processing (S005) is executed again. In the output processing (S101) of the main side timer interrupt processing (S005) executed again, the game control microcomputer 101 outputs the command set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 in the previous main side timer interrupt processing (S005). etc.

[2-1. Sensor detection processing]
In the sensor detection process (S104), the general winning opening sensor process, the gate sensor process, the second starting opening sensor process, the first starting opening sensor process, the first big winning opening sensor process, the second big winning opening sensor process, the specific area Sensor processing is performed sequentially. Then, commands generated in each process are set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 .

In the general winning opening sensor process, it is determined whether or not the game ball is detected by the general winning opening sensor. Also, according to the result of the processing, a command for the general winning hole sensor is generated.

In the gate sensor process, it is determined whether or not the game ball is detected by the gate sensor. When it is determined that the game ball is detected, the normal symbol random number indicated by the counter value of the normal symbol random number counter is acquired, and the acquired normal symbol random number is stored in the normal symbol reservation storage part 106 provided in the game RAM 104.例文帳に追加. In addition, when a predetermined number (for example, four) of normal symbol random numbers are stored in the normal pattern reservation storage unit 106, the newly acquired normal symbol random numbers are not stored. Also, a gate sensor command is generated according to the result of the processing.

In the second start sensor process, it is determined whether or not the game ball is detected by the second start sensor. When it is determined that the game ball is detected, a special symbol 2 related random number consisting of a special symbol random number counter, a jackpot symbol type random number counter, a reach random number counter and a special symbol variation pattern random number counter is acquired, and the acquired special symbol 2 related random number is stored in the special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b provided in the game RAM 104. The special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b has a plurality of storage areas from the first area to the nth area (n is an integer of 2 or more), and the acquired special figure 2 related random numbers are stored in order from the first area. be. In addition, when the Toku-zu 2 relation random number is stored up to the n-th area, the newly acquired Toku-zu 2 relation random number is not stored. In addition, the second look-ahead determination is performed using the obtained Toku-zu 2 related random number and the second look-ahead determination table. In addition, according to the result of the process, the special figure 2 reservation number command representing the number of special figure 2 relation random numbers (number of special figure 2 reservations) stored in the special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b and the second look-ahead determination Generate a command for the second starting port sensor including a second starting win command representing the result.

In the first start sensor process, it is determined whether or not the game ball is detected by the first start sensor. When it is determined that a game ball is detected, a special symbol 1 related random number consisting of a special symbol random number counter, a jackpot symbol type random number counter, a reach random number counter and a special symbol variation pattern random number counter is acquired, and the acquired special symbol 1 related random number is stored in the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a provided in the game RAM 104. The special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a has a plurality of storage areas from the first area to the nth area (n is an integer of 2 or more), and the acquired special figure 1 related random numbers are stored in order from the first area be. It should be noted that, when the Toku-zu 1-related random number is stored up to the n-th area, the newly acquired Toku-zu 1-related random number is not stored. In addition, the first prefetching determination is performed using the acquired special figure 1 related random number and the first prefetching determination table. In addition, according to the result of the process, the special figure 1 reservation number command representing the number of special figure 1 relation random numbers (special figure 1 reservation number) stored in the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a and the first look-ahead determination Generate a command for the first start opening sensor including a first start win command representing the result.

In the first big winning hole sensor process, it is determined whether or not the game ball is detected by the first big winning hole sensor. Also, a command for the first big winning hole sensor is generated according to the result of the processing.

In the second big winning hole sensor process, it is determined whether or not the game ball is detected by the second big winning hole sensor. Also, a command for the second big winning opening sensor is generated according to the result of the processing.

In the specific area sensor process, it is determined whether or not a game ball is detected by the specific area sensor. Also, a specific area sensor command is generated according to the result of the processing.

[2-2. Normal operation processing]
In the normal operation process (S105), the normal symbol standby process, normal symbol variation process, normal symbol determination process, and auxiliary game control process are sequentially performed. Then, commands generated in each process are set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 .

The normal symbol standby process is a process that is performed during standby when the normal symbol variable display and auxiliary game are not performed. In the normal symbol standby process, the hit determination is performed based on the normal symbol random number stored in the normal symbol reservation storage unit 106. - 特許庁In addition, based on the current gaming state, normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination is performed to determine the normal pattern fluctuation pattern. Then, to generate a normal pattern fluctuation start command including information about the result of the hit determination and the normal pattern fluctuation pattern. Then, based on the normal pattern fluctuation time associated with the determined normal pattern fluctuation pattern, the normal pattern display device 82 is caused to start variable display of the normal pattern.

The normal symbol variation process is a process performed during the variable display of the normal pattern. In the normal pattern variation process, the normal pattern is stopped and displayed based on the hit determination result when the normal pattern variation time elapses after the start of the variable display of the normal pattern being executed. Then, it generates a general pattern fluctuation stop command indicating the end of the variable display of the general pattern.

The normal symbol determination process is a process performed when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed. In the normal design determination process, after a predetermined stop time (for example, 0.8 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the stop display of the normal pattern being executed, the normal pattern that is stopped and displayed is a winning pattern. Determine whether or not there is If the winning pattern is stopped and displayed, the auxiliary game is started based on the current game state and the auxiliary game control table, and an auxiliary game start command indicating the start of the auxiliary game is generated.

Auxiliary game control processing is a process that is performed when the auxiliary game is being performed. In the auxiliary game control process, the auxiliary game is controlled based on the current game state and the auxiliary game control table. Moreover, according to the result of the said process, the command for auxiliary game control is produced|generated.

[2-3. Special operation processing]
In the special action process (S106), a special symbol standby process, a special symbol variation process, a special symbol confirmation process, a big hit game control process, and a game state setting process are sequentially performed. Then, commands generated in each process are set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 .

[2-3-1. Special symbol standby process]
The special symbol standby process is not a jackpot game state, but a process performed during standby when variable display of special symbols is not performed. In the special symbol standby process, based on the special figure 2 relationship random number stored in the special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b, along with performing the special figure 2 determination process and the special figure 2 variation pattern determination process, the special figure 2 reservation storage unit Perform shift processing. Also, based on the special figure 1 related random number stored in the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a, the special figure 1 determination process and the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process are performed, and the special figure 1 reservation storage unit shift process is performed. .

In the special figure 2 determination process, the special symbol random number of the special figure 2 relation random numbers stored in the first area of the special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b and the jackpot determination table according to the current game state are used. Then, a big hit determination is performed to determine whether it is a big hit or a loss. If the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the jackpot pattern type determination is performed by using the jackpot pattern type random number of the special figure 2 related random numbers and the special figure 2 jackpot pattern type determination table. Then, a symbol designation command representing the determined big hit symbol type is generated. Also, if the result of the big hit determination is a loss, a symbol designation command representing a loss is generated.

Special figure 2 fluctuation pattern decision processing is the processing which is done after special figure 2 decision processing. In the special figure 2 variation pattern determination process, the special figure variation pattern random number of the special figure 2 relation random numbers stored in the first area of the special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b, and the special figure 2 according to the current game state Using the variation pattern table, determine the special figure 2 variation pattern. In addition, the determination of the special figure 2 variation pattern is also associated with the number of special figure 2 relation random numbers (special figure 2 reservation number) stored in the special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b. And to generate a special figure 2 variation start command representing the determined special figure 2 variation pattern. The special figure 2 variation start command includes information about being a special figure 2, information about the result of the jackpot determination, information about the result of the reach determination, information of the special figure variation time associated with the special figure 2 variation pattern, etc. included. Then, based on the special figure fluctuation time associated with the determined special figure 2 fluctuation pattern, the special figure 2 indicator 81b is made to start the variable display of the special figure 2.

Special figure 2 reservation storage unit shift processing is a process performed when special figure 2 determination processing and special figure 2 variation pattern determination processing are performed. In the special figure 2 reservation storage unit shift process, the special figure 2 relationship random number stored in the special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b is shifted to the first area side by one, and the special figure 2 relationship random number of the first area is special. It is cleared from the FIG. 2 reservation storage unit 105b. In this way, the special figure 2 related random numbers are digested in the order in which they were acquired. And to generate a special figure 2 reservation number command representing the special figure 2 reservation number after the processing.

In the special figure 1 determination process, the special symbol random number of the special figure 1 relation random numbers stored in the first area of the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a and the jackpot determination table according to the current game state are used. Then, a big hit determination is performed to determine whether it is a big hit or a loss. If the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the jackpot pattern type determination for determining the jackpot pattern type is performed using the jackpot pattern type random number of the special figure 1 related random numbers and the special figure 1 jackpot pattern type determination table. Then, a symbol designation command representing the determined big hit symbol type is generated. Also, if the result of the big hit determination is a loss, a symbol designation command representing a loss is generated.

The special figure 1 variation pattern determination process is a process performed after the special figure 1 determination process. In the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process, the special figure variation pattern random number of the special figure 1 relation random numbers stored in the first area of the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a, and the special figure 1 according to the current game state Using the variation pattern table, determine the special figure 1 variation pattern. In addition, the determination of the special figure 1 variation pattern is also associated with the number of special figure 1 relation random numbers (the number of special figure 1 reservations) stored in the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a. Then, a special figure 1 variation start command representing the determined special figure 1 variation pattern is generated. The special figure 1 variation start command includes information about being a special figure 1, information about the result of the jackpot determination, information about the result of the reach determination, information about the result of the jackpot type determination, and the special figure 1 It was associated with the variation pattern. Information such as special figure fluctuation time is included. Then, based on the special figure variation time associated with the determined special figure 1 variation pattern, the special figure 1 indicator 81a is made to start the variable display of the special figure 1.

Special figure 1 reservation storage unit shift processing is a process performed when special figure 1 determination processing and special figure 1 variation pattern determination processing are performed. In the special figure 1 reservation storage unit shift process, the special figure 1 relationship random number stored in the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a is shifted to the first area side by one, and the special figure 1 relationship random number of the first area is special. It is cleared from the FIG. 1 reservation storage unit 105a. In this way, the special figure 1 related random numbers are digested in the order in which they were obtained. Then, to generate a special figure 1 reservation number command representing the special figure 1 reservation number after the processing.

It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, if there are both the special figure 2 reservation number and the special figure 1 reservation number, the special figure 2 determination process is performed with priority, and the variable display of the special figure 2 and the variable display of the special figure 1 are not performed in parallel.

[2-3-2. Special symbol variation processing]
The special symbol variation process is a process performed during variable display of special symbols. In the special symbol variation processing, when the special symbol variation time elapses, the special symbol indicator 81 is caused to end the variable display of the special symbol and stop displaying the special symbol according to the result of the big hit determination. If the result of the big win determination is a big win, the big win pattern indicating the big win is stopped and displayed, and if the result of the big win determination is a loss, the losing pattern indicating the loss is stopped and displayed. And, to generate a special figure fluctuation stop command indicating the end of the variable display of the special figure.

[2-3-3. Special symbol confirmation process]
The special symbol determination process is a process performed when the special symbol is stopped and displayed. In the special symbol determination process, when the currently stopped and displayed special symbol is a big winning symbol, the game state is shifted to a big winning game state. Then, an opening command indicating the start of the jackpot game is generated. The opening command includes information about the result of the jackpot type determination. In addition, when the currently stopped and displayed special figure is a lost symbol and the high probability state is terminated, the normal probability state is set. Then, it generates a high-probability end command indicating transition to the normal-probability state. In addition, when the special figure currently stopped and displayed is a lost pattern and the time saving state is terminated, the non-time saving state is set. And the time saving end command which shows transition to non-time saving state is produced|generated. In addition, when the currently stopped and displayed special figure is a losing pattern and the number of reserved special figures 2 and the number of reserved special figures 1 are "0", the pachinko machine PY1 is waiting for a customer indicating that it is in a standby state. Generate commands.

[2-3-4. Jackpot game control process]
The jackpot game control process is a process performed in the jackpot game state. In the jackpot game control process, a jackpot game is played using a jackpot game control table. After shifting to the jackpot game state, each round game is started according to the lapse of opening time or closing time. Then, a round game command indicating the start of the round game is generated. Also, the ending is started in accordance with the end of the final round game. Then, an ending command indicating the end of the jackpot game is generated. The ending command includes information about the result of jackpot type determination.

[2-3-5. Game state setting process]
The game state setting process is a process performed when the jackpot game state ends. In the game state setting process, when changing from the normal probability state to the high probability state, the high probability state is set at the end of the jackpot game state. When the duration of the high probability state is limited, the duration of the high probability state (for example, the number of times of variable display of a special figure that allows the high probability state to continue without winning a jackpot) is also set. Then, it generates a high-probability setting command indicating the setting of the high-probability state. In addition, when changing from the non-time-saving state to the time-saving state, the time-saving state is set when the jackpot game state ends. When limiting the duration of the time saving state, the duration of the time saving state (for example, the number of times of variable display of a special figure that allows the time saving state to continue without winning a jackpot) is also set. And the time saving setting command which shows the setting of a time saving state is produced|generated.

The command generated by the game control microcomputer 101 in each process can be added or changed as appropriate.

6. Effect Control by Effect Control Microcomputer 121 Next, the effect control by the effect control microcomputer 121 will be described with reference to FIGS. 25 and 26. FIG. Note that counters, timers, flags, buffers, etc. appearing in the explanation of the control of the effect by the following effect control microcomputer 121 are provided in the effect RAM 124 .

[1. Sub control main processing]
The effect control microcomputer 121 provided on the sub-control board 120 reads and executes the sub-control main processing program shown in FIG. As shown in the figure, in the sub-control main process, first, power-on processing corresponding to power-on is performed (S4001). In the power-on process, for example, settings of the performance CPU 122, settings of SIO, PIO, CTC (circuit for managing interrupt time), etc. are performed.

Next, interrupts are prohibited (S4002), and random number seed update processing is executed (S4003). In the random number seed update process (S4003), the values of various effect determination random number counters for making determinations regarding various effects are updated. The method of updating the random number counter for effect determination for various effects can be, for example, the same method as the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process performed by the main control board 100 described above. Instead of adding 1 to the random value at the time of updating, it is also possible to add 2 at a time. This is the same in the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process performed by the main control board 100 described above.

When the random number seed update process ends, command transmission process is executed (S4004). In the command transmission process, various commands stored in the output buffer in the effect RAM 124 of the sub control board 120 are transmitted to the image control board 140 . The image control board 140 that has received the command displays an image on the display section 50a according to the received command (performs various effects based on the image). Further, the sub-control board 120 outputs sound from the speaker 52 via the sound control circuit 161 (executes various sound effects by sound) along with various effects performed by the image control board 140, and controls the lamp. The frame lamp 53 and the board lamp 54 are caused to emit light via the circuit 151 (executing various light emission effects by light emission), and the movable devices 55, 56, and 58 are operated (various movable body effects are produced by actions). run or). The effect RAM 124 is provided with a start prize winning command pending storage section for storing a start prize winning command including pending lottery information. The reservation lottery information includes information based on each random number stored in the special figure reservation storage unit 105 of the main control board 100 . The start winning prize command reserve storage unit further includes a first start prize winning command reserve storage unit that stores a first start prize winning command based on the first special prize reserve, and a second start prize winning command that stores a second start prize command based on the second special prize reserve. 2 start winning command reserve storage unit is provided. In addition, the RAM 124 for effect may be provided with a storage unit for storing a command including the information of normal pattern suspension. Specifically, the first start winning command reserve storage unit and the second start win prize command reserve storage unit are each provided with a storage area corresponding to the upper limit number of special figure reserve. In the pachinko game machine PY1, four storage areas are provided in the first start prize winning command reserve storage part and four storage areas are provided in the second start prize winning command reserve storage part in accordance with the upper limit number of special figure reserves. be done. Furthermore, each storage area is provided with a plurality of small areas. Specifically, in the pachinko game machine PY1, a start winning command specified based on the winning of the start opening and data indicating the display mode of the pending icon HA are stored in each small area. The reception counter is used to manage winning order.

The effect control microcomputer 121 subsequently permits an interrupt (S4005). Thereafter, steps S4002 to S4005 are looped. While interrupts are enabled, reception interrupt processing (S4010) and sub-side timer interrupt processing (S4011) can be executed.

The reception interrupt process (S4010) is executed each time various commands sent from the main control board 100 are input to the effect control microcomputer 121. In the reception interrupt process (S4010), the production control microcomputer 121 stores various commands transmitted and received by the output process (S101) of the main control board 100 in the reception buffer of the production RAM124. This reception interrupt process is executed with priority over other interrupt processes (S4011).

[2. Sub-side timer interrupt processing]
The 1 ms timer interrupt process (S4011) is executed each time an interrupt pulse with a predetermined cycle (for example, 1 msec cycle) is input to the sub-control board 120. FIG. In the 1ms timer interrupt processing (S4011), as shown in FIG. 26, input processing (S4101), light emission data output processing (S4102), movable device control processing (S4103), and watchdog timer processing (S4104) are sequentially performed.

In the input process, an operation on an operation unit that can be operated by the player, such as the normal button detection switch 40a or the special button detection switch 41a, is detected. In the light emission data output process, light emission data is generated in order to cause the lamps such as the frame lamp 53 and the board lamp 54 to emit light at a timing that matches the image effect, etc., based on the effect data created in the effect data creation process, which will be described later. is output to the lamp control circuit 151 . That is, the production control microcomputer 121 causes the frame lamp 53, the board lamp 54, and the like to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode according to the light emission data. In the movable device control process, based on the performance data created in the performance data creation process, drive data is output in order to perform a movable body performance that operates the movable devices such as the movable devices 55, 56, and 58 at a predetermined timing. do. In other words, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs a movable object effect by operating the movable devices 55, 56, 58 and the like in a predetermined operation mode according to the drive data. The watchdog timer process resets the watchdog timer. In the switch processing, the display contents of the display section 50a and the like are set based on the operation data of the operation sections that the player can operate, such as the normal button detection switch 40a and the special button detection switch 41a detected in the input process. In the button valid period processing, the button operation valid period of various buttons (normal button 40, special button 41, etc.) is set. Thereby, for example, while the operation effect is performed during the execution of the special figure fluctuation effect, the button operation valid period is generated.

[10 ms Timer Interrupt Processing] The 10 ms timer interrupt processing (S4012) is executed each time an interrupt pulse with a period of 10 msec is input to the sub-control board 120. FIG. In the 10 ms timer interrupt processing (S4012), as shown in FIG. 27, received command analysis processing (S4201), effect timer update processing (S4202), voice control processing (S4203), and effect data creation processing (S4204) are sequentially performed. .

In the received command analysis process, the received interrupt process (S4010) analyzes the command stored in the reception buffer of the production RAM 124, and performs processing according to the command (for example, selection of production, setting of production mode, command setting, etc.). I do. In the production timer update process, a timer for measuring the time for each production is updated. For example, in the performance timer update process, the start timing and end timing of the operation effective period of the operation unit such as the normal button 40 and the special button 41 are measured. In the audio control process, audio data (data for controlling the output of audio from the speaker 52) is created and output to the audio control circuit 161 based on the processing result of the received command analysis process. In the effect data creation process, the effect data is created based on the processing result of the received command analysis process.

In the switch process (S4106), the effect control microcomputer 121 may analyze the switch data acquired in the input process (S4104) and determine whether or not the normal button 40 has been pressed within the button operation valid period. be. For example, when the effect control microcomputer 121 analyzes the switch data acquired by the input process (S4104) and determines that the normal button 40 has been pressed within the button operation valid period, the normal button process is executed. . Here, the normal button process is, for example, a process of displaying a preview image on the display unit 50a, performing a movable object effect using the on-board movable object 55k, and the like. Also, the effect control microcomputer 121 may analyze the switch data acquired by the input process (S4104) and determine whether or not the special button 41 has been pressed within the button operation valid period. For example, when the production control microcomputer 121 determines that the special button 41 has been pressed within the button operation valid period, special button processing is executed. Here, the special button process is, for example, a process of displaying a preview image on the display unit 50a, performing a movable object effect using the on-board movable object 55k, and the like.

Here, an example of processing when the effect control microcomputer 121 receives a command from the game control microcomputer 101 will be described. The command received by the effect control microcomputer 121 is a variation start command (special figure 1 variation start command or special figure 2 variation start command). Production control microcomputer 121, in the received command analysis process (S4201), when it is determined that the fluctuation start command is received, as the fluctuation start command reception processing, based on the special figure fluctuation pattern indicated by the command, fluctuation A performance pattern (sub-variation pattern) of performance is selected, information of the sub-variation pattern is set, and a variation performance start command including information of the sub-variation pattern is set in an output buffer. For example, when the special figure variation pattern indicated by the variation start command is SP variation (variation pattern associated with SP reach), select a sub variation pattern to perform SP reach, variation production start command corresponding to the sub variation pattern to the output buffer. After that, each process (command transmission process (S4004), emission data output process (S4102), movable body control process (S4103), voice control process (S4203), etc.) is executed, corresponding to the selected sub-variation pattern A variable effect is realized. In addition, the flow of processing related to the realization of such effects is basically the same for other effects such as effects accompanying special games, waiting effects for customers, anticipation effects, so-called advance notice effects accompanying the changes, control of the effect mode, etc. are the same.

7. Description of Characteristic Points of Pachinko Gaming Machine PY1 of First Embodiment Characteristic points of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 will be described in detail below. The first embodiment will be described below. Unless otherwise stated, the pachinko game machine PY1 of the basic embodiment described above is also applied to the first embodiment.

First, the special figure variation pattern determined by the game control microcomputer 101 of the first embodiment will be described. Game control microcomputer 101 of the first embodiment, in the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process when it is set to the non-time saving state, the result of the jackpot determination performed in the special figure 1 determination process, the reach determination result, and Based on the special figure variation pattern random number, to determine the special figure 1 variation pattern. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 28, when the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the jackpot is won in the jackpot determination, the game control microcomputer 101 sets "P01", "P02", "P03", and "P21" as the special figure 1 variation patterns. ", or from among "P22", it is possible to determine any Toku-zu 1 variation pattern. The distribution ratio is as shown in FIG. 29(A). In addition, it is possible to appropriately change the distribution rate (selection rate) of the special figure 1 variation pattern shown in FIG.

In addition, the game control microcomputer 101 is a case where it is determined to be a loss in the big hit determination, and when the result of the reach determination is "with reach", as the special figure 1 variation pattern, "P04", "P05" , "P06", "P23", or from among "P24", it is possible to determine any special figure 1 variation pattern. Whether to determine which special figure 1 variation pattern is distributed by the special figure variation pattern random number. The allocation ratio is as shown in FIG. 29(B). In addition, it is possible to appropriately change the allocation rate (selection rate) of the special figure 1 variation pattern shown in FIG.

In addition, the game control microcomputer 101 is a case where it is determined to be a loss in the jackpot determination, and when the result of the reach determination is "no reach", as a special figure 1 variation pattern, "P07" or "P08 ” can be determined. Which of the two types of special figure 1 variation patterns is determined is assigned by the number of special figure 1 reservations. If the special figure 1 reservation number is 0 to 2, the special figure variation pattern with a relatively long special figure variation time is easily determined, and if the special figure 1 reservation number is 3 to 4, the special figure variation Toku-zu fluctuation pattern with relatively short time is easily determined. The allocation ratio is as shown in FIG. 29(C). In addition, it is possible to appropriately change the allocation rate (selection rate) of the special figure 1 variation pattern shown in FIG.

Here, the special figure 1 variation pattern "P21" is a joint battle jackpot variation in which normal variation → reach → N reach → development production → SP reach → branch production → joint battle reach is performed, and the special figure 1 variation pattern "P23" is, It is a joint fight loss fluctuation in which normal fluctuation → reach → N reach → development effect → SP reach → branch effect → joint fight reach. Here, the branch production is a production that is executed at a production branch time point (predetermined branch time point) branching into either of the joint fighting reach in the special figure fluctuation production or the battle reach.

Co-fighting reach here refers to a victory effect (an example of a successful effect) in which the main character and his allied characters cooperate to challenge a battle against an enemy character, and in the end the main character wins, or This is an effect branching to a defeat effect (an example of a failure effect) for losing (see FIG. 68). In addition, the joint fight reach is a reach effect that suggests that the possibility that the result of the jackpot determination was a “jackpot” is higher than the SP reach, L reach, and N reach, and is intended to make the player expect a jackpot. It functions as a production of Note that the joint fight reach and the battle reach (low expectation transition effect) to be described later are SPSP reach (suggestion effect, expectation transition effect). In addition, joint fighting reach (high expectation transition production) is a reach production that suggests that the possibility that the result of the big hit determination was "big hit" is higher than the battle reach described later. In joint fight reach, the success effect is a effect that suggests winning a jackpot, and the failure effect is an effect that suggests losing.

Here, the special figure 1 variation pattern "P22" is a battle jackpot variation in which normal variation → reach → N reach → development production → SP reach → branch production → battle reach is performed, and the special figure 1 variation pattern "P24" is, It is a battle loss variation in which normal variation → reach → N reach → development effect → SP reach → branch effect → battle reach.

Here, the battle reach is defined as a victory effect (an example of a successful effect) in which the main character and the enemy character battle, and finally the main character wins, or a defeat effect (an example of a failure effect) in which the main character is defeated. ) (see FIG. 67). In addition, the battle reach is a reach effect that suggests that the possibility that the result of the jackpot determination is a “jackpot” is higher than the SP reach, the L reach, and the N reach, and is intended to make the player expect a big hit. It functions as a production of However, the battle reach is a reach production that suggests that the possibility that the result of the jackpot determination was "jackpot" is lower than the joint fight reach. In Battle Reach, the success effect is a effect that suggests winning a jackpot, and the failure effect is a effect that suggests losing.

Here, the special figure 1 variation pattern "P01" is a SP jackpot variation in which normal variation → reach → N reach → development production → SP reach is performed, and the special figure 1 variation pattern "P04" is normal variation → reach → N It is an SP loss variation in which reach → development production → SP reach is performed.

In addition, the special figure 1 variation pattern "P02" is an L jackpot variation in which normal variation → reach → N reach → development production → L reach is performed, and the special figure 1 variation pattern "P05" is normal variation → reach → N It is an L loss variation in which reach → development production → L reach is performed.

In addition, the special figure 1 variation pattern "P03" is L reach, SP reach, or SPSP reach (joint fight reach, battle reach ), it is the N jackpot variation in which none of the ready-to-win effects are performed. In addition, the special figure 1 variation pattern "P06" is L reach, SP reach, or SPSP reach (joint fight reach, battle reach ), it is an N-loss variation in which none of the ready-to-win effects are performed.

Also, the special figure 1 variation pattern "P07" is a normal loss variation in which the variation performance ends in 13 seconds without the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 reaching reach. Moreover, the special figure 1 variation pattern "P08" shown in FIG. 27 is a normal loss variation in which the variation performance ends in 4 seconds without the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 reaching reach.

Next, among the main productions (normal fluctuation, N reach, L reach, SP reach, SPSP reach (co-fighting reach, battle reach)) that constitute the special figure fluctuation production in the special figure fluctuation pattern described above, SPSP reach Explain in detail about joint fight reach and battle reach. In addition, the effect control microcomputer 121 displays the effect image on the display unit 50a in each effect that constitutes the special figure fluctuation effect, and emits light using the frame lamp 53 and the board lamp 54 according to the display of the effect image. Production, sound production using the speaker 52, movable body production using the movable devices 55, 56, 58 (movable body production in the first production mode, movable body production in the second production mode, etc.), input device (normal button 40 and special buttons 41) can be used to perform operation effects and the like.

<Joint Reach>
Co-fighting reach is a reach performance in which the main character cooperates with an ally character to battle an enemy character. Co-fighting ready-to-win has win-lose branches, and branches to a success presentation (victory presentation) in which the main character wins over the enemy character, or a failure presentation (defeat presentation) in which the main character is defeated by the enemy character (see FIG. 68). The success effect, like the success effect in battle ready-to-win, functions as an effect to suggest to the player that he/she has won the jackpot. The failure effect functions as an effect to suggest to the player that he/she has not won the jackpot, similarly to the failure effect in the battle reach.

<Battle Reach>
Battle reach is a reach effect in which the main character and the enemy character battle. The battle ready-to-win has win-lose branching, branching into a success production (victory production) in which the main character wins over the enemy character, or a failure production (defeat production) in which the main character is defeated by the enemy character (see FIG. 67). The success effect functions as a effect to suggest to the player that he or she has won a jackpot, similar to the success effect in the joint fight reach. The failure effect functions as an effect to suggest to the player that he/she has not won the jackpot, like the failure effect in the joint fight reach.

Next, the allocation rate of the special figure 1 variation pattern in the non-time saving state will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 29 (A), the distribution rate of the special figure 1 variation pattern selected in the case of "non-time saving state" and "jackpot" in the pachinko game machine PY1 of the first embodiment is the special figure 1 variation Distribution rate of pattern "P03" (1%) ⇒ Distribution rate of special figure 1 variation pattern "P02" (9%) ⇒ Distribution rate of special figure 1 variation pattern "P01" (20%) ⇒ Special figure 1 The distribution rate of the variation pattern "P22" (30%) ⇒ The distribution rate of the special figure 1 variation pattern "P21" (40%) is higher in this order.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 29(B), the distribution rate of the special figure 1 variation pattern selected in the case of "non-time-saving state" and "loss with reach" in the pachinko game machine PY1 of the present embodiment is Figure 1 Distribution rate of variation pattern "P23" (10%) ⇒ Distribution rate of special figure 1 variation pattern "P24" (20%) ⇒ Distribution rate of special figure 1 variation pattern "P04" (22%) ⇒ The distribution rate of the special figure 1 variation pattern "P05" (23%) ⇒ The distribution rate of the special figure 1 variation pattern "P06" (25%) is higher in this order.

Also, as shown in FIG. 29 (C), in the pachinko game machine PY1 of the first embodiment in the "non-time saving state", the number of special figures 1 pending is "0 to 2", and "no reach loss" The distribution rate of the special figure 1 variation pattern selected in the case is the distribution rate of the special figure 1 variation pattern "P08" (20%) ⇒ the distribution rate of the special figure 1 variation pattern "P07" (80%) is higher in the order of

In addition, as shown in FIG. 29 (C), in the pachinko game machine PY1 of the present embodiment in the "non-time saving state", the number of special figures 1 pending is "3 to 4", and "no reach loss" The distribution rate of the special figure 1 variation pattern selected when increasing in order.

In addition, in this form, as shown in FIG. 29, when the jackpot is won (in the case of jackpot variation), the cooperative reach is more likely to be executed than the battle reach. On the other hand, in the case of loss (in the case of loss variation), battle reach is more likely to be executed than joint fight reach. That is, in this form, the joint fighting reach is a reach production with a higher expectation for a big hit than the battle reach. It should be noted that, in win-lose branches in various types of SPSP reach (joint fight reach, battle reach), it may be configured to perform an operation presentation for operating the operation unit (normal button 40 or special button 41).

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 of the first embodiment performs prefetching determination using the first prefetching determination table shown in FIG. . This look-ahead determination includes a jackpot look-ahead determination of whether or not the acquired special pattern random number is determined to be a "jackpot" in the jackpot determination, and the acquired special figure variation pattern random number in the special figure variation pattern determination. Variation pattern prefetch determination of whether it is determined to any special figure variation pattern is included. The game control microcomputer 101 determines the start winning command based on the result of the prefetch determination. Although the first prefetch determination table shown in FIG. 28 is used in the first embodiment, it is also possible to use the prefetch determination table shown in FIG. 13 together.

The game control microcomputer 101 determines a start winning command based on the result of the big hit look-ahead determination or the result of the variation pattern look-ahead determination in the first start-up sensor processing when the non-time saving state is set. As shown in FIG. 30, it is possible to determine 11 types of starting winning commands, namely, "command 01" to "command 07" and "command 21" to "command 24" as starting winning commands. In the first embodiment, based on the special figure 1 variation pattern determined by the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 28, variation pattern prefetch determination is performed.

If the result of the big win look-ahead determination is "big win" and the result of the variation pattern look-ahead determination is "joint battle big win variation", "command 21" is determined. Further, when the result of the jackpot prefetch determination is "big hit" and the result of the variation pattern prefetch determination is "battle jackpot variation", "command 22" is determined. When the result of the jackpot prefetch determination is "big hit" and the result of the variation pattern prefetch determination is "SP jackpot variation", "command 01" is determined. When the result of the big hit look-ahead determination is "big hit" and the result of the variation pattern look-ahead determination is "L big win variation", "command 02" is determined. When the result of the big win prefetch determination is "big win" and the result of the variation pattern prefetch determination is "N big win variation", "command 03" is determined.

Further, when the result of the big hit look-ahead determination is "losing" and the result of the variation pattern look-ahead determination is "co-op losing variation", "command 23" is determined. Further, when the result of the big hit look-ahead determination is "losing" and the result of the fluctuation pattern look-ahead determination is "battle loss variation", "command 24" is determined. If the result of the big hit look-ahead determination is "loss" and the result of the variation pattern look-ahead determination is "SP loss variation", "command 04" is determined. When the result of the big hit look-ahead determination is "loss" and the result of the variation pattern look-ahead determination is "L loss variation", "command 05" is determined. When the result of the big hit look-ahead determination is "loss" and the result of the variation pattern look-ahead determination is "N loss variation", "command 06" is determined. When the result of the big hit look-ahead determination is "loss" and the result of the variation pattern look-ahead determination is "normal loss variation", "command 07" is determined.

Next, the pending icon HA and the icon TA that can be displayed by the effect control microcomputer 121 of the present embodiment will be described. The production control microcomputer 121 can display the holding icon HA corresponding to the special figure 1 holding in the holding icon display area 50d in the holding production, and can display the icon TA corresponding to the special figure 1 holding in the icon display area 50e. It can be displayed (see FIG. 32).

The hold icon HA of the first embodiment includes a hold icon HA1 (white circle) in the normal display mode shown in FIG. There is an icon HA2 (a white triangle containing a character image in preparation). Further, the icon TA of the first embodiment includes the icon TA1 (white circle) in the normal display mode shown in FIG. 31(A) and the degree of expectation display shown in FIGS. 31(F) to 31(G); There are corresponding icons TA6 to TA7 of development suggestive display modes shown.

Icons in various display modes will be described. First, the icons in the normal display mode (predetermined display mode) (holding icon HA1, icon TA1) are icons that are most frequently selected in the case of losing. Next, the icons in the degree-of-expectation display mode (the icons TA2 to TA4) are less frequently selected in the case of a failure than the icon TA1 in the normal display mode. It should be noted that although the shape of the icons in the degree of expectation display mode (the icons TA2 to TA4) and the shape of the icon TA1 in the normal display mode are the same round shape, the icons in the degree of expectation display mode (expectation display mode, special The colors of the icons TA2 to TA4) are different from the colors of the icon TA1 in the normal display mode.

The icons of the expectation level display mode (the icons TA2 to TA4) include the icon TA2 (blue circle, see FIG. 31B) of the first expectation level display mode (first special display mode) and the second expectation level display mode. The icon TA3 (green circle, see FIG. 31(C)) in the degree display mode (first expected display mode, second special display mode) and the icon in the third expected degree display mode (second expected display mode) TA4 (red circle, see FIG. 31(D)). The shape of the icon TA2 in the first degree of expectation display mode, the shape of the icon TA3 in the second degree of expectation display mode, and the shape of the icon TA4 in the third degree of expectation display mode are all the same round shape. The color of the icon TA2 in the 1st degree of expectation display mode, the color of the icon TA3 in the 2nd degree of expectation display mode, and the color of the icon TA4 in the 3rd degree of expectation display mode are different from each other. In the present embodiment, the icon TA1 (white circle) in the normal display mode → the icon TA2 (blue circle) in the first expectation level display mode → the icon TA3 (green circle) in the second expectation level display mode )⇒The degree of expectation for a big win increases in the order of the corresponding icon TA4 (red circle) in the third degree of expectation display mode.

Next, the icons in the change suggesting display mode (suspended icon HA5, the icon TA5, a white triangle including a character image under preparation, see FIG. This icon is selected less frequently than TA1) in the case of failure. The change-suggestion display mode icons include a change-suggestion display mode hold icon HA5 and a change-suggestion display mode icon TA5. The icons in the change suggestive display mode (suspended icon HA5, the icon TA5) are the second icon change effect that can be performed during the execution of the special figure fluctuation effect, and the icon TA5 in the change suggestive display mode is displayed in the joint battle development described later. This icon indicates that the icon is changed to one of the icon TA6 of the suggestive display mode and the icon TA7 of the battle development suggestive display mode, which will be described later. The joint struggle development suggestive display mode and the battle development suggestive display mode correspond to the "special display mode" of the present invention.

Icons of the development suggestion display mode (the icon TA6 shown in FIG. 31(F) composed of a character image of battle and a white triangle image, and an icon TA6 of FIG. The icon TA7) is selected less frequently than the icon in the normal display mode in the case of a loss. The icons in the development suggestion display mode are the icon TA6 in the battle development suggestion display mode (the white triangle containing the character image of the battle shown in FIG. 31(F)) and the icon TA7 in the joint struggle development suggestion display mode (see FIG. A white triangle containing the character image of the joint struggle shown in (G)). Here, the icon TA6 of the battle development suggesting display mode is the icon indicating that the battle reach will develop during execution of the special figure variation effect. In addition, the icon TA7 of the joint fight development suggesting display mode is the icon indicating that the joint fight reach will develop during execution of the special figure variation effect. In the present embodiment, the degree of expectation for a big win increases in the order of the icon TA1 in the normal display mode, the icon TA6 in the battle development suggesting display mode, and the icon TA7 in the joint struggle development suggesting display mode.

Next, the icon TA and the pending icon HA displayed on the display section 50a will be further described with reference to FIG. In this embodiment, the display of the icon TA on the display unit 50a notifies that the special figures (special figures 1 and 2) are being variably displayed (or stopped). In addition, the player is notified of the special figure 1 reserved number or the special figure 2 reserved number by displaying the reserved icon HA on the display unit 50a.

The icon TA of the present embodiment, the period from the variable display of the special figure 1 in the special figure 1 indicator 81a to the stop display, and the period from the variable display of the special figure 2 to the stop display in the special figure 2 indicator 81b, It can be continuously displayed in the icon display area 50e. Further, for example, when the icon TA1 in the normal display mode is displayed in the icon display area 50e, the icon TA1 in the normal display mode changes to the icon TA1 as shown in FIGS. It can be continuously displayed in the display area 50e.

In addition, the pending icon HA of the present embodiment can be displayed in the pending icon display area 50d by the number corresponding to the number of displays in the special figure 1 pending display 83a or the number of displays in the special figure 2 pending display 83b. . Specifically, when the display number in the special figure 1 pending display 83a is "1", the pending icon HA1 in the normal display mode is displayed only in the first display area 50d1 of the pending icon display area 50d (Fig. 32 (A)). That is, in that case, one pending icon HA is displayed in the pending icon display area 50d.

Further, when the display number in the special figure 1 pending display 83a is "2", the pending icon HA1 of the normal display mode is displayed in the first display area 50d1 and the second display area 50d2 of the pending icon display area 50d. (See FIG. 20(C)). That is, in that case, two normal display modes of the pending icon HA1 are displayed in the pending icon display area 50d.

Further, when the number of displays in the special figure 1 pending display 83a is "3", the first display area 50d1, the second display area 50d2 and the third display area 50d3 of the pending icon display area 50d hold the normal display mode An icon HA1 is displayed. That is, in that case, the three normal display modes of the pending icon HA are displayed in the pending icon display area 50d.

Also, when the number of displays in the special figure 1 pending display 83a is "4", the first display area 50d1, the second display area 50d2, the third display area 50d3 and the fourth display area 50d4 of the pending icon display area 50d , the hold icon HA1 in the normal display mode is displayed. In other words, in this case, the four normal display modes of the pending icon HA1 are displayed in the pending icon display area 50d.

As described above, the special figure 1 pending display 83a is for displaying the number of special figures 1 pending (the number of variable display of the special figure 1 by the special figure 1 indicator 81a is suspended), so the pending icon By the display of the pending icon HA in the display area 50d, the player can grasp the number of special figures 1 pending at present. In addition, the special figure 2 pending indicator 83b is for displaying the number of special figures 2 pending (the number of pending variable display of the special figure 2 by the special figure 2 indicator 81b), so the pending icon display area 50d By the display of the pending icon HA in , the player can grasp the number of special figures 2 pending at present.

Further, the pending icon HA can be displayed together with the icon TA during the variable display of the special figure (variable display of the special figure 1, variable display of the special figure 2). That is, when the icon TA is displayed in the special figure variable display (special figure 1 variable display, special figure 2 variable display) and the icon display area 50e, the display in the special figure 1 reservation display 83a A number, or a number of pending icons HA corresponding to the number displayed in the special figure 2 pending display 83b are also displayed in the pending icon display area 50d.

In this embodiment, the display of the icon TA displayed in the icon display area 50e ends during the stop display of the special figure (stop display of the special figure 1, stop display of the special figure 2). That is, the icon TA displayed in the icon display area 50e disappears from the icon display area 50e during the stop display of the special figure (stop display of the special figure 1, stop display of the special figure 2).

Specifically, when the icon TA is displayed without the pending icon HA being displayed during the variable display of the special figure 1, the execution of the icon TA is completed during the stop display of the special figure 1. , disappears from the icon display area 50e (see FIG. 32(C)).

When the icon TA disappears from the icon display area 50e, it is displayed in the first display area 50d1 by the start of the next special figure variable display (special figure 1 variable display, special figure 2 variable display) The suspended icon HA that has been displayed moves (shifts) from the first display area 50d1 to the icon display area 50e, and becomes the icon TA1 in the normal display mode (see FIGS. 32(C) and 32(D)). By such display of the icon TA, the player can understand that the next variable display of the special figure (variable display of the special figure 1, variable display of the special figure 2) has started.

In the first embodiment, display patterns from the start of display of the pending icon HA to the end of display of the pending icon HA are collectively selected as a scenario. As shown in FIG. 33, there are two types of scenario patterns for the display of the pending icon HA, prefetch scenario pattern 1 to prefetch scenario pattern 2 . A look-ahead scenario pattern 1 is a scenario in which the hold icon HA1 in the normal display form, which is the initial form of the hold icon HA, continues to be displayed without change. Further, the look-ahead scenario pattern 2 is a scenario in which the pending icon HA2 in the change-suggesting display mode of the pending icon HA continues to be displayed without being changed.

The effect control microcomputer 121 can select the type of pending icon HA to be displayed in the pending icon display area 50d using the prefetch scenario pattern selection table shown in FIG. In the start winning process (S4302), the effect control microcomputer 121 selects the look-ahead scenario pattern 1 or the look-ahead scenario pattern 2 with reference to the start winning command. Specifically, even if the starting prize-winning command is any one of "command 01" to "command 07", prefetch scenario pattern 1 is selected at a rate of 100%, and prefetch scenario pattern 2 is selected. never When the starting winning command is "command 21", the look-ahead scenario pattern 1 is selected at a rate of 90%, and the look-ahead scenario pattern 2 is selected at a rate of 10%. On the other hand, when the starting winning command is "command 22", the look-ahead scenario pattern 1 is selected at a rate of 95%, and the look-ahead scenario pattern 2 is selected at a rate of 5%. Further, when the starting prize-winning command is "command 23", the look-ahead scenario pattern 1 is selected at a rate of 90%, and the look-ahead scenario pattern 2 is selected at a rate of 10%. On the other hand, if the starting prize-winning command is "command 24", the look-ahead scenario pattern 1 is selected at a rate of 95%, and the look-ahead scenario pattern 2 is selected at a rate of 5%. It should be noted that the distribution ratio (selection ratio) of the scenario pattern selection table of the pending icons shown in FIG. 34 can be appropriately changed within a range that does not interfere with the game.

Further, in the first embodiment, display patterns from the start of display of the icon TA to the end of display of the icon TA are collectively selected as a scenario. As shown in FIG. 35, there are eight types of scenario patterns for displaying the icon TA, from the scenario pattern 1 to the scenario pattern 8. FIG. The scenario pattern 1 is a scenario in which the icon TA1 in the normal display mode, which is the initial mode of the icon TA, continues to be displayed without being changed. Further, in the scenario pattern 2, the icon TA1 in the normal display mode is displayed, and the icon TA1 in the normal display mode is changed to the icon TA2 in the first expectation degree display mode by executing the first icon change effect, This is a scenario in which the icon TA2 in the first degree of expectation display mode continues to be displayed. Further, in the scenario pattern 3, the icon TA1 in the normal display mode is displayed, and the icon TA1 in the normal display mode is changed to the icon TA3 in the second expectation degree display mode by executing the first icon change effect, This is a scenario in which the icon TA3 in the second expectation level display mode continues to be displayed. Further, in the scenario pattern 3, the icon TA1 in the normal display mode is displayed, and the icon TA1 in the normal display mode is changed to the icon TA4 in the third expectation level display mode by executing the first icon change effect, This is a scenario in which the icon TA4 in the third expectation level display mode continues to be displayed.

In the scenario pattern 5, the icon TA5 in the change suggesting display mode is displayed, and by executing the second icon change effect, the icon TA5 in the change suggesting display mode is changed to the icon TA6 in the battle development suggesting display mode. In this scenario, the icon TA6 in the battle development suggesting display mode is changed to the icon TA3 in the second expectation level display mode by executing the third icon change effect, and the icon TA3 in the second expectation level display mode continues to be displayed. . In the scenario pattern 6, the icon TA5 in the change suggesting display mode is displayed, and by executing the second icon change effect, the icon TA5 in the change suggesting display mode is changed to the icon TA6 in the battle development suggesting display mode. In this scenario, the icon TA6 in the battle development suggesting display mode is changed to the icon TA4 in the third expectation level display mode by executing the third icon change effect, and the icon TA4 in the third expectation level display mode continues to be displayed. . In the scenario pattern 7, the icon TA5 in the change suggestion display mode is displayed, and by executing the second icon change effect, the icon TA5 in the change suggestion display mode is changed to the icon TA7 in the joint struggle development suggestion display mode. This is a scenario in which the icon TA7 in the joint struggle development suggestive display mode is changed to the icon TA3 in the second expectation level display mode by executing the third icon change effect, and the icon TA3 in the second expectation level display mode continues to be displayed. . In the scenario pattern 8, the icon TA5 in the change suggestion display mode is displayed, and by executing the second icon change effect, the icon TA5 in the change suggestion display mode is changed to the icon TA7 in the joint struggle development suggestion display mode. By executing the third icon change effect, the icon TA7 in the joint struggle development suggestive display mode is changed to the icon TA4 in the third expectation level display mode, and the icon TA4 in the third expectation level display mode continues to be displayed. .

In the scenario pattern selection process (S4504), the effect control microcomputer 121 can select the type of icon TA to be displayed in the icon display area 50e using the scenario pattern selection table shown in FIG. In the scenario pattern selection process (S4504), the effect control microcomputer 121 refers to the type of special figure variation pattern and the selected prefetch scenario pattern, and selects any of the scenario patterns 1 to 8. Select one of the scenario patterns. Specifically, when the special figure 1 variation pattern is "P01" and the look-ahead scenario pattern 1 is selected, the scenario pattern 3 is selected at a rate of 20%, and the scenario pattern 4 is 80 % is selected. When the special figure 1 variation pattern is "P02" and the look-ahead scenario pattern 1 is selected, the scenario pattern 2 is selected at a rate of 20%, and the scenario pattern 3 is selected at a rate of 80%. be done. When the special figure 1 variation pattern is "P03" and the look-ahead scenario pattern 1 is selected, the scenario pattern 1 is selected at a rate of 20%, and the scenario pattern 2 is selected at a rate of 80%. be done. When the special figure 1 variation pattern is "P04" and the look-ahead scenario pattern 1 is selected, the scenario pattern 3 is selected at a rate of 80%, and the scenario pattern 4 is selected at a rate of 20%. be done. When the special figure 1 variation pattern is "P05" and the look-ahead scenario pattern 1 is selected, the scenario pattern 2 is selected at a rate of 80%, and the scenario pattern 3 is selected at a rate of 20%. be done. Even if the special figure 1 variation pattern is any special figure 1 variation pattern from "P06" to "P08", if the pre-reading scenario pattern 1 is selected, the scenario pattern 1 is 100% is selected by

Also, when the special figure 1 variation pattern is from "P21" to "P24", the selection ratio of the scenario pattern is different depending on the selected prefetch scenario pattern 1 or prefetch scenario pattern 2. Specifically, when the special figure 1 variation pattern is "P21" and the look-ahead scenario pattern 1 is selected, the scenario pattern 4 is selected at a rate of 100%. On the other hand, when the special figure variation pattern is "P21" and the look-ahead scenario pattern 2 is selected, the scenario pattern 7 is selected at a rate of 20%, and the scenario pattern is at a rate of 80% selected. When the special figure 1 variation pattern is "P22" and the look-ahead scenario pattern 1 is selected, the scenario pattern 3 is selected at a rate of 20%, and the scenario pattern 4 is selected at a rate of 80%. be done. On the other hand, when the special figure variation pattern is "P22" and the look-ahead scenario pattern 2 is selected, the scenario pattern 5 is selected at a rate of 40%, and the scenario pattern 6 is at a rate of 60% is selected by When the special figure variation pattern is "P23" and the look-ahead scenario pattern 1 is selected, the scenario pattern 3 is selected at a rate of 80%, and the scenario pattern 4 is selected at a rate of 20%. be. On the other hand, when the special figure variation pattern is "P23" and the look-ahead scenario pattern 2 is selected, the scenario pattern 7 is selected at a rate of 80%, and the scenario pattern 8 is at a rate of 20% is selected by When the special figure variation pattern is "P24" and the look-ahead scenario pattern 1 is selected, the scenario pattern 3 is selected at a rate of 60%, and the scenario pattern 4 is selected at a rate of 40%. be. On the other hand, when the special figure variation pattern is "P24" and the look-ahead scenario pattern 2 is selected, the scenario pattern 5 is selected at a rate of 60%, and the scenario pattern 6 is at a rate of 40% is selected by It should be noted that the allocation ratio (selection ratio) of the scenario selection table for the corresponding icon shown in FIG. 36 can be appropriately changed within a range that does not interfere with the game.

Next, the icon change effect in which the display mode of the icon is changed during execution of the special figure variation effect will be described. The icon change effects of the first embodiment include a first icon change effect, a second icon change effect, and a third icon change effect. Here, the first icon change effect is to change the icon TA1 in the normal display mode displayed on the display unit 50a to the expectation level display mode (first expectation level display mode, second expectation level display mode, This is an effect of changing to the icon TA of the display mode, third expectation level display mode). In addition, the second icon change effect is such that, during execution of the special figure variation effect, the icon TA5 in the change suggestion display mode displayed on the display unit 50a is changed to the icon TA6 in the joint struggle development suggestion display mode or the battle development suggestion display. This is an effect of changing the mode to the icon TA7. In addition, the third icon change effect is that the icon TA6 of the battle development suggesting display mode or the icon TA7 of the joint struggle development suggesting display mode displayed on the display unit 50a is displayed with the degree of expectation during execution of the special figure variation effect. This is an effect for changing the mode (first expectation level display mode, second expectation level display mode, third expectation level display mode) to the corresponding icon TA.

First, the first icon change effect will be specifically described. When execution of the first icon change effect is started, first, a movable body effect for operating the on-board movable device 55 is executed. After that, when the execution of the movable body presentation is completed during the execution of the first icon change presentation, the on-board movable body image KG (movable body image) simulating the on-board movable body 55k is displayed on the display section 50a. When the board movable body image KG is displayed on the display section 50a, the icon TA1 in the normal display mode is moved from the icon display area 50e to the icon change area 50h (specific display position). Then, the icon TA1 in the normal display mode moved to the icon change area 50h is changed to the icon TA in the expectation level display mode (first expectation level display mode, second expectation level display mode, third expectation level display mode). will be changed to

The first icon change effect includes the first icon change effect of the first effect mode and the first icon change effect of the second effect mode. The first icon change effect of the first effect mode changes the icon TA1 of the normal display mode to the icon TA2 of the first expectation level display mode, the icon TA3 of the second expectation level display mode, or the icon TA3 of the third expectation level display mode. This is an icon change effect for changing to any one of the icons TA4 among the icons TA4. That is, the first icon change effect in the first effect mode changes the icon TA1 in the normal display mode to the icon TA in the expectation level display mode indicating the degree of expectation for a big win equal to or higher than the icon TA2 in the first expectation level display mode. It is an icon change effect. On the other hand, the first icon change effect in the second effect mode is an icon change that changes the icon TA1 in the normal display mode to the icon TA3 in the second expectation level display mode or the icon TA3 in the third expectation level display mode. It is a performance. From the above description, the first icon change effect in the first effect mode is to change the icon TA1 in the normal display mode to the icon TA2 in the first expectation level display mode, the icon TA3 in the second expectation level display mode, or the icon TA3 in the second expectation level display mode. It is an icon change effect to be changed to any of the icons TA4 in the degree of expectation display mode. On the other hand, in the first icon change effect of the second effect mode, the icon TA1 of the normal display mode is not changed to the icon TA2 of the first expectation level display mode. The icon change effect is an icon change effect for changing the icon TA in the expectation level display mode to indicate a jackpot expectation level equal to or higher than the icon TA3 in the second expectation level display mode.

Here, the on-board movable body 55k provided on the game board 1 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 37A, the on-board movable body 55k has a movable body LED 55L capable of emitting light. By driving the motor to cause the on-board movable device 55 to perform a predetermined operation, it is possible to move the on-board movable body 55k to an arbitrary position. Specifically, until the execution of the first icon change effect is started, as shown in FIG. 37(A), a normal standby state ( initial position). In addition, as shown in FIG. 37A, the movable body LED 55L of the on-board movable body 55k does not emit light.

In the first embodiment, the first icon change effect of the first effect mode and the first icon change effect of the second effect mode are the effect modes of the movable body effect using the on-board movable body 55k in the first icon change effect. is different. Using FIGS. 37(B) to 37(D), a movable object effect using the on-board movable body 55k in the first icon change effect of the first effect mode and the first icon change effect of the second effect mode will be described.

First, with reference to FIGS. 37(B) to 37(C), the movable body effect of the first effect mode in the first icon change effect of the first effect mode will be described. When the execution of the first icon change effect of the first effect mode is started, the movable body effect using the on-board movable body 55k is executed, the driving source of the on-board movable device 55 is driven, and FIG. 3 moves downward (falls), which is held in the normal standby state (initial position) shown in FIG. When the execution of the movable object effect is started during the execution of the first icon change effect of the first effect mode, the movable object LED 55L of the on-board movable object 55k lights up in a blue emission color. Thereafter, the on-board movable body 55k is held at the operating position shown in FIG. 37(C). It should be noted that even when the on-board movable body 55k is held at the operating position shown in FIG. . After that, when the execution of the movable object effect is completed during the execution of the first icon change effect of the first effect mode, the movable object LED 55L of the on-board movable object 55k is extinguished and shown in FIG. 37(C). The on-board movable body 55k moves upward (rises) from the operating position to the normal standby state (initial position) shown in FIG. 37(B). It should be noted that the movement of the on-board movable body 55k from the standby position shown in FIG. 37(B) to the operating position shown in FIG. corresponds to "first movable mode".

On the other hand, when the execution of the first icon change effect in the second effect mode is started and the movable body effect using the on-board movable body 55k is executed, the drive source of the on-board movable device 55 is driven, The on-board movable body 55k held in the normal standby state (initial position) shown in 37(B) moves downward (falls). When the execution of the movable object effect is started during the execution of the first icon change effect of the second effect mode, the movable object LED 55L of the on-board movable object 55k lights up in a red emission color. Thereafter, the on-board movable body 55k is held at the operating position shown in FIG. 37(D). Note that even when the on-board movable body 55k is held at the operating position shown in FIG. . After that, when the execution of the movable object effect is completed during the execution of the first icon change effect of the first effect mode, the movable object LED 55L of the on-board movable object 55k is extinguished and shown in FIG. 37(D). The on-board movable body 55k moves upward (rises) from the operating position to the normal standby state (initial position) shown in FIG. 37(B). In addition, in the first icon change effect of the second effect mode, the movement of the on-board movable body 55k from the standby position shown in FIG. 37(B) to the operating position shown in FIG. , second movable mode”.

Next, the table showing the execution probability of the first icon change effect shown in FIG. 38 will be described. In the first icon change effect selection process (S4507), the effect control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment is that the information included in the received variation start command is about the special figure 1 variation pattern "P01", and the scenario When the pattern 3 or the scenario pattern 4 is selected, the execution of the first icon change effect is executed during the execution of the special figure variation effect based on the special figure 1 variation pattern based on the table shown in FIG. Determined at a rate of 100%. In the first icon change effect selection process (S4507), the effect control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment is that the information included in the received variation start command is about the special figure 1 variation pattern "P02", and the scenario When the pattern 2 or the scenario pattern 3 is selected, the first icon change effect is executed during the execution of the special figure variation effect based on the special figure 1 variation pattern based on the table shown in FIG. Determined at a rate of 100%. In the first icon change effect selection process (S4507), the effect control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment is that the information included in the received variation start command is about the special figure 1 variation pattern "P03", and the scenario When pattern 1 is selected, based on the table shown in FIG. 38, non-execution of the first icon change effect is performed at a rate of 100% during execution of the special figure variation effect based on the special figure 1 variation pattern. decide. On the other hand, in the first icon change effect selection process (S4507), the effect control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment, the information included in the received variation start command is about the special figure 1 variation pattern "P03" , When the scenario pattern 2 is selected, the execution of the first icon change effect is 100% during the execution of the special figure variation effect based on the special figure 1 variation pattern based on the table shown in FIG. Decide on a percentage. In the first icon change effect selection process (S4507), the effect control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment is that the information included in the received variation start command is about the special figure 1 variation pattern "P04", and the scenario When the pattern 3 or the scenario pattern 4 is selected, the execution of the first icon change effect is executed during the execution of the special figure variation effect based on the special figure 1 variation pattern based on the table shown in FIG. Determined at a rate of 100%. In the first icon change effect selection process (S4507), the effect control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment is that the information included in the received variation start command is about the special figure 1 variation pattern "P05", and the scenario When the pattern 2 or the scenario pattern 3 is selected, the first icon change effect is executed during the execution of the special figure variation effect based on the special figure 1 variation pattern based on the table shown in FIG. Determined at a rate of 100%. In the first icon change effect selection process (S4507), the effect control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment includes information included in the received variation start command which of the special figure 1 variation patterns “P06” to “P08” Even if it is a special figure 1 variation pattern, if the scenario pattern 1 is selected, based on the table shown in FIG. Non-execution of the icon change effect is determined at a rate of 100%.

In addition, in the first icon change effect selection process (S4507), the effect control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment is that the information included in the received variation start command is about the special figure 1 variation pattern "P21", When the scenario pattern 4 is selected, based on the table shown in FIG. 38, the first icon change effect is executed at a rate of 100% during the execution of the special figure variation effect based on the special figure 1 variation pattern. to decide. On the other hand, in the first icon change effect selection process (S4507), the effect control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment, the information included in the received variation start command is about the special figure 1 variation pattern "P21" , When the scenario pattern 7 or the scenario pattern 8 is selected, based on the table shown in FIG. is determined at a rate of 100%. In the first icon change effect selection process (S4507), the effect control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment is that the information included in the received variation start command is about the special figure 1 variation pattern "P22", and the scenario When the pattern 3 or the scenario pattern 4 is selected, the execution of the first icon change effect is executed during the execution of the special figure variation effect based on the special figure 1 variation pattern based on the table shown in FIG. Determined at a rate of 100%. On the other hand, in the first icon change effect selection process (S4507), the effect control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment, the information included in the received variation start command is about the special figure 1 variation pattern "P22" , When the scenario pattern 5 or the scenario pattern 6 is selected, based on the table shown in FIG. is determined at a rate of 100%.

In the first icon change effect selection process (S4507), the effect control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment is that the information included in the received variation start command is about the special figure 1 variation pattern "P23", and the scenario When the pattern 3 or the scenario pattern 4 is selected, the execution of the first icon change effect is executed during the execution of the special figure variation effect based on the special figure 1 variation pattern based on the table shown in FIG. Determined at a rate of 100%. On the other hand, in the first icon change effect selection process (S4507), the effect control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment, the information included in the received variation start command is about the special figure 1 variation pattern "P23" , When the scenario pattern 7 or the scenario pattern 8 is selected, based on the table shown in FIG. is determined at a rate of 100%. In the first icon change effect selection process (S4507), the effect control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment is that the information included in the received variation start command is about the special figure 1 variation pattern "P24", and the scenario When the pattern 3 or the scenario pattern 4 is selected, the execution of the first icon change effect is executed during the execution of the special figure variation effect based on the special figure 1 variation pattern based on the table shown in FIG. Determined at a rate of 100%. On the other hand, in the first icon change effect selection process (S4507), the effect control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment, the information included in the received variation start command is about the special figure 1 variation pattern "P24" , When the scenario pattern 5 or the scenario pattern 6 is selected, based on the table shown in FIG. is determined at a rate of 100%. It should be noted that the allocation ratio (selection ratio) of the execution lottery table for the first icon change effect shown in FIG.

Next, the effect mode selection table for the first icon change effect shown in FIG. 39 will be described. In the first icon change effect selection process (S4507), the effect control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment determines to execute the first icon change effect during execution of the special figure change effect based on the special figure 1 variation pattern 39, the effect mode of the first icon change effect is determined based on the effect mode selection table of the first icon change effect shown in FIG.

First, in the first icon change effect selection process (S4507), the effect control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment, the information included in the received variation start command is about the special figure 1 variation pattern "P01", When scenario pattern 3 is selected, the first effect mode of the first icon change effect is determined at a rate of 40% based on the effect mode selection table of the first icon change effect shown in FIG. The second effect mode of the first icon change effect is determined at a rate of 60%. In addition, in the first icon change effect selection process (S4507), the effect control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment, the information included in the received variation start command is about the special figure 1 variation pattern "P01", When scenario pattern 4 is selected, the first effect mode of the first icon change effect is determined at a rate of 20% based on the effect mode selection table of the first icon change effect shown in FIG. The second effect mode of the first icon change effect is determined at a rate of 80%.

In the first icon change effect selection process (S4507), the effect control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment is that the information included in the received variation start command is about the special figure 1 variation pattern "P02", and the scenario When pattern 2 is selected, the first effect mode of the first icon change effect is determined at a rate of 100% based on the effect mode selection table of the first icon change effect shown in FIG. In addition, in the first icon change effect selection process (S4507), the effect control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment is that the information included in the received variation start command is about the special figure 1 variation pattern "P02", When scenario pattern 3 is selected, the first effect mode of the first icon change effect is determined at a rate of 40% based on the effect mode selection table of the first icon change effect shown in FIG. The second effect mode of the icon change effect is determined at a rate of 60%.

In the first icon change effect selection process (S4507), the effect control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment is that the information included in the received variation start command is about the special figure 1 variation pattern "P03", and the scenario When pattern 2 is selected, the first effect mode of the first icon change effect is determined at a rate of 100% based on the effect mode selection table of the first icon change effect shown in FIG.

In the first icon change effect selection process (S4507), the effect control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment is that the information included in the received variation start command is about the special figure 1 variation pattern "P04", and the scenario When pattern 3 is selected, the first effect mode of the first icon change effect is determined at a rate of 60% based on the effect mode selection table of the first icon change effect shown in FIG. The second effect mode of the icon change effect is determined at a rate of 40%. In addition, in the first icon change effect selection process (S4507), the effect control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment is that the information included in the received variation start command is about the special figure 1 variation pattern "P04", When scenario pattern 4 is selected, the first effect mode of the first icon change effect is determined at a rate of 80% based on the effect mode selection table of the first icon change effect shown in FIG. The second effect mode of the first icon change effect is determined at a rate of 20%.

In the first icon change effect selection process (S4507), the effect control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment is that the information included in the received variation start command is about the special figure 1 variation pattern "P05", and the scenario When pattern 2 is selected, the first effect mode of the first icon change effect is determined at a rate of 100% based on the effect mode selection table of the first icon change effect shown in FIG. In addition, in the first icon change effect selection process (S4507), the effect control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment, the information included in the received variation start command is about the special figure 1 variation pattern "P05", When the scenario pattern 3 is selected, the first effect mode of the first icon change effect is determined at a rate of 60% based on the effect mode selection table of the first icon change effect shown in FIG. The second effect mode of the icon change effect is determined at a rate of 40%.

In the first icon change effect selection process (S4507), the effect control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment, the information included in the received variation start command is about the special figure 1 variation pattern "P21", the scenario When pattern 4 is selected, the first effect mode of the first icon change effect is determined at a rate of 20% based on the effect mode selection table of the first icon change effect shown in FIG. The second effect mode of the icon change effect is determined at a rate of 80%.

In the first icon change effect selection process (S4507), the effect control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment is that the information included in the received variation start command is about the special figure 1 variation pattern "P22", and the scenario When pattern 3 is selected, the first effect mode of the first icon change effect is determined at a rate of 40% based on the effect mode selection table of the first icon change effect shown in FIG. The second effect mode of the icon change effect is determined at a rate of 60%. In addition, in the first icon change effect selection process (S4507), the effect control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment is that the information included in the received variation start command is about the special figure 1 variation pattern "P22", When scenario pattern 4 is selected, the first effect mode of the first icon change effect is determined at a rate of 20% based on the effect mode selection table of the first icon change effect shown in FIG. The second effect mode of the first icon change effect is determined at a rate of 80%.

In the first icon change effect selection process (S4507), the effect control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment is that the information included in the received variation start command is about the special figure 1 variation pattern "P23", and the scenario When pattern 3 is selected, the first effect mode of the first icon change effect is determined at a rate of 60% based on the effect mode selection table of the first icon change effect shown in FIG. The second effect mode of the icon change effect is determined at a rate of 40%. In addition, in the first icon change effect selection process (S4507), the effect control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment, the information included in the received variation start command is about the special figure 1 variation pattern "P23", When scenario pattern 4 is selected, the first effect mode of the first icon change effect is determined at a rate of 80% based on the effect mode selection table of the first icon change effect shown in FIG. The second effect mode of the first icon change effect is determined at a rate of 20%.

In the first icon change effect selection process (S4507), the effect control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment is that the information included in the received variation start command is about the special figure 1 variation pattern "P24", and the scenario When pattern 3 is selected, the first effect mode of the first icon change effect is determined at a rate of 60% based on the effect mode selection table of the first icon change effect shown in FIG. The second effect mode of the icon change effect is determined at a rate of 40%. In addition, in the first icon change effect selection process (S4507), the effect control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment is that the information included in the received variation start command is about the special figure 1 variation pattern "P24", When scenario pattern 4 is selected, the first effect mode of the first icon change effect is determined at a rate of 80% based on the effect mode selection table of the first icon change effect shown in FIG. The second effect mode of the first icon change effect is determined at a rate of 20%. It should be noted that the distribution ratio (selection ratio) of the effect mode selection table for the first icon change effect shown in FIG. 39 can be appropriately changed within a range that does not interfere with the game.

From the above description of FIG. 39, in the pachinko game machine PY1 of the first embodiment, the first icon change effect is produced more when the result of the big win determination is a big win than when the result of the big win determination is a loss. As a mode, the second rendering mode is more likely to be selected than the first rendering mode. As a result, when the movable body effect of the second effect mode is executed in the first icon change effect of the second effect mode, the movable body effect of the first effect mode is executed in the first icon change effect of the first effect mode. It can be said that the expectation of a big hit is higher than when it is executed. That is, the operation of the on-board movable body 55k from the standby position shown in FIG. 37(B) to the operating position shown in FIG. This is the motion of the on-board movable body 55k that has a higher expectation for a big hit than the motion of the on-board movable body 55k at the operating position. Further, in the pachinko game machine PY1 of the first embodiment, the red emission color of the movable body LED 55L in the movable body production of the second production mode is the blue color of the movable body LED 55L in the movable body production of the first production mode. It can be said that the expectation of a big hit is higher than the emission color. As a result, in the first icon change performance, the player will win more when the movable body performance of the second performance mode is executed than when the movable body performance of the first performance mode is executed. It is possible to have expectations for

Next, the execution timing of the first icon change effect in the special figure variation effect based on the special figure 1 variation pattern will be described with reference to FIGS. 40 and 41. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 40, the execution timing of the first icon change effect of the first effect mode in the special figure variation effect based on the special figure 1 variation pattern will be described. In addition, FIG. 40 shows the first effect mode in the special figure variation production based on any special figure 1 variation pattern from the special figure 1 variation patterns "P01" to "P05" and "P21" to "P24" It shows the execution timing of the first icon change effect.

As shown in FIG. 40, execution of the special figure variation effect is started, and then execution of the first icon change effect of the first effect mode is started. Simultaneously with the start of execution of the first icon change effect of the first effect mode, execution of the movable body effect of the first effect mode is also started. When the execution of the movable body effect of the first effect mode is started, the drive source of the on-board movable device 55 is driven, and the on-board movable body 55k is in the normal standby state (initial position) shown in FIG. 37(B). 37(C) to the operating position shown in FIG. 37(C) and is held at the operating position shown in FIG. 37(C).

After that, in the first icon change effect of the first effect mode, when the execution of the movable body effect of the first effect mode is completed, the driving source of the on-board movable device 55 is driven, and the on-board movable body 55k is moved to the figure. 37(C) to the normal standby state (initial position) shown in FIG. It is held. Also, at the same time as the execution of the movable body effect of the first effect mode in the first icon change effect of the first effect mode is completed, the movable body LED 55L that is lit in a blue emission color on the display unit 50a is movable on the board. The display of the movable body image KG1 on the first board simulating the body 55k is started. Further, at the same time as the execution of the movable body effect of the first effect mode in the first icon change effect of the first effect mode is completed, the icon TA1 of the normal display mode displayed in the icon display area 50e is changed to the icon change effect of the first effect mode. It will move to area 50h.

After that, the icon TA1 in the normal display mode displayed in the icon change area 50h is replaced by the icon TA2 in the first expectation level display mode, the icon TA3 in the second expectation level display mode, or the icon TA3 in the third expectation level display mode. Of the icons TA4, the icon TA is changed to one of the expectations display modes. The icon TA in the changed expectation degree display mode is displayed in the icon change area 50h.

After that, at the same time when the display of the first board movable body image KG1 on the display unit 50a ends, the execution of the first icon change effect of the first effect mode also ends. At the same time when the display of the first board movable body image KG1 on the display unit 50a ends, the icon TA2 in the first expectation level display mode and the second expectation level display mode displayed in the icon change area 50h are displayed. or the icon TA4 in the third expectation level display mode, the icon TA in any expectation level display mode moves to the icon display area 50e (see FIG. 40). .

Next, with reference to FIG. 41, the execution timing of the first icon change effect of the second effect mode in the special figure variation effect based on the special figure 1 variation pattern will be described. In addition, FIG. 41 shows the second effect mode in the special figure variation production based on any special figure 1 variation pattern from the special figure 1 variation patterns "P01" to "P05" and "P21" to "P24" It shows the execution timing of the first icon change effect.

As shown in FIG. 41, execution of the special figure variation effect is started, and then execution of the first icon change effect of the second effect mode is started. Simultaneously with the start of execution of the first icon change effect of the second effect mode, execution of the movable body effect of the second effect mode is also started. When the execution of the movable body effect of the second effect mode is started, the driving source of the on-board movable device 55 is driven, and the on-board movable body 55k is in the normal standby state (initial position) shown in FIG. 37(B). 37(D), and is held at the operating position shown in FIG. 37(D).

After that, when the execution of the movable body effect of the second effect mode ends in the first icon change effect of the second effect mode, the driving source of the on-board movable device 55 is driven, and the on-board movable body 55k is moved to the figure. 37(D) is moved (raised) toward the normal standby state (initial position) shown in FIG. It is held. At the same time as the execution of the movable body effect of the second effect mode is completed, a second board movable body image simulating a board movable body 55k equipped with a movable body LED 55L lit in a red emission color on the display section 50a. The display of KG2 is started. Furthermore, at the same time as the execution of the movable body effect in the second effect mode ends, the icon TA1 in the normal display mode displayed in the icon display area 50e moves to the icon change area 50h.

After that, the icon TA1 in the normal display mode displayed in the icon change area 50h is changed to the icon TA3 in the second expectation level display mode or the icon TA4 in the third expectation level display mode. The changed icon TA3 in the second expectation level display mode or the icon TA4 in the third expectation level display mode is displayed in the icon change area 50h.

After that, the display of the second board movable object image KG2 on the display unit 50a ends, and at the same time, the execution of the first icon change effect of the second effect mode also ends. At the same time when the display of the second board movable body image KG2 on the display unit 50a ends, the icon TA3 in the second expectation level display mode displayed in the icon change area 50h or the third expectation level display is displayed. The icon TA4 of the aspect moves to the icon display area 50e.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 42 to 48, an example of the effect when the first icon change effect is executed during execution of the special figure variation effect will be described. First, with reference to FIGS. 42 to 45, an example of the effect when the first icon change effect of the first effect mode is executed during execution of the special figure variation effect will be described. 42 to 45 are the special figure 1 variation patterns "P01" to "P05" and "P21" to "P24". This is an effect example when the first icon change effect of the aspect is executed.

When the execution of the special figure fluctuation production is started when the normal production mode is set, as shown in FIG. At the same time, the variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is also started.

Further, when execution of the special figure variation effect is started, as shown in FIG. 42(A), the icon TA1 in the normal display mode is displayed in the icon display area 50e. In addition, as shown in FIG. 42(A), since the pending icon HA is not displayed in the pending icon display area 50d, the player is notified that the special figure 1 pending number is "0". .

As shown in FIG. 42A, the display section 50a of the image display device 50 can be provided with the icon change area 50h. In the first embodiment, when the first icon change effect is executed, the icon TA1 in the normal display mode is moved to the icon change area 50h, and the icon TA1 in the normal display mode is expected in the icon change area 50h. The icon will be changed to the corresponding icon in the degree display mode.

When the first icon change effect of the first effect mode is executed during execution of the special figure fluctuation effect, the movable body effect of the first effect mode is executed, and as shown in FIG. 55k covers the upper portion of the display portion 50a of the image display device 50, making the upper portion of the display portion 50a of the image display device 50 difficult to see. Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 42(B), the movable body LED 55L provided on the on-board movable body 55k lights up in a blue emission color.

After that, when the execution of the movable body effect of the first effect mode ends during the execution of the first icon change effect of the first effect mode, as shown in FIG. As the movable body LED 55L goes out, the on-board movable body 55k moves (rises) to a predetermined standby position (initial position) (see FIG. 37(B)). Further, when the execution of the movable body rendering is completed during the execution of the first icon change rendering of the first rendering mode, the first board imitating the board movable body 55k with the movable body LED 55L lit in a blue emission color is displayed. A movable body image KG1 is displayed in the center of the display section 50a. Further, after the execution of the movable body effect of the first effect mode is completed, the first board movable body image KG1 is subsequently displayed on the display unit 50a, thereby giving surprise and impact to the player. becomes possible. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 42(C), when the execution of the movable object effect ends during the execution of the first icon change effect in the first effect mode, the icon TA1 in the normal display mode changes to the icon display area 50e. to the icon change area 50h.

After that, during execution of the first icon change effect of the first effect mode, as shown in FIG. 42(D), the first change trigger image IH1 showing one lightning strike is displayed on the display section 50a. When the first change trigger image IH1 is displayed on the display unit 50a, one icon TA1 in the normal display mode displayed in the icon change area 50h is displayed from the first board movable body image KG1. It is possible to show the player as if lightning had struck. In the first icon change effect in the first effect mode of the first embodiment, the first change trigger image IH1 is displayed on the display unit 50a, so that the icon in the normal display mode displayed in the icon change area 50h is displayed. TA1 is the icon TA in any one of the icon TA2 in the first expectation level display mode, the icon TA3 in the second expectation level display mode, or the icon TA4 in the third expectation level display mode. is changed to

For example, when scenario pattern 2 is selected by the effect control microcomputer 121 in the first icon change effect selection process (S4507) and the first icon change effect of the first effect mode is being executed, The example of effect shown in (D) is advanced to the example of effect shown in FIG. 43(A). As shown in FIG. 43A, the icon TA2 in the first degree of expectation display mode is displayed in the icon change area 50h of the display section 50a.

After that, when the execution of the first icon change effect of the first effect mode is completed during the execution of the special figure variation effect, as shown in FIG. display ends. Further, when the execution of the first icon change in the first effect mode is completed, as shown in FIG. It is moved to the display area 50e. Then, as shown in FIG. 43(B), the icon TA2 in the first degree-of-expectation display mode moved to the icon display area 50e continues to be displayed.

For example, when the scenario pattern 3 is selected by the effect control microcomputer 121 in the first icon change effect selection process (S4507) and the first icon change effect of the first effect mode is executed, The example of effect shown in (D) is advanced to the example of effect shown in FIG. 44(A). As shown in FIG. 44A, the icon TA3 in the second expectation level display mode is displayed in the icon change area 50h of the display section 50a.

After that, when the execution of the first icon change effect in the first effect mode is completed during the execution of the special figure variation effect, as shown in FIG. display ends. Further, when the execution of the first icon change effect in the first effect mode is completed, as shown in FIG. It is moved to the icon display area 50e. Then, as shown in FIG. 44(B), the icon TA3 in the second expectation display mode continues to be displayed in the icon display area 50e.

For example, when scenario pattern 4 is selected by the effect control microcomputer 121 in the first icon change effect selection process (S4507) and the first icon change effect of the first effect mode is being executed, The example of effect shown in (D) is advanced to the example of effect shown in FIG. 45(A). As shown in FIG. 45A, the icon TA4 in the third expectation level display mode is displayed in the icon change area 50h of the display section 50a.

After that, when the execution of the first icon change effect in the first effect mode is completed during the execution of the special figure variation effect, as shown in FIG. display ends. Further, when the execution of the first icon change effect in the first effect mode is completed, as shown in FIG. It is moved to the icon display area 50e. Then, as shown in FIG. 45(B), the icon TA4 in the third expectation display mode continues to be displayed in the icon display area 50e.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 46 to 48, a description will be given of an effect example when the first icon change effect of the second effect mode is executed during execution of the special figure variation effect. In addition, from FIG. 46 to FIG. 48, from special figure 1 variation patterns "P01" to "P05" and from "P21" to "P24", the second production with special figure variation production based on any special figure 1 variation pattern This is an effect example when the first icon change effect of the aspect is executed.

When the execution of the special figure fluctuation production is started when the normal production mode is set, as shown in FIG. At the same time, the variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is also started.

Further, when execution of the special figure variation effect is started, the icon TA1 in the normal display mode is displayed in the icon display area 50e as shown in FIG. 46(A). In addition, as shown in FIG. 46(A), since the pending icon HA is not displayed in the pending icon display area 50d, the player is notified that the special figure 1 pending number is "0". .

As shown in FIG. 46A, the display section 50a of the image display device 50 can be provided with the icon change area 50h. In the first embodiment, when the first icon change effect is executed, the icon TA1 in the normal display mode is moved to the icon change area 50h, and the icon TA1 in the normal display mode is expected in the icon change area 50h. The icon TA is changed to the icon TA in the degree display mode.

When the first icon change effect of the second effect mode is executed during execution of the special figure fluctuation effect, the movable body effect of the second effect mode is executed, and as shown in FIG. 55k covers the central portion of the display portion 50a of the image display device 50, making the central portion of the display portion 50a of the image display device 50 difficult to see. Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 46(B), the movable body LED 55L provided on the on-board movable body 55k lights up in a red emission color.

After that, when the execution of the movable body effect of the second effect mode ends during the execution of the first icon change effect of the second effect mode, as shown in FIG. As the movable body LED 55L goes out, the on-board movable body 55k moves (rises) to a predetermined standby position (initial position) (see FIG. 37(B)). In addition, when the execution of the movable body rendering is completed during the execution of the first icon change rendering of the second rendering mode, a second display simulating the on-board movable body 55k equipped with the movable body LED 55L lit in a red emission color is displayed. A two-board movable body image KG2 is displayed in the center of the display section 50a. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 46(C), when the execution of the movable body effect of the second effect mode ends during the execution of the first icon change effect of the second effect mode, the icon TA1 in the normal display mode changes to The icon display area 50e is moved to the icon change area 50h.

Thereafter, during execution of the first icon change effect of the second effect mode, as shown in FIG. 46(D), a second change trigger image IH2 showing two lightning strikes is displayed on the display section 50a. When the second change trigger image IH2 is displayed on the display unit 50a, lightning strikes from the second board movable body image KG2 toward the icon TA1 in the normal display mode displayed in the icon change area 50h. It is possible to show it to the player as shown. In the first icon change effect in the second effect mode of the first embodiment, the second change trigger image IH2 is displayed on the display unit 50a, so that the icon in the normal display mode displayed in the icon change area 50h is displayed. TA1 is changed to the icon TA3 in the second expectation level display mode or the icon TA4 in the third expectation level display mode.

For example, when scenario pattern 3 is selected by the effect control microcomputer 121 in the first icon change effect selection process (S4507) and the first icon change effect of the second effect mode is being executed, The example of effect shown in (D) is advanced to the example of effect shown in FIG. 47(A). As shown in FIG. 47A, the icon TA3 in the second expectation level display mode is displayed in the icon change area 50h of the display section 50a.

After that, when the execution of the first icon change effect of the second effect mode is completed during the execution of the special figure variation effect, as shown in FIG. display ends. Further, when the execution of the first icon change effect in the second effect mode is completed, as shown in FIG. It is moved to the icon display area 50e. Then, as shown in FIG. 47B, the icon TA3 in the second degree of expectation display mode is displayed in the icon display area 50e.

For example, when scenario pattern 4 is selected by the effect control microcomputer 121 in the first icon change effect selection process (S4507) and the first icon change effect of the second effect mode is being executed, The example of effect shown in (D) is advanced to the example of effect shown in FIG. 48(A). As shown in FIG. 48A, the icon TA4 in the third expectation level display mode is displayed in the icon change area 50h of the display section 50a.

After that, when the execution of the first icon change effect of the second effect mode is completed during the execution of the special figure variation effect, as shown in FIG. display ends. Further, when the execution of the first icon change effect in the second effect mode is completed, as shown in FIG. It is moved to the icon display area 50e. Then, as shown in FIG. 48(B), the icon TA4 in the third expectation display mode continues to be displayed in the icon display area 50e.

Subsequently, the second icon change effect and the third icon change effect, which are one kind of the notice effect executed during execution of the special figure fluctuation effect, will be specifically described. The second icon change effect is an advance notice of changing the icon TA5 in the change suggesting display mode displayed in the icon display area 50e to the icon TA6 in the battle development suggesting display mode or the united struggle development suggesting display mode icon TA7. It is a performance. Further, the third icon change effect is the icon TA6 of the battle development suggesting display mode or the icon of the joint struggle development suggesting display mode displayed in the icon display area 50e after the execution of the second icon change effect is completed. This is an advance notice effect of changing TA7 to the icon TA3 in the second expectation level display mode or the icon TA4 in the third expectation level display mode.

A table showing the execution probability of the second icon change effect shown in FIG. 49 will be described. In the second icon change effect selection process (S4508), the effect control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment is that the information included in the received variation start command is about the special figure 1 variation pattern "P01", and the scenario When pattern 3 or scenario pattern 4 is selected, non-execution of the second icon change effect during execution of the special figure variation effect based on the special figure 1 variation pattern is 100 based on the table shown in FIG. Determined by percentage. In the second icon change effect selection process (S4508), the effect control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment is that the information included in the received variation start command is about the special figure 1 variation pattern "P02", and the scenario When pattern 2 or scenario pattern 3 is selected, based on the table shown in FIG. Determined by percentage. In the second icon change effect selection process (S4508), the effect control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment is that the information included in the received variation start command is about the special figure 1 variation pattern "P03", and the scenario When pattern 1 or scenario pattern 2 is selected, based on the table shown in FIG. Determined by percentage. In the second icon change effect selection process (S4508), the effect control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment is that the information included in the received variation start command is about the special figure 1 variation pattern "P04", and the scenario When pattern 3 or scenario pattern 4 is selected, non-execution of the second icon change effect during execution of the special figure variation effect based on the special figure 1 variation pattern is 100 based on the table shown in FIG. Determined by percentage. In the second icon change effect selection process (S4508), the effect control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment, the information included in the received variation start command is about the special figure 1 variation pattern "P05", the scenario When pattern 2 or scenario pattern 3 is selected, based on the table shown in FIG. Determined by percentage. In the second icon change effect selection process (S4508), the effect control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment, the information included in the received variation start command is special figure 1 variation pattern "P06", "P07", or "P08" Among them, even if it is any special figure 1 variation pattern, when selecting the scenario pattern 1, based on the table shown in FIG. 49, special figure variation production based on the special figure 1 variation pattern During execution of , non-execution of the second icon change effect is determined at a rate of 100%.

In addition, in the second icon change effect selection process (S4508), the effect control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment, the information included in the received variation start command is about the special figure 1 variation pattern "P21", When the scenario pattern 4 is selected, based on the table shown in FIG. 49, non-execution of the second icon change effect during execution of the special figure variation effect based on the special figure 1 variation pattern is 100%. decide. On the other hand, in the second icon change effect selection process (S4508), the effect control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment, the information included in the received variation start command is about the special figure 1 variation pattern "P21" , When selecting the scenario pattern 7 or the scenario pattern 8, the execution of the second icon change effect during the execution of the special figure variation effect based on the special figure 1 variation pattern based on the table shown in FIG. is determined at a rate of 100%.

In addition, in the second icon change effect selection process (S4508), the effect control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment, the information included in the received variation start command is about the special figure 1 variation pattern "P22", When selecting the scenario pattern 3 or the scenario pattern 4, non-execution of the second icon change effect during execution of the special figure variation effect based on the special figure 1 variation pattern based on the table shown in FIG. is determined at a rate of 100%. On the other hand, in the second icon change effect selection process (S4508), the effect control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment, the information included in the received variation start command is about the special figure 1 variation pattern "P22" , when selecting the scenario pattern 5 or the scenario pattern 6, the execution of the second icon change effect during the execution of the special figure variation effect based on the special figure 1 variation pattern based on the table shown in FIG. is determined at a rate of 100%.

In addition, in the second icon change effect selection process (S4508), the effect control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment, the information included in the received variation start command is about the special figure 1 variation pattern "P23", When selecting the scenario pattern 3 or the scenario pattern 4, non-execution of the second icon change effect during execution of the special figure variation effect based on the special figure 1 variation pattern based on the table shown in FIG. is determined at a rate of 100%. On the other hand, in the second icon change effect selection process (S4508), the effect control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment, the information included in the received variation start command is about the special figure 1 variation pattern "P23" , When selecting the scenario pattern 7 or the scenario pattern 8, the execution of the second icon change effect during the execution of the special figure variation effect based on the special figure 1 variation pattern based on the table shown in FIG. is determined at a rate of 100%.

In addition, in the second icon change effect selection process (S4508), the effect control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment, the information included in the received variation start command is about the special figure 1 variation pattern "P24", When selecting the scenario pattern 3 or the scenario pattern 4, non-execution of the second icon change effect during execution of the special figure variation effect based on the special figure 1 variation pattern based on the table shown in FIG. is determined at a rate of 100%. On the other hand, in the second icon change effect selection process (S4508), the effect control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment, the information included in the received variation start command is about the special figure 1 variation pattern "P24" , when selecting the scenario pattern 5 or the scenario pattern 6, the execution of the second icon change effect during the execution of the special figure variation effect based on the special figure 1 variation pattern based on the table shown in FIG. is determined at a rate of 100%. It should be noted that the distribution ratio (selection ratio) of the execution lottery table for the second icon change effect shown in FIG.

Next, the table showing the execution probability of the third icon change effect shown in FIG. 50 will be explained. In the third icon change effect selection process (S4509), the effect control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment is that the information included in the received variation start command is about the special figure 1 variation pattern "P01", and the scenario When pattern 3 or scenario pattern 4 is selected, non-execution of the third icon change effect is set to 100 during execution of the special figure variation effect based on the special figure 1 variation pattern based on the table shown in FIG. Determined by percentage. In the third icon change effect selection process (S4509), the effect control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment, the information included in the received variation start command is about the special figure 1 variation pattern "P02", the scenario When pattern 2 or scenario pattern 3 is selected, non-execution of the third icon change effect is set to 100 during execution of the special figure variation effect based on the special figure 1 variation pattern based on the table shown in FIG. Determined by percentage. In the third icon change effect selection process (S4509), the effect control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment is that the information included in the received variation start command is about the special figure 1 variation pattern "P03", and the scenario When pattern 1 or scenario pattern 2 is selected, non-execution of the third icon change effect is set to 100 during execution of the special figure variation effect based on the special figure 1 variation pattern based on the table shown in FIG. Determined by percentage. In the third icon change effect selection process (S4509), the effect control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment, the information included in the received variation start command is about the special figure 1 variation pattern "P04", the scenario When pattern 3 or scenario pattern 4 is selected, non-execution of the third icon change effect is set to 100 during execution of the special figure variation effect based on the special figure 1 variation pattern based on the table shown in FIG. Determined by percentage. In the third icon change effect selection process (S4509), the effect control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment, the information included in the received variation start command is about the special figure 1 variation pattern "P05", the scenario When pattern 2 or scenario pattern 3 is selected, non-execution of the third icon change effect is set to 100 during execution of the special figure variation effect based on the special figure 1 variation pattern based on the table shown in FIG. Determined by percentage. In the third icon change effect selection process (S4509), the effect control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment includes information included in the received variation start command as special figure 1 variation pattern "P06", "P07", or "P08". Among them, even if it is any special figure 1 variation pattern, when selecting the scenario pattern 1, based on the table shown in FIG. 50, special figure variation production based on the special figure 1 variation pattern During the execution of , non-execution of the third icon change effect is determined at a rate of 100%.

In addition, in the third icon change effect selection process (S4509), the effect control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment, the information included in the received variation start command is about the special figure 1 variation pattern "P21", When selecting the scenario pattern 4, based on the table shown in FIG. 50, non-execution of the third icon change effect during execution of the special figure variation effect based on the special figure 1 variation pattern is 100%. decide. On the other hand, in the third icon change effect selection process (S4509), the effect control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment, the information included in the received variation start command is about the special figure 1 variation pattern "P21" , when selecting the scenario pattern 7 or the scenario pattern 8, the execution of the third icon change effect during the execution of the special figure variation effect based on the special figure 1 variation pattern based on the table shown in FIG. is determined at a rate of 100%.

In addition, in the third icon change effect selection process (S4509), the effect control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment, the information included in the received variation start command is about the special figure 1 variation pattern "P22", When selecting the scenario pattern 3 or the scenario pattern 4, non-execution of the third icon change effect during execution of the special figure variation effect based on the special figure 1 variation pattern based on the table shown in FIG. is determined at a rate of 100%. On the other hand, in the third icon change effect selection process (S4509), the effect control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment, the information included in the received variation start command is about the special figure 1 variation pattern "P22" , when selecting the scenario pattern 5 or the scenario pattern 6, execution of the third icon change effect during execution of the special figure variation effect based on the special figure 1 variation pattern based on the table shown in FIG. is determined at a rate of 100%.

In addition, in the third icon change effect selection process (S4509), the effect control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment, the information included in the received variation start command is about the special figure 1 variation pattern "P23", When selecting the scenario pattern 3 or the scenario pattern 4, non-execution of the third icon change effect during execution of the special figure variation effect based on the special figure 1 variation pattern based on the table shown in FIG. is determined at a rate of 100%. On the other hand, in the third icon change effect selection process (S4509), the effect control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment, the information included in the received variation start command is about the special figure 1 variation pattern "P23" , When selecting the scenario pattern 7 or the scenario pattern 8, the execution of the third icon change effect during the execution of the special figure variation effect based on the special figure 1 variation pattern based on the table shown in FIG. is determined at a rate of 100%.

In addition, in the third icon change effect selection process (S4509), the effect control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment, the information included in the received variation start command is about the special figure 1 variation pattern "P24", When selecting the scenario pattern 3 or the scenario pattern 4, non-execution of the third icon change effect during execution of the special figure variation effect based on the special figure 1 variation pattern based on the table shown in FIG. is determined at a rate of 100%. On the other hand, in the third icon change effect selection process (S4509), the effect control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment, the information included in the received variation start command is about the special figure 1 variation pattern "P24" , when selecting the scenario pattern 5 or the scenario pattern 6, execution of the third icon change effect during execution of the special figure variation effect based on the special figure 1 variation pattern based on the table shown in FIG. is determined at a rate of 100%.

Next, the execution timing of the second icon change effect and the execution timing of the third icon change effect in the special figure variation effect based on the special figure 1 variation pattern will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, FIG. 51 shows the execution timing of the second icon change effect and the third icon change effect in the special figure change effect based on any one of the special figure 1 change patterns “P21” to “P24”. and the execution timing of

As shown in FIG. 51, execution of the special figure variation effect is started, and first, execution of the second icon change effect is started. By executing the second icon change effect, the icon TA5 in the change suggesting display mode displayed in the icon display area 50e changes to the icon TA6 in the battle development suggesting display mode or the united struggle development suggesting display mode icon TA7. be changed. Then, the execution of the second icon change effect in the special figure variation effect ends. After that, during the execution of the special figure variation performance, when reach is established and execution of N reach is started and a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) elapses, the third icon change performance is executed. It should be noted that the elapse of a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) from the start of execution of N-reach corresponds to the "specific condition" of the present invention. By executing the third icon change effect, the icon TA6 in the battle development suggesting display mode or the icon TA7 in the cooperative struggle development suggesting display mode displayed in the icon display area 50e changes to the icon in the second expectation level display mode. The icon is changed to TA3 or to the icon TA4 in the third expectation level display mode. Then, the execution of the third icon change effect in the special figure variation effect ends.

After that, as shown in FIG. 51, after the N reach ends in the special figure fluctuation production, it develops into the SP reach through the development production. After that, after the SP reach ends in the special figure fluctuation production, it proceeds to the SPSP reach (battle reach, joint fight reach) through the branch production. As a result, the player can use the icon TA6 of the battle development suggestion display mode displayed on the display unit 50a in the special figure fluctuation effect or the icon TA7 of the joint struggle development suggestion display mode to select either the battle reach or the joint fight reach. , to know to advance to any SPSP reach. Then, the icon TA3 in the changed second expectation level display mode or the icon TA4 in the third expectation level display mode allows the user to grasp the possibility that the result of the big win determination will be a big win, and SPSP reach (battle reach, It is possible to entertain joint struggle reach).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 52 to 54, an example of the effect when the second icon change effect and the third icon change effect are executed during execution of the special figure variation effect will be described. 52(B) to 54 are special figure 1 variation patterns "P21" to "P24". This is an effect example when an icon change effect is executed. First, with reference to FIG. 52, an example of the effect when the second icon change effect is executed during execution of the special figure variation effect will be described.

When the normal production mode is set, when the execution of the special figure fluctuation production ends, as shown in FIG. 52 (A), the stop mode (" 5, 4, 3"), and the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are all stopped and displayed in a stop mode ("5, 4, 3") suggesting a failure. Further, as shown in FIG. 52(A), when execution of the special figure variation effect is completed, the icon TA disappears from the icon display area 50e. As shown in FIG. 52(A), in the first display area 50d1 of the pending icon display area 50d, the pending icon in the change suggestive display mode composed of the character image "preparing" and the effect image of the white triangle is displayed. HA5 is displayed. By displaying the pending icon HA5 in the change suggesting display mode in the first display area 50d1, the icon TA5 in the change suggesting display mode is changed to the development suggesting display mode icon in the next special figure fluctuation effect. It is possible to make them understand that Since the hold icon HA5 of the change suggestion display mode is displayed in the first display area 50d1, the player is notified that the special figure 1 hold number is "1".

When the special figure variation effect is executed by the start of the variable display of the special figure 1, the pending icon HA5 of the change suggestion display mode displayed in the first display area 50d1 is changed from the first display area 50d1 to the icon display. It moves (shifts) to the area 50e and becomes the icon TA5 in the change suggestive display mode (see FIG. 52(B)). By such display of the icon TA, the player can understand that the variable display of the next special figure 1 has started. In addition, by displaying the icon TA5 in the change suggestive display mode in the icon display area 50e, the icon TA5 in the change suggestive display mode is displayed in the battle development suggestive display to the player during the execution of the special figure fluctuation effect. It is possible to let the user know that the icon TA6 of the mode or the icon TA7 of the joint struggle development suggesting display mode is changed.

Further, when execution of the special figure variation effect is started, as shown in FIG. 52(B), the variable display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is started, and the variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is also started. .

After that, when the execution timing of the second icon change effect is reached during the execution of the special figure variation effect (see FIG. 51), the execution of the second icon change effect is started. When the second icon change effect is executed, the first icon change trigger image HE1 is displayed such that the icon TA5 in the change suggestive display mode displayed in the icon display area 50e is covered with a cloud. By displaying the first icon change trigger image HE1 in the icon display area 50e, the icon TA5 in the change suggesting display mode changes to the icon TA6 in the battle development suggesting display mode or the icon TA7 in the joint struggle development suggesting display mode. It is possible to let them grasp that they are changed.

For example, after the display of the first icon change trigger image HE1 ends, the icon TA5 in the change suggestive display mode displayed in the icon display area 50e is changed to the icon TA6 in the battle development suggestive display mode, When the execution of the 2-icon change effect ends, the process proceeds from the example effect shown in FIG. 52(C) to the example effect shown in FIG. 53(A).

When the display of the first icon change trigger image HE1 displayed in the display section 50a is completed, the icon TA5 in the change suggestive display mode displayed in the icon display area 50e changes to the icon TA6 in the battle development suggestive display mode. be changed. After the execution of the second icon change effect is completed, the icon TA6 in the battle development suggestive display mode is displayed in the icon display area 50e of the display section 50a, as shown in FIG. 53(A). By displaying the icon TA6 of the battle development suggesting display mode on the display unit 50a, it is possible for the player to understand that the special figure variation effect will develop into a battle reach.

During the execution of the special figure fluctuation performance, the left performance symbol EZ1 and the right performance symbol EZ3 are temporarily stopped in the same stop mode (so-called reach eyes), reach is established, and execution of N reach is started. After a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) has passed since the execution of the N reach is started, as shown in FIG. 53(B), the same stop mode (" 5.↓.5") is temporarily stopped and the third icon change effect is executed while N-reach is being executed. When the third icon change effect is executed, a first cloud effect image that covers the icon TA6 in the battle development suggestive display mode displayed in the icon display area 50e and lightning is directed toward the first cloud effect image. A second icon change trigger image HE2 composed of a falling second cloud effect image is displayed. In the third icon change effect, when the display of the second icon change trigger image HE2 ends, the icon TA6 in the battle development suggesting display mode displayed in the icon display area 50e is replaced with the icon in the second expectation level display mode. The icon is changed to TA3 or to the icon TA4 in the third expectation level display mode, and the execution of the third icon change effect ends.

When the display of the second icon change trigger image HE2 displayed on the display unit 50a is finished, the icon TA6 in the battle development suggesting display mode displayed in the icon display area 50e changes to the corresponding icon TA6 in the second expectation level display mode. When the icon is changed to icon TA3 and the execution of the third icon change effect ends, the process proceeds to the example of effect shown in FIG. 53(C). As shown in FIG. 53(C), the icon TA3 in the second expectation display mode is displayed in the icon display area 50e. By displaying the icon TA3 in the second degree of expectation display mode on the display unit 50a, it is possible to have a certain degree of expectation for a big win.

On the other hand, when the display of the second icon change trigger image HE2 displayed in the display section 50a is finished, the icon TA6 in the display mode suggesting the progress of battle displayed in the icon display area 50e is displayed in the third degree of expectation. When the mode is changed to the icon TA4 and the execution of the third icon change effect ends, the process proceeds to the effect example shown in FIG. 53(D). As shown in FIG. 53(D), the icon TA4 in the third expectation display mode is displayed in the icon display area 50e. By displaying the icon TA7 in the third degree of expectation display mode on the display section 50a, it is possible to make the player very hopeful that the result of the big win determination will be a big win.

Next, for example, the display of the first icon change trigger image HE1 ends, and the icon TA5 in the change suggesting display mode displayed in the icon display area 50e is changed to the icon TA7 in the joint struggle development suggesting display mode. When the second icon change effect ends, the process proceeds from the example of effect shown in FIG. 52(C) to the example of effect shown in FIG. 54(A).

When the display of the first icon change trigger image HE1 displayed in the display section 50a is completed, the icon TA5 in the change suggesting display mode displayed in the icon display area 50e is changed to the icon TA7 in the joint struggle development suggesting display mode. , and the execution of the second icon change effect ends. Subsequently, the execution of the second icon change effect is completed, and the icon TA7 in the cooperative development suggesting display mode is displayed in the icon display area 50e of the display section 50a, as shown in FIG. 54(A). By displaying the icon TA7 in the joint fight development suggestive display mode on the display unit 50a, it is possible for the player to understand that the special figure variation effect will develop into a joint fight reach.

During the execution of the special figure fluctuation performance, the left performance symbol EZ1 and the right performance symbol EZ3 are temporarily stopped in the same stop mode (so-called reach eyes), reach is established, and execution of N reach is started. After a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) has passed since the execution of the N reach is started, as shown in FIG. 54(B), the same stop mode (" 5.↓.5") is temporarily stopped and in the ready-to-win state, the third icon change effect is executed. When the third icon change effect is executed, the icon TA7 of the joint struggle development suggesting display mode displayed in the icon display area 50e is covered with a cloud, and a cloud that is shooting lightning toward the cloud is displayed. A second icon change trigger image HE2 is displayed. In the third icon change effect, when the display of the second icon change trigger image HE2 ends, the icon TA7 in the cooperative struggle development suggestive display mode displayed in the icon display area 50e is changed to the icon in the second expectation level display mode. The icon is changed to TA3 or to the icon TA4 in the third expectation level display mode.

When the display of the second icon change trigger image HE2 displayed on the display unit 50a is finished, the icon TA7 in the cooperative struggle development suggesting display mode displayed in the icon display area 50e changes to the icon in the second expectation level display mode. When the icon change effect is changed to TA3 and the execution of the third icon change effect is completed, the process proceeds to the effect example shown in FIG. 54(C). As shown in FIG. 54(C), the icon TA3 in the second expectation display mode is displayed in the icon display area 50e. By displaying the icon TA3 in the second degree of expectation display mode on the display unit 50a, it is possible to have a certain degree of expectation for a big win.

On the other hand, when the display of the second icon change trigger image HE2 displayed in the display section 50a ends, the icon TA7 in the display mode suggesting the development of the joint struggle displayed in the icon display area 50e changes to the third degree of expectation display mode. is changed to the icon TA4 and the execution of the third icon change effect is completed, the process proceeds to the effect example shown in FIG. 54(D). As shown in FIG. 54(D), the icon TA4 in the third expectation display mode is displayed in the icon display area 50e. By displaying the icon TA7 in the third degree of expectation display mode on the display section 50a, it is possible to make the player very hopeful that the result of the big win determination will be a big win.

Next, the production flow of the special figure fluctuation production based on the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern in the non-time saving state in the pachinko game machine PY1 of the first embodiment will be described using FIG. When the special figure variation effect based on the special figure 1 variation pattern is started in the non-time saving state, first, as shown in FIG. In the case of "normal loss variation", when the execution of the special figure variation effect is completed, the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are stopped and displayed in a stop mode (so-called loose eyes) suggesting a loss. In this case, the special figure variation production based on the special figure 1 variation pattern "P07" or "P08" has been executed (see FIG. 28). On the other hand, in the case of "ready-to-N reach", it branches to "when ending with N reach" or "advancement effect->L reach or SP reach" after N reach.

In the case of "finishing with N reach", when the execution of the special figure variation production is completed, or the stop mode that suggests a big hit (so-called double eye) is displayed, or the stop mode that suggests reach loss (so-called reach loss eye) ), the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2 and EZ3 are stopped and displayed. In this case, the special figure variation effect based on the special figure 1 variation pattern "P03" or "P06" has been executed (see FIG. 28). On the other hand, in the case of "development production → L reach or SP reach" after N reach, branch to "development production → L reach or end with SP reach", or branch to "branch production" through SP reach do.

In the case of "development production → end with L reach", when the development production → L reach is completed and the execution of the special figure fluctuation production is completed, the stop display is performed in a stop mode (so-called double eyes) suggesting a big hit, Alternatively, the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are stopped and displayed in a stop mode (so-called reach-losing eyes) suggesting reach-losing. In this case, the special figure variation effect based on the special figure 1 variation pattern "P02" or "P05" has been executed (see FIG. 28). On the other hand, in the case of "development production → end with SP reach", when the development production → SP reach ends and the execution of the special figure fluctuation production ends, the stop display is stopped in a stop mode (so-called double eyes) suggesting a big hit. Alternatively, the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are stopped and displayed in a stop mode (so-called reach-losing eyes) suggesting reach-losing. In this case, the special figure variation effect based on the special figure 1 variation pattern "P01" or "P04" has been executed (see FIG. 28). Further, in the case of "branch effect" after SP reach, branch to "battle reach" or "joint fight reach".

During the execution of the branching performance, a pre-suggestive cut-in performance, which is a type of advance-suggestion performance indicating advance to the SPSP reach in advance, is performed rather than the execution of the development-suggestion performance (expectation-suggestion performance) to be described later. For the pre-suggestion cut-in production, there is a battle pre-suggestion cut-in production that suggests proceeding to the battle reach during the execution of the branch production, and a joint battle pre-suggestion cut-in production that suggests proceeding to the joint battle reach during the execution of the branch production. There is.

In the case of "branch effect→battle ready-to-win", a battle pre-suggestion cut-in effect (pre-transition suggesting effect) suggesting advance to battle ready-to-reach in advance is executed rather than execution of a development suggesting effect to be described later. After that, during the execution of the branching effect after the execution of the pre-battle suggesting cut-in effect, the battle development suggesting effect suggesting that the game advances to the battle reach is executed. After that, proceed to battle reach, when the battle reach is completed and the execution of the special figure variation effect is completed, the stop mode that suggests a big hit (so-called double eyes) or the stop mode that suggests reach loss (so-called reach loss) ), the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are stopped and displayed. In this case, the special figure variation effect based on the special figure 1 variation pattern "P22" or "P24" has been executed (see FIG. 28).

On the other hand, in the case of “branch production → joint battle reach”, during the execution of the branch production, a joint battle pre-suggestion cut-in production that suggests advancing to the joint battle reach in advance rather than the execution of the development suggestion production described later is executed. be. After that, during the execution of the branching effect after the execution of the joint fight pre-suggestion cut-in effect, the joint fight development suggesting effect suggesting proceeding to the joint fight ready-to-reach is executed. After that, proceed to the joint fight reach, when the joint fight reach ends and the execution of the special figure fluctuation production ends, the stop mode that suggests a big hit (so-called double eyes) or the stop mode that suggests reach loss (so-called reach loss) ), the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are stopped and displayed. In this case, the special figure variation effect based on the special figure 1 variation pattern "P21" or "P23" was executed (see FIG. 28).

Here, the control when the effect control microcomputer 121 executes the SPSP reach will be described. It should be noted that below, by the microcomputer 101 for game control when it is controlled in the non-time-saving state, according to the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table of the non-time-saving state shown in FIG. Among them, it is assumed that one of the special figure 1 fluctuation patterns is determined.

Of the special figure 1 variation patterns "P21" to "P24", when a variation start command including information on one of the special figure 1 variation patterns is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 121, the production control of the first embodiment The microcomputer 121, in the sub-variation pattern selection process (S4504) of the variation effect start process (S4304), out of the special figure 1 variation patterns "P21" to "P24", based on the information of any special figure 1 variation pattern , to determine the sub-variation pattern. Specifically, the production control microcomputer 121 draws a lottery as to whether or not to execute SPSP reach (joint fight reach, battle reach), and when it is determined to execute SPSP reach (joint fight reach, battle reach), With reference to the sub-variation pattern selection table for SPSP reach shown in FIG. 56, the sub-variation pattern is determined using the sub-variation pattern random number.

For example, if the information included in the transmitted variation start command is a command including the information of the special figure 1 variation pattern "P21", in the sub variation pattern selection process (S4504), the effect control microcomputer 121 is 100% Determine the sub-fluctuation pattern Q1 at a ratio of In this case, when a variable effect start command including information on the sub-variation pattern Q1 is transmitted to the image control board 140, the display unit 50a performs the branch effect after the SP reach, and then the joint fight reach is executed. After passing through the win-lose branch, the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are finally stopped and displayed in a stop mode (so-called double eyes) suggesting a big win.

In addition, when the information included in the transmitted variation start command is a command including the information of the special figure 1 variation pattern "P22", in the sub variation pattern selection process (S4504), the effect control microcomputer 121 is 100% Determine the sub-fluctuation pattern Q2 at a ratio of In this case, when the variable effect start command including the information of the sub-variation pattern Q2 is transmitted to the image control board 140, the battle reach is executed on the display unit 50a through the branch effect after the SP reach. After passing through the win-lose branch, the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are finally stopped and displayed in a stop mode (so-called double eyes) suggesting a big win.

If the information included in the transmitted variation start command is a command including the information of the special figure 1 variation pattern "P23", in the sub variation pattern selection process (S4504), the effect control microcomputer 121 has a ratio of 100% determines the sub-fluctuation pattern Q3. In this case, when the variable effect start command including the information of the sub-variation pattern Q3 is transmitted to the image control board 140, on the display unit 50a, after the SP reach, the joint fight reach is executed through the branch effect. After passing through the winning/losing branch, the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are stopped and displayed in a stop mode (so-called reach-losing eyes) suggesting reach-losing.

If the information included in the transmitted variation start command is a command including the information of the special figure 1 variation pattern "P24", in the sub variation pattern selection process (S4504), the effect control microcomputer 121 has a ratio of 100% determines the sub-fluctuation pattern Q4. In this case, when a variable effect start command including information of the sub-variation pattern Q4 is transmitted to the image control board 140, the battle ready-to-win is executed on the display unit 50a after the SP ready-to-win, through the branch effect. Then, through the win-lose branch, the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are stop-displayed in a stop mode suggesting reach-loss (so-called reach-loss).

Next, with reference to FIG. 57(A), a table showing execution probabilities of pre-battle suggestive cut-in effects will be described. In the announcement effect selection process (S4510), the effect control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment includes information included in the received variation start command, which special figure 1 out of the special figure 1 variation patterns "P01" to "P08" Even if it is a variation pattern, based on the table shown in FIG. 57 (A), during the execution of the special figure variation production based on the special figure 1 variation pattern, the non-execution of the battle pre-suggestion cut-in production is 100%. decide.

In addition, in the announcement effect selection process (S4510), the effect control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment, when the information included in the received variation start command is the special figure 1 variation pattern "P21", ), the non-execution of the battle pre-suggestion cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 100% during the execution of the special figure variation effect based on the special figure 1 variation pattern. In the announcement effect selection process (S4510), the effect control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment, when the information included in the received variation start command is the special figure 1 variation pattern "P22", Based on the table shown, the execution of the battle pre-suggestion cut-in performance is determined at a rate of 100% during the execution of the special figure variation performance based on the special figure 1 variation pattern. In the announcement effect selection process (S4510), the effect control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment, when the information included in the received variation start command is the special figure 1 variation pattern "P23", in FIG. Based on the table shown, non-execution of the battle pre-suggestion cut-in production is determined at a rate of 100% during the execution of the special figure fluctuation production based on the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern. In the announcement effect selection process (S4510), the effect control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment, when the information included in the received variation start command is the special figure 1 variation pattern "P24", Based on the table shown, the execution of the battle pre-suggestion cut-in performance is determined at a rate of 100% during the execution of the special figure variation performance based on the special figure 1 variation pattern. It should be noted that the distribution ratio (selection ratio) of the execution lottery table for the pre-battle suggestive cut-in effect shown in FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 57(B), a table showing execution probabilities of the pre-cooperative fighting suggestion cut-in effect will be described. In the advance notice effect selection process (S4510), the effect control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment includes information included in the received variation start command from the special figure 1 variation pattern "P01" to "P08". Even if it is a variation pattern, based on the table shown in FIG. 57 (B), during the execution of the special figure variation production based on the special figure 1 variation pattern, the non-execution of the joint battle pre-suggestion cut-in production is 100%. decide.

In addition, in the announcement effect selection process (S4510), the effect control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment, when the information included in the received variation start command is the special figure 1 variation pattern "P21", ), the execution of the joint fight pre-suggestion cut-in production is determined at a rate of 100% during the execution of the special figure fluctuation production based on the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern. In the announcement effect selection process (S4510), the effect control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment, when the information included in the received variation start command is the special figure 1 variation pattern "P22", Based on the table shown, non-execution of the joint fight pre-suggestion cut-in production is determined at a rate of 100% during the execution of the special figure fluctuation production based on the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern. In the announcement effect selection process (S4510), the effect control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment, when the information included in the received variation start command is the special figure 1 variation pattern "P23", Based on the table shown, during the execution of the special figure variation performance based on the special figure 1 variation pattern, the execution of the joint battle pre-suggestion cut-in performance is determined at a rate of 100%. In the announcement effect selection process (S4510), the effect control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment, when the information included in the received variation start command is the special figure 1 variation pattern "P24", in FIG. Based on the table shown, non-execution of the joint fight pre-suggestion cut-in production is determined at a rate of 100% during the execution of the special figure fluctuation production based on the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern. It should be noted that the distribution ratio (selection ratio) of the execution lottery table for the cut-in effect suggesting a joint battle prior shown in FIG.

Next, a development suggestive effect, which is a type of advance suggestive effect indicating the development of SPSP ready-to-win, which is executed after the preliminary suggestive cut-in effect is executed during execution of the branch effect, will be described. The development suggestion production includes a battle development suggestion production (low-expectation suggestion production) that shows the development of a battle reach, which is a type of SPSP reach, and a joint struggle development suggestion production that shows the development of a joint struggle reach, which is a type of SPSP reach. (High expectations suggestive production). In addition, super-hot suggestive performance is executed instead of the development suggestive performance indicating the development of SPSP ready-to-win which is executed after the pre-suggestive cut-in performance is executed during execution of the branch performance. Here, the super-hot suggestive effect (specific effect) is a type of advance notice effect that suggests that the expectation of a big hit is much higher than the battle development suggestive effect and the joint struggle development suggestive effect.

First, with reference to FIG. 58(A), the table showing the execution probability of the development suggestive effect during execution of the special figure variation effect will be described. In the notice effect selection process (S4510), the effect control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment includes information included in the received variation start command, which special figure 1 out of the special figure 1 variation patterns "P01" to "P08" Even if it is a variation pattern, based on the table shown in FIG. 58, during the execution of the special figure variation performance based on the special figure 1 variation pattern, non-execution of the development suggestion performance is determined at a rate of 100%.

In addition, in the notice effect selection process (S4510), the effect control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment, when the information included in the received variation start command is the special figure 1 variation pattern "P21", Based on the table shown, the execution of the joint struggle development suggestion production is determined at a rate of 92% during the execution of the special figure fluctuation production based on the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern, and the joint struggle development suggestion production is not executed at a rate of 8%. decide.

In addition, in the announcement effect selection process (S4510), the effect control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment, when the information included in the received variation start command is the special figure 1 variation pattern "P22", Based on the table shown, during the execution of the special figure fluctuation production based on the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern, the execution of the battle development suggestion production is determined at a rate of 91%, and the battle development suggestion production is not executed at a rate of 9%. decide.

In addition, in the notice effect selection process (S4510), the effect control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment, when the information included in the received variation start command is the special figure 1 variation pattern "P23", to FIG. Based on the table shown, the execution of the joint struggle development suggestion production is determined at a rate of 98% during the execution of the special figure fluctuation production based on the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern, and the execution of the joint struggle development suggestion production is decided at a rate of 2%. do.

In addition, in the announcement effect selection process (S4510), the effect control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment, when the information included in the received variation start command is the special figure 1 variation pattern "P24", Based on the table shown, the execution of the battle development suggestion production is determined at a rate of 99% during the execution of the special figure variation production based on the special figure 1 variation pattern, and the execution of the battle development suggestion production is determined at a rate of 1%. do. It should be noted that the allocation ratio (selection ratio) of the execution lottery table for the development suggestive effect shown in FIG.

Subsequently, in the advance notice effect selection process (S4510), the effect control microcomputer 121 determines not to execute the development suggestive effect based on the execution lottery table for the development suggestive effect shown in FIG. Based on the execution lottery table for the super hot suggesting performance shown in (B), execution of the super hot suggesting performance is determined.

In the announcement effect selection process (S4510), the effect control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment includes information included in the received variation start command that is the special figure 1 variation pattern "P21", and the development shown in FIG. When it is determined not to execute the cooperative development suggesting performance based on the suggestion performance execution lottery table, the super hot suggestion performance is executed based on the super hot suggestive performance execution lottery table shown in FIG. 58(B). Determined at a rate of 100%.

In addition, in the advance notice effect selection process (S4510), the effect control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment, the information included in the received variation start command is the special figure 1 variation pattern "P22", and shown in FIG. If it is determined not to execute the joint struggle development suggestive effect based on the development suggestive effect execution lottery table shown in FIG. Execution is determined at a rate of 100%.

In addition, in the notice effect selection process (S4510), the effect control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment, the information included in the received variation start command is the special figure 1 variation pattern "P23", in FIG. When it is determined not to execute the battle development suggestive effect based on the development suggestive effect execution lottery table shown in FIG. Execution is determined at a rate of 100%.

In addition, in the notice effect selection process (S4510), the effect control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment includes information included in the received variation start command that is the special figure 1 variation pattern "P24", and is shown in FIG. When it is determined not to execute the battle development suggestive effect based on the development suggestive effect execution lottery table shown in FIG. Execution is determined at a rate of 100%. It should be noted that the distribution ratio (selection ratio) of the execution lottery for the super hot suggestive effect shown in FIG.

In the explanation of the execution lottery table for the development suggestive effect shown in FIG. 58(A), and in the pachinko game machine PY1 of the first embodiment, the result of the big win determination is a big win when the result of the big win determination is a loss. During execution of the branching effect, the development suggesting effect is more likely to be executed than in the case. On the other hand, from the description of the execution lottery table for the super hot suggestive effect shown in FIG. It is easier to execute the intense heat suggestive effect during execution of the branch effect than when the result is a loss. As a result, in the pachinko game machine PY1 of the first embodiment, if the super hot suggesting effect is executed during execution of the branching effect, the possibility that the result of the big win determination is a big win is very high.

Next, with reference to FIG. 59, the SPSP reach jackpot expectation will be described. It should be noted that the jackpot expectation shown in FIG. 59 is, by the effect control microcomputer 121, shown in FIG. (See FIG. 29 (B)), the distribution rate of the special figure 1 variation pattern selected in the case of "non-time saving state" and "loss with reach" (see FIG. 29 (B)), FIG. 58 (A) 59 are set based on the execution lottery table for the development suggestive effect shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 59, in the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the first embodiment, the expected degree of jackpot is when the battle ready-to-win is executed through the branch effect in which the battle pre-suggestion cut-in effect and the battle development suggestion effect are executed. , is set to about 62%. Further, as shown in FIG. 59, in the pachinko game machine PY1 of the first embodiment, a jackpot expected when a battle reach is executed through a branch effect in which a pre-battle suggestive cut-in effect and a super-hot suggestive effect are executed. degree is set to about 93%. Further, as shown in FIG. 59, in the pachinko game machine PY1 of the first embodiment, a jackpot expected when a joint fight reach is executed through a branch production in which a joint fight pre-suggestion cut-in production and a joint struggle development suggestion production are executed. degree is set to about 79%. As shown in FIG. 59, in the pachinko game machine PY1 of the first embodiment, the expected degree of jackpot when joint fighting ready-to-win is executed through a branching effect in which a joint fighting pre-suggestion cut-in effect and a super hot suggesting effect are executed is , is set to about 94%.

From the explanation using the table showing the SPSP reach jackpot expectation degree shown in FIG. When the in-effect and the battle development suggestive effect are executed (approximately 62%) ⇒ When the joint battle pre-suggestion cut-in effect and the joint battle development suggestive effect are executed in the branch effect when proceeding to the joint battle reach in the special fluctuation effect (approximately 79%) ⇒ when proceeding to battle reach in special figure fluctuation production, when battle pre-suggestion cut-in production and super hot suggestion production are executed in branch production (approximately 93%) ⇒ in special figure fluctuation production In the case of advancing to the joint fight reach, the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher in the order of the case where the joint fight pre-suggestion cut-in production and the intense hot suggestion production are executed in the branch production (about 94%). As a result, in the first embodiment, regardless of whether the player advances to the SPSP reach of either the battle reach or the joint fight reach, the player wins a big hit when the super hot suggestion effect is executed in the branch effect. It is possible to let the player know that the result of the determination is very likely to be a big hit, and enjoy the special figure fluctuation performance with a certain degree of peace of mind.

In addition, in the first embodiment, when proceeding to the battle reach in the special figure fluctuation production, the battle pre-suggestion cut-in production and the super hot suggestion production are executed in the branch production (about 93%, see FIG. 59). , When proceeding to joint fighting reach in the special fluctuation production, when the joint fighting pre-suggestion cut-in production and the super hot suggestion production are executed in the branch production (about 94%, see Fig. 59) The degree of expectation for the jackpot is substantial. It can be said that it is the same as Here, when the jackpot expectations are substantially the same, each jackpot expectation in the case of proceeding to either SPSP reach, out of battle reach or joint fight reach, when the super-hot suggestive effect is executed at the time of the effect branch. is included in the range of 10% before and after. However, when the super hot suggestion effect is executed at the time of the effect branch during the execution of the branch effect, either the battle reach or the joint fight reach, when proceeding to either SPSP reach, each jackpot expectation is in the range of a few percent before and after Preferably. As a result, when proceeding to the battle reach in the special figure fluctuation production, the battle pre-suggestion cut-in production and the intense hot suggestion production are executed in the branch production (about 93%, see FIG. 59), or the special figure fluctuation In the case of proceeding to joint fighting reach in the production, the degree of expectation for the big hit is substantially the same in the case where the cut-in production suggesting joint fighting and the production suggesting super hotness are executed in the branch production (approximately 94%, see Fig. 59). It is possible to make you feel that it is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 60, the execution timing of the pre-battle suggesting cut-in effect and the execution timing of the battle development suggesting effect in the branch effect will be described. When the special figure variation effect based on the special figure 1 variation pattern "P22" or "P24" is executed, as shown in FIG. 60, execution of the branch effect is started in the special figure variation effect. Then, at the end of the branch effect, execution of the pre-battle suggestion cut-in effect is started. At the same time as the execution of the pre-battle suggestion cut-in effect ends, the execution of the battle development suggestion effect is started. After that, at the same time as the execution of the battle development suggestive effect ends in the branch effect, the execution of the branch effect also ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 61, the execution timing of the battle pre-suggestion cut-in effect and the execution timing of the super hot suggestion effect in the branch effect will be described. It should be noted that the super hot suggestive effect shown in FIG. 61 is executed instead of the battle development suggestive effect during execution of the branch effect. When the special figure variation effect based on the special figure 1 variation pattern "P22" or "P24" is executed, as shown in FIG. 61, execution of the branch effect is started in the special figure variation effect. Then, at the end of the branch effect, execution of the pre-battle suggestion cut-in effect is started. Simultaneously with the end of execution of the pre-battle suggestion cut-in effect, execution of the super hot suggestion effect is started. After that, at the same time as the execution of the super hot suggestive effect ends in the branch effect, the execution of the branch effect also ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 62, the execution timing of the joint battle pre-suggestion cut-in effect and the execution timing of the joint battle development suggestion effect in the branch effect will be described. When the special figure variation effect based on the special figure 1 variation pattern "P21" or "P23" is executed, as shown in FIG. 62, execution of the branch effect is started in the special figure variation effect. Then, at the end of the branching effect, the execution of the pre-cooperative battle suggestion cut-in effect is started. At the same time as execution of the joint struggle pre-suggestion cut-in production ends, execution of the joint struggle development suggestion production is started. After that, at the same time as the execution of the joint struggle development suggestive effect ends in the branch effect, the execution of the branch effect also ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 63, the execution timing of the pre-co-op suggesting cut-in effect and the execution timing of the super hot suggesting effect in the branch effect will be described. It should be noted that the super-hot suggestive effect shown in FIG. 63 is executed instead of the united struggle development suggestive effect during execution of the branch effect. When the special figure variation effect based on the special figure 1 variation pattern "P21" or "P23" is executed, as shown in FIG. 63, execution of the branch effect is started in the special figure variation effect. Then, at the end of the branching effect, the execution of the pre-cooperative battle suggestion cut-in effect is started. Simultaneously with the end of the execution of the pre-cooperative fighting suggestion cut-in effect, the execution of the super hot suggestion effect is started. After that, at the same time as the execution of the super hot suggestive effect ends in the branch effect, the execution of the branch effect also ends.

60 to 63 above, in the pachinko game machine PY1 of the first embodiment, the pre-suggestion cut-in effect is executed at the end of the branch effect, so that the player receives a special figure variation effect. It is possible to grasp in advance which one of the battle reach and the joint fight reach will develop into the SPSP reach. Then, at the same time when execution of the pre-suggestive cut-in effect is completed, either of the development suggestive effect or the super hot suggestive effect is executed. As a result, for the player who knows the situation that the special figure fluctuation production will develop into a battle reach instead of a joint fighting reach, at the same time as the execution of the pre-suggestion cut-in production is completed, a big hit is determined at once by the execution of the super hot suggestion production. It is possible to have expectations for the possibility that the result of is a jackpot. On the other hand, for the player who knows the situation that the special figure fluctuation production will develop into a joint fighting reach rather than a battle reach, at the same time as the execution of the pre-suggestion cut-in production ends, the execution of the super hot suggestion production will make the judgment of the big hit. It is possible to reassure the player by making him/her more hopeful with the possibility that the result will be a big win.

Next, using FIG. 64 to FIG. 66, when the branch production is executed when reaching the production branch point of branching to either SPSP reach of the battle reach in the special figure fluctuation production or the joint battle reach will be described. In addition, FIG. 64 to FIG. 66 are production examples of the branch production executed in the special figure fluctuation production based on one of the special figure 1 fluctuation patterns "P21" to "P24". First, in the production example shown in FIG. 64, during execution of the branching production, a pre-battle suggestive cut-in production or a joint-fighting pre-suggestive cut-in production is executed, and a battle development-suggestive production or a joint-fighting development-suggestive production is executed. This is an example of the production in the case of

SP reach exclusive production (for example, battle production) is done during the execution of the special figure fluctuation production (see FIG. 64 (A)). After that, when reaching the production branching point of branching to either SPSP reach out of battle reach or joint fight reach, execution of branch production is started. When the branch effect is started in the special figure variation effect, as shown in FIG. 64(B), a background image showing a state where the line of sight between the horse and the main character and a text image showing "Battle or Co-op?" is displayed on the display section 50a. After that, the example of effect shown in FIG. 64(B) branches to the example of effect shown in FIG. 64(C-1) and the example of effect shown in FIG. 64(C-2).

For example, special figure 1 fluctuation pattern "P22", or if during execution of special figure fluctuation production based on "P24", from the production example shown in FIG. 64 (B) to the production example shown in FIG. 64 (C-1) move on. During the execution of the branching effect, if proceeding to the example of effect shown in FIG. 64(C-1), the pre-battle suggestion cut-in effect is executed. When the battle pre-suggestion cut-in effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 64(C-1), the display unit 50a displays a battle pre-suggestion cut-in effect image ZK1 showing a state in which a confrontation between the horse and the main character takes place. is displayed. When the battle pre-suggestion cut-in effect image ZK1 is displayed on the display unit 50a, before the development suggestion effect is executed, after the execution of the branch effect is completed for the player, either the battle reach or the joint fight reach is performed. , it is possible for the player to understand that the battle reach will develop into a battle reach with a lower expectation for a big win than the joint fight reach.

In the branch effect, when the display of the battle pre-suggestion cut-in effect image ZK1 on the display unit 50a ends, the execution of the battle pre-suggestion cut-in effect ends. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 64(D-1), a battle development suggesting effect is executed in which a battle development suggesting character image IS1 of "battle" is displayed on the display section 50a during execution of the branching effect. By displaying the character image IS1 suggesting the development of the battle on the display unit 50a, the player is shifted to the battle reach or the battle reach with a lower expectation of a big hit than the joint fight reach after the execution of the branch effect is completed. It is possible to grasp more that it develops with. After that, when execution of the branch effect is completed, the process proceeds to the example of effect shown in FIG. 67(A).

For example, special figure 1 fluctuation pattern "P21", or if during execution of special figure fluctuation production based on "P23", from the production example shown in FIG. 64 (B) to the production example shown in FIG. 64 (C-2) will proceed. During execution of the branching effect, if the process proceeds to the example of effect shown in FIG. 64(C-2), a cut-in effect suggesting prior cooperation is executed. When the joint fight pre-suggestion cut-in effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 64(C-2), the display unit 50a displays a pre-co-fight pre-suggestion cut-in effect image ZK2 showing a state in which the horse and the main character hit it off. Is displayed. When the joint battle pre-suggestion cut-in effect image ZK2 is displayed on the display unit 50a, before the execution of the development suggestion effect, after the execution of the branch effect is completed for the player, either the battle reach or the joint fight reach is performed. It is possible for the player to grasp that the battle reach will develop into a joint fight reach with a higher expectation for a big win than the battle reach.

In the branching effect, when the display of the pre-cooperative fighting suggestion cut-in effect image ZK2 on the display unit 50a ends, the execution of the pre-cooperative fighting suggestion cut-in effect ends. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 64(D-2), a joint struggle development suggestion effect is executed in which a joint struggle development suggestion character image IS2 of "joint fight" is displayed on the display unit 50a during execution of the branch effect. By displaying the character image IS2 suggesting the development of the joint struggle of "joint fight" on the display unit 50a, after the execution of the branch effect is completed, the degree of expectation for the big win is higher than that of the battle reach or the joint fight reach. It is possible for the player to understand that the joint fighting reach will develop to a high one. After that, when execution of the branch effect is completed, the process proceeds to the example of effect shown in FIG. 68(A).

Next, an example of a production when a super hot suggestive production is executed instead of a battle development suggestive production during execution of a branch production in a special figure fluctuation production based on the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern "P22" or "P24". will be described with reference to FIG.

SP reach exclusive production (for example, battle production) is done during the execution of the special figure fluctuation production (see FIG. 65 (A)). After that, when reaching the production branching point of branching to either SPSP reach out of battle reach or joint fight reach, the execution of the branch production is started. When the branch effect is started in the special figure variation effect, a branch effect image BA is displayed on the display section 50a as shown in FIG. 65(B).

Then, during the execution of the branch production in the special figure fluctuation production based on the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern "P22" or "P24", when the super hot suggestion production is executed, the production shown in FIG. 65 (B) From the example, the process proceeds to the example of presentation shown in FIG. 65(C). During the execution of the branching effect, if proceeding to the example of effect shown in FIG. 65(C), the pre-battle suggestion cut-in effect is executed. When the battle pre-suggestion cut-in effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 65(C), the display unit 50a displays a battle pre-suggestion cut-in effect image ZK1 showing a state in which a confrontation between the horse and the main character takes place. be done. When the battle pre-suggestion cut-in effect image ZK1 is displayed on the display unit 50a, before the development suggestion effect is executed, after the execution of the branch effect is completed for the player, either the battle reach or the joint fight reach is performed. , it is possible for the player to understand that the battle reach will develop into a battle reach with a lower expectation for a big hit than the joint fight reach.

In the branch effect, when the display of the battle pre-suggestion cut-in effect image ZK1 on the display unit 50a ends, the execution of the battle pre-suggestion cut-in effect ends. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 65(D), instead of the battle development suggestive effect in which the battle development suggestive character image IS1 is displayed during the execution of the branch effect, a super hot suggestive effect image GE indicating "super hot" is displayed. The super hot suggesting effect displayed in the section 50a is executed. By displaying the super-hot suggestive effect image GE on the display unit 50a, it is possible for the player to grasp that the possibility of the big win determination result being a big win is very high. In addition, after the battle pre-suggestion cut-in effect image ZK1 is displayed on the display unit 50a, the super hot suggestion effect image GE is displayed. Since the state in which the big hit cannot be expected is changed to the state in which the big hit can be expected, it is possible to make the special figure fluctuation performance more enjoyable. After that, when execution of the branch effect is completed, the process proceeds to the example of effect shown in FIG. 67(A).

Next, using FIG. 66 for an example of a production when a super hot suggestion production is executed during execution of a branch production in a special figure fluctuation production based on the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern "P21" or "P23" explain.

SP reach exclusive production (for example, battle production) is done during execution of the special figure fluctuation production (see Figure 66 (A)). After that, when reaching the production branching point of branching to either SPSP reach out of battle reach or joint fight reach, the execution of the branch production is started. When the branch effect in the special figure variation effect is started, a branch effect image BA is displayed on the display section 50a as shown in FIG. 66(B).

During the execution of the branch production in the special figure fluctuation production based on the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern "P21" or "P23", when the super hot suggestive production is executed, from the production example shown in FIG. 66 (B) It proceeds to the production example shown in FIG. 66(C). During execution of the branching effect, if proceeding to the example of effect shown in FIG. 66(C), a cut-in effect suggesting prior cooperation is executed. When the joint fight pre-suggestion cut-in effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 66(C), the display unit 50a displays a joint fight pre-suggestion cut-in effect image ZK2 showing a state in which the horse and the main character hit it off. be. When the joint-fight pre-suggestion cut-in effect image ZK2 is displayed on the display unit 50a, before the development-suggestion effect is executed, after the execution of the branch effect is completed for the player, either the battle reach or the joint fight reach is performed. , it is possible for the player to understand that the battle reach will develop into a joint fight reach with a higher expectation for a big win than the battle reach.

In the branching effect, when the display of the pre-cooperative fighting suggestion cut-in effect image ZK2 on the display unit 50a ends, the execution of the pre-cooperative fighting suggestion cut-in effect ends. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 66(D), instead of the united struggle development suggesting character image IS2 displayed during the execution of the branching effect, a super hot suggesting effect image GE indicating "super hot" is displayed. The super-hot suggestive effect displayed in the section 50a is executed. By displaying the super-hot suggestive effect image GE on the display unit 50a, it is possible for the player to grasp that the possibility of the big win determination result being a big win is very high. In addition, after the pre-joint fighting suggestive cut-in effect image ZK2 is displayed on the display unit 50a, the super-hot suggestive effect image GE is displayed, so that the development of the joint fight reach with a higher expectation of a big hit than the battle reach is known. The expectation for the big hit is increased from the state where the expectation for the big win is high, and it is possible to enjoy the special figure fluctuation performance with peace of mind. After that, when execution of the branch effect is completed, the process proceeds to the example of effect shown in FIG. 68(A).

<Battle Reach>
Next, a specific example of battle reach will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 67, in Battle Ready, first, an image or the like indicating that the main character and the enemy character will fight each other is displayed on the display section 50a (see FIG. 67(A)). An image showing that the main character and the enemy character are attacking and defending is displayed on the display unit 50a (not shown), and an image showing that the main character is attacking the enemy character is displayed before the win-lose branch. is displayed on the display unit 50a (see FIG. 67(B)).

If it is a battle reach executed based on the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern "P22", after the production of FIG. A victory image (including an image in which the main character is happy and a background image G80 for success) indicating that the character has won over the enemy character is displayed on the display unit 50a, and the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 indicate the winning of the jackpot. Temporary stop display is made with "double eyes" (see FIG. 67(C)). Then, the background image of the display unit 50a returns to the normal daytime background image G102, and the production symbols EZ1, EZ2, EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, KZ3 are definitely stop-displayed as "double eyes" (FIG. 67). (D)).

On the other hand, if it is a battle reach executed based on the special figure 1 variation pattern "P24", after the production of FIG. A defeat image (including an image in which the main character is sad and a background image for failure G81) indicating that the enemy character has been defeated by countering is displayed on the display section 50a, and the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are lost. Temporary stop display is displayed with "Reach Loss" suggesting that (see FIG. 67(E)). Then, the background image of the display section 50a returns to the normal daytime background image G102, and the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, KZ3 are definitely stop-displayed as the "ready-to-miss" (FIG. 67). (F)).

<Joint Reach>
Next, a specific example of joint fight reach will be described with reference to FIG. In co-fight reach, an image indicating that the main character and the enemy character are about to fight is displayed on the display unit 50a (not shown), and then, as shown in FIG. appears on the display unit 50a as reinforcements. Also, an image indicating that an ally character (horse) who is a companion of the main character has appeared as a reinforcement in the joint fight reach is displayed on the display section 50a. After that, an image in which the main character and the ally character cooperate to battle the enemy character is displayed on the display section 50a (not shown), and furthermore, the main character and the ally character both attack the enemy character. The image is displayed on the display section 50a (see FIG. 68(B)).

If it is a joint fight reach executed based on the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern "P21", after the production of FIG. A victory image (including an image in which the main character is happy and a background image for success G80) indicating that the character has won over the enemy character is displayed on the display unit 50a, and the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 indicate the winning of the jackpot. Temporary stop display is made with "double eyes" (see FIG. 68(C)). Then, the background image of the display section 50a returns to the normal daytime background image G102, and the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, KZ3 are definitely stop-displayed as "double eyes" (FIG. 68). (D)).

On the other hand, if it is a joint fighting reach executed based on the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern "P23", after the production of FIG. A defeat image (including an image in which the main character is sad and a background image for failure G81) indicating that the enemy character has been defeated by countering is displayed on the display section 50a, and the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are lost. Temporary stop display is displayed with "Reach Loss" suggesting (see FIG. 68(E)). Then, the background image of the display unit 50a returns to the normal daytime background image G102, and the production symbols EZ1, EZ2, EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, KZ3 are definitely stop-displayed as the "reach-losing" (FIG. 68). (F)).

8. Control of Effect by Effect Control Microcomputer 121 of First Embodiment Next, control of effect by the effect control microcomputer 121 of the present embodiment (first embodiment) will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71 .

[1. Receive command analysis processing]
First, the received command analysis processing (S4105) of this embodiment will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 69, in the received command analysis process (S4105), first, the effect control microcomputer 121 received the starting winning command (first starting winning command or second starting winning command) from the main control board 100 It is determined whether or not (S4301), and if it has been received, the later-described start winning process (S4302) is performed.

Subsequently, the production control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the fluctuation start command (special figure 1 fluctuation start command or special figure 2 fluctuation start command) is received from the main control board 100 (S4303), For example, a variation production start process, which will be described later, is performed (S4304).

Subsequently, the production control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not a special figure fluctuation stop command is received from the main control board 100 (S4305), and if received, performs fluctuation production end processing (S4306). In the fluctuation production end processing (S4306), the production control microcomputer 121 terminates the special figure fluctuation production (stops the fluctuation display of the production patterns EZ1 to EZ3 and the small patterns KZ1 to KZ3, and performs stop display).

Production control microcomputer 121 analyzes the special figure fluctuation stop command in the fluctuation production end processing (S4306), and appropriately ends the special figure fluctuation production based on the analysis result (production patterns EZ1 to EZ3 and small patterns Set the special figure fluctuation production end command for stopping the fluctuation display of KZ1 to KZ3 to the output buffer of the RAM 124 for production. When the image control board 140 receives the special figure variation effect end command, it ends the special figure variation effect being executed (stops the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 being changed).

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not an opening command is received from the main control board 100 (S4307), and if received, performs an opening effect selection process (S4308). In the opening effect selection process (S4308), the opening command is analyzed, and based on the analysis result, the pattern (contents) of the opening effect to be executed during the opening of the jackpot game is selected. Then, an opening performance start command for starting the opening performance with the selected opening performance pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM 124 for performance.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not a round game command is received from the main control board 100 (S4309), and if received, performs a round effect selection process (S4310). In the round effect selection process (S4310), the round game command is analyzed, and based on the analysis result, the pattern (contents) of the round effect to be executed during the round game of the jackpot game is selected. Then, a round effect start command for starting the round effect in the selected round effect pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM 124 for effect.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not an ending command is received from the main control board 100 (S4311), and if received, performs an ending effect selection process (S4312). In the ending effect selection process (S4312), the effect control microcomputer 121 analyzes the ending command, and selects the pattern (contents) of the jackpot ending effect to be executed during the ending of the jackpot game based on the analysis result. Then, a big win ending effect start command for starting the ending effect in the selected big win ending effect pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM 124 for effect.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs other processes (S4313) based on received commands other than the above commands (for example, processes for performing effects associated with variable display of normal symbols). Then, the received command analysis processing (S4105) ends.

[2. Start Winning Process]
First, in the starting prize winning process (S4302) of the first embodiment, first, as shown in FIG. 70, the effect control microcomputer 121 stores the starting prize winning command reserve storage section of the effect RAM 124 (S4401). Specifically, if the received command is the first start prize winning command, it is stored in the first start prize winning command reserve storage unit, and if the received command is the second start prize winning command, the second start prize winning command reserve storage unit is stored. memorize to Note that the starting winning command is stored in the lowest numbered storage area in which the command is not stored among the first to fourth storage areas in each starting winning command reserve storage section. Thereby, the start winning command is stored in the order corresponding to the storage order of the special figure reservation.

After step S4401, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets the value of the first special figure pending effect counter provided in the effect RAM 124 to "1" if the starting winning command stored in step S4401 is the first starting winning command. Add and update, and if it is the second start winning command, add "1" to the value of the second special figure reservation effect counter provided in the effect RAM 124 and update (S4402). In addition, the first special figure reservation effect counter is a counter on the effect control side (sub control board 120 side) for calculating the number of first special figure reservations. Similarly, the 2nd special figure reservation production counter is the counter of the production control side which calculates the number of the 2nd special figure reservation.

After step S4402, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs pre-reading determination including whether or not the jackpot is won based on the start winning command stored in step S4403 and the table shown in FIG. 30 (S4403). In the look-ahead determination, in addition to the propriety of the big hit, the length of the fluctuation time, the presence or absence of reach, etc. are determined.

After step S4403, in step S4404, the effect control microcomputer 121, based on the result of the prefetch determination in step S4403, the information included in the start winning command stored in step S4401, and the table shown in FIG. A prefetch scenario pattern is selected using a prefetch scenario pattern selection random number from "0" to "99" (see FIG. 33). The data of the pre-reading scenario pattern selected by the effect control microcomputer 121 is stored in the pre-reading scenario pattern storage section of the effect RAM 124 .

Subsequently, in step S4404, the effect control microcomputer 121 displays the pending icon HA corresponding to the selected prefetch scenario pattern on the display unit 50a (S4405), and proceeds to step S4406.

Subsequently, in step S4406, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not to execute another look-ahead effect. When the effect control microcomputer 121 determines to execute another prefetch effect (YES in S4406), it determines execution of another prefetch effect indicating the degree of expectation for a big hit (S4407), and sends a prefetch start command to the effect RAM 124. is set in the output buffer of (S4408). Note that other look-ahead effects include a pending icon change effect that changes the display mode of the pending icon HA, a continuous advance notice effect that is performed over a plurality of consecutive variable displays of special symbols, and the like.

When the pre-reading effect start command set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 outputs a predetermined effect from the image ROM 142. The image is read out, and the display section 50a of the image display device 50 performs a look-ahead effect using the image. In addition, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs voice control according to the content of the prefetch effect indicated by the prefetch effect start command transmitted to the image control board 140 while the image control board 140 is performing the prefetch effect. Sound is output from the speaker 52 through the circuit 161 (performs the prefetching effect by the sound), and the frame lamp 53 is emitted through the lamp control circuit 151 (performs the prefetching effect by light emission), and the board is movable. It is possible to operate the body 55k and the under-board movable body 56k (execute the look-ahead effect by motion).

[3. Fluctuation production start processing]
As shown in FIG. 71, in the fluctuation production start process (S4304) of the first embodiment, the production control microcomputer 121 first analyzes the fluctuation start command (S4501). The variation start command includes information on variation patterns (FIGS. 11, 12, and 28) and information on special figure stop design data based on determination of a big hit or the like.

Subsequently, the production control microcomputer 121, if the information included in the fluctuation start command analyzed in step S4501 is a special figure 1 fluctuation start command, subtracts "1" from the value of the first special figure reservation production counter, special figure If it is a 2 fluctuation start command, "1" is subtracted from the value of the second special figure pending effect counter. Then, the effect control microcomputer 121 shifts the data stored in the start winning command reserve storage unit (first start win prize command reserve storage unit, second start win prize command reserve storage unit) (S4502). Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 121 shifts the pending icon HA (S4503).

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 121, in step S4504, based on the information included in the fluctuation start command analyzed in step S4501 and the table shown in FIG. A random number is used to select the scenario pattern for the icon TA. The scenario pattern data selected by the effect control microcomputer 121 is stored in the scenario pattern storage section of the effect RAM 124 .

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 121 selects the effect symbol EZ to be finally stopped and displayed in the special figure fluctuation effect (S4505). Specifically, along with obtaining a random number for determining the production pattern, one table is selected based on the analysis result of the fluctuation start command from among a plurality of tables classified according to the presence or absence of reach, and the selection A performance symbol is selected by determining the acquired performance symbol determination random number using the table. As a result, a combination (for example, "7, 7, 7", etc.) of the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 to be finally stopped and displayed is determined. Incidentally, the production control microcomputer 121 is also performing selection of the small symbol KZ to be finally stopped and displayed in the special figure fluctuation production in the fluctuation production start process (S4304). Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 121 acquires a small symbol determination random number, selects one table based on the analysis result of the fluctuation start command, and uses the selected table to obtain the acquired small symbol. A small pattern is selected by judging the random number for design determination. As a result, the combination of the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 that are finally stopped and displayed (for example, "7.7.7") is determined.

Subsequently, in the sub-variation pattern selection process (S4506), the effect control microcomputer 121 is based on the special figure variation pattern indicated by the set effect mode and the variation start command, and the effect contents of the special figure variation effect are associated. Select a sub-variation pattern determination table for performing sub-variation pattern determination to determine the sub-variation pattern obtained. A plurality of sub-variation pattern determination tables are provided in association with the production mode and the special figure variation pattern. Therefore, the production control microcomputer 121 selects one sub-variation pattern determination table associated with the special figure variation pattern. In each sub-variation pattern determination table, a random number value for sub-variation pattern determination (sub-variation pattern determination value) is distributed to one or more sub-variation patterns so as to have a predetermined allocation rate (%). . Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 121 acquires the value indicated by the sub-variation pattern determination random number counter as a sub-variation pattern determination random number, and performs sub-variation pattern determination based on the acquired sub-variation pattern determination random number. In addition, the sub-variation pattern determination random number takes a value in the range from "0" to "99".

Production control microcomputer 121, in the sub-fluctuation pattern determination, to the selected sub-fluctuation pattern table, collate the acquired sub-fluctuation pattern determination random number, determine the sub-fluctuation pattern, data representing the determined sub-fluctuation pattern It is set in the RAM 124 for presentation. In addition, if the special figure fluctuation production pattern is decided, the time of the fluctuation production, the fluctuation display mode of the production pattern, the presence or absence of the reach production, the contents of the reach production, the presence or absence of the operation production, the contents of the operation production, the production development configuration, the background of the production pattern The details of the contents of the special figure fluctuation production consisting of the type etc. will be decided.

In the sub-fluctuation pattern selection process (S4506), the production control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment, for example, the set production mode is the normal production mode, and the special figure fluctuation pattern indicated by the fluctuation start command is If it is one of the special figure 1 variation patterns "P21" to "P24", based on the selected SPSP reach sub-variation pattern selection table shown in FIG. 56, sub-variation patterns "Q1" to "Q4 , and data representing the determined sub-variation pattern is set in the effect RAM 124 .

Subsequently, in the first icon change effect selection process (S4507), the effect control microcomputer 121 is based on the special figure fluctuation pattern indicated by the change start command and the execution lottery table for the first icon change effect shown in FIG. , the random number for the first icon change effect execution lottery is used to determine whether or not to execute the first icon change effect. In the first icon change effect selection process (S4508), when the effect control microcomputer 121 determines to execute the first icon change effect, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs the first icon change effect based on the effect mode selection table for the first icon change effect shown in FIG. , the first icon change effect mode lottery random number is used to select the first effect mode of the first icon change effect or the second effect mode of the first icon change effect as the effect mode of the first icon change effect. . Thus, when the first icon change effect of the first effect mode is selected, the content of the first icon change effect of the first effect mode (execution timing of the first icon change effect of the first effect mode and the first effect mode) execution timing of the movable body effect and display timing of the movable body image KG1 on the first board (see FIG. 40), display of the first change trigger image IH1, display of the movable body image KG1 on the first board, and the first effect mode. Execution of movable body effect) is determined. Further, when the first icon change effect of the second effect mode is selected, the content of the first icon change effect of the second effect mode (execution timing of the first icon change effect of the second effect mode and the execution timing of the second effect mode) Execution timing of the movable body effect and display timing of the movable body image KG2 on the second board (see FIG. 41), display of the second change trigger image IH2, display of the movable body image KG2 on the second board, and movement in the second effect mode. execution of physical performance, etc.) is determined.

Subsequently, in the second icon change effect selection process (S4508), the effect control microcomputer 121 is based on the special figure fluctuation pattern indicated by the change start command and the second icon change effect execution lottery table shown in FIG. , random numbers for the second icon change effect execution lottery of "0" to "99" are used to determine whether or not to execute the second icon change effect. Thereby, the contents of the second icon change effect (execution timing of the second icon change effect (see FIG. 51), display of the first icon change trigger image HE1, etc.) are determined.

Subsequently, in the third icon change effect selection process (S4509), the effect control microcomputer 121 is based on the special figure variation pattern indicated by the variation start command and the execution lottery table for the third icon change effect shown in FIG. , '0' to '99' for executing the third icon change effect execution lottery is used to determine whether or not to execute the third icon change effect. Thereby, the contents of the third icon change effect (execution timing of the third icon change effect (see FIG. 51), display of the second icon change trigger image HE2, etc.) are determined.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 121 selects a notice effect (S4510). Specifically, a random number for determining the advance notice effect is obtained, and one table is selected based on the analysis result of the fluctuation start command from among a plurality of tables classified according to the presence or absence of reach, and the selection A notice effect is selected by determining the obtained random number for deciding the notice effect using the obtained table. As a result, the content of the notice effect such as a so-called step-up notice effect or a chance-up notice effect is determined.

As an example of the notice effect, a dialogue notice in a gold frame that indicates that the expectation for winning a jackpot (jackpot expectation) is high, a dialogue notice in a green frame that indicates that the jackpot expectation is medium, and a jackpot Examples include dialogue notices in blue frames that indicate that expectations are lower than these. In other words, the advance notice effect is a effect that indicates the player's expectation of winning before the final notification of winning or losing by means of the effect symbol EZ.

In step S4510, the production control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment, when the set production mode is the normal production mode, the special figure fluctuation pattern indicated by the fluctuation start command is the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern "P21 to "P24", based on the execution lottery table for the battle pre-suggestion cut-in effect shown in FIG. A random number for a performance execution lottery is used to draw a lottery for execution of a battle pre-suggestion cut-in performance. As a result, when the execution of the battle pre-suggestion cut-in effect is determined, the content of the battle pre-suggestion cut-in effect (execution timing of the battle pre-suggestion cut-in effect (see FIGS. 60 and 61), the battle pre-suggestion cut-in effect display of image ZK1, etc.) is determined.

In addition, in step S4510, the production control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment, when the set production mode is the normal production mode, the special figure fluctuation pattern indicated by the fluctuation start command is the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern. If it is any one of "P21" to "P24", based on the execution lottery table for the joint fight pre-suggestion cut-in effect shown in FIG. A random number for cut-in performance execution lottery is used to draw a lottery for execution of a cut-in performance suggesting prior cooperation. As a result, when execution of the joint battle pre-suggestion cut-in effect is determined, the details of the joint battle pre-suggestion cut-in effect (execution timing of the joint battle pre-suggestion cut-in effect (see FIGS. 62 and 63), the joint battle pre-suggestion cut-in effect display of image ZK2, etc.) is determined.

Subsequently, in step S4510, the production control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment, when the set production mode is the normal production mode, the special figure fluctuation pattern indicated by the fluctuation start command is the special figure 1 fluctuation. In the case of any of the patterns "P01" to "P08" and "P21" to "P24", "0" to " 99", a lottery is drawn to determine any one of the battle development suggesting performance, the cooperative struggle development suggesting performance, or the non-execution of the development suggesting performance. Thus, when execution of the battle development suggestion effect is determined, the content of the battle development suggestion effect (execution timing of the battle development suggestion effect (see FIG. 60), display of the battle development suggestion character image IS1, etc.) is determined. Further, when execution of the joint struggle development suggestion performance is determined, the details of the joint struggle development suggestion performance (execution timing of the joint struggle development suggestion performance (see FIG. 62), display of the joint struggle development suggestion character image IS2, etc.) are determined.

Subsequently, in step S4510, the production control microcomputer 121 of the first embodiment, when the set production mode is the normal production mode, the special figure fluctuation pattern indicated by the fluctuation start command is the special figure 1 fluctuation. In the case of any of the patterns "P21" to "P24", when it is determined that the development suggestive effect is not to be executed, based on the execution lottery table of the super hot suggestive effect shown in FIG. 58(B). Then, a lottery is made to determine execution of the super-hot suggestive performance or non-execution of the super-hot suggestive performance by using a random number for execution of the hot-hot suggestive performance lottery of '0' to '99'. When execution of the super-hot suggestive effect is determined, the content of the super-hot suggestive effect (execution timing of the super-hot suggestive effect (see FIGS. 61 and 63), display of the super-hot suggestive effect image GE, etc.) is determined. .

Following S4510, the production control microcomputer 121 selects the selected production pattern, the special figure fluctuation production pattern, and the advance notice production (for example, the first icon change production in the first production mode (see FIGS. 42 to 45), the second production Aspect first icon change effect (see FIGS. 46 to 48), second icon change effect, third icon change effect, pre-battle suggestive cut-in effect (see FIG. 57A), pre-cooperative battle suggestive cut-in effect ( (See FIG. 57 (B)), based on the development suggestion production (battle development suggestion production, joint struggle development suggestion production, intense hot suggestion production, see FIG. 58))), produces a variable production start command for starting the fluctuation production. The data is set in the output buffer of the RAM 124 for use (S4511), and the process ends. When the variable effect start command set in S4511 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the special symbol variable effect synchronized with the variable display of the special symbol is started on the display unit 50a.

In addition, in addition to the special figure fluctuation production by the image performed by the image display device 50, the special figure fluctuation production start command includes the special figure fluctuation production by the sound output from the speaker 52, the special figure by the light emission performed by the frame lamp 53 The contents of the effect of the figure variation effect and the effect contents of the special figure variation effect by the action performed by the on-board movable body 55k and the lower-board movable body 56k are included.

In addition, the production control microcomputer 121, while the special figure fluctuation production by the image performed by the image control board 140 is being performed, the special figure fluctuation production contents indicated by the special figure fluctuation production start command transmitted to the image control board 140 In response, output the sound from the speaker 52 through the voice control circuit 161 (execute the special figure fluctuation effect by the sound), and emit light the frame lamp 53 through the lamp control circuit 151 (special figure by light emission (Performs a variation effect), and activates the on-board movable body 55k and the lower-board movable body 56k (performs a special figure variation effect by action).

9. Effect of Embodiment As described above in detail, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the first embodiment, a change suggestion display mode indicating that the second icon change effect is executed during execution of the special figure variation effect is changed from the icon TA5 of the icon TA5 to the icon of the development suggestive display mode indicating the development to the SPSP reach. As a result, after the icon TA5 in the change suggestive display mode makes the player understand that the second icon change effect will be executed, the icon in the changed development suggestive display mode prompts the player to reach SPSP. It is possible to grasp that it will be developed. Therefore, depending on the display mode of the icon, it is possible to make the player grasp the development of the special figure variation effect in advance and entertain the player.

Further, according to the pachinko game machine PY1 of the first embodiment, in the second icon change effect, after the icon TA5 in the change suggestive display mode is changed to the icon in the development suggestive display mode, the special figure change effect is performed. It is possible to develop either SPSP reach from battle reach or joint fight reach. As a result, the icon TA5 in the change suggesting display mode is changed to the icon in the development suggesting display mode, so that the player's emotion can be enhanced in the development to the SPSP reach in the special figure fluctuation effect, and the game is played. It is possible to improve interest.

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the first embodiment, in the second icon change effect, the icon in the development suggestive display mode displayed on the display unit 50a (the icon TA6 in the battle development suggestive display mode, the When the icon TA7) in the development suggestion display mode is executed with N reach during execution of the special figure fluctuation effect, the icon TA in the expectation level display mode (second expectation level display mode, third expectation level display mode) is changed to As a result, it is possible to entertain the player by allowing the player to grasp the development of the special figure variation effect and the degree of expectation for the big win, depending on the display mode of the icon TA.

Further, according to the pachinko machine PY1 of the first embodiment, when N-reach is executed during execution of the special figure variation effect, the icon in the development suggestion display mode (battle development suggestion The icon TA6 of the display mode and the icon TA7 of the joint struggle development suggestion display mode are the icon TA3 of the second expectation level display mode or the icon TA4 of the third expectation level display mode. It is possible to draw attention to whether the icon TA is changed. This makes it possible to make the change from the development suggestion display mode to the expectation level display mode more enjoyable.

Further, according to the pachinko game machine PY1 of the first embodiment, the icon TA3 in the second expectation level display mode and the icon TA4 in the third expectation level display mode have the same round shape, but the second expectation level The color of the icon TA3 in the display mode is different from that of the icon TA4 in the third expectation level display mode. Accordingly, at a glance of the icon TA3 in the second expectation level display mode and the icon TA4 in the third expectation level display mode displayed on the display unit 50a, it is possible to determine which level of expectation display the icon in the development suggestion display mode is. It is possible to make it easy to determine whether the icon of the mode has been changed.

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the first embodiment, when a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) elapses after the execution of N reach is started during the execution of the special figure fluctuation effect, it is displayed on the display unit 50a The icon of the development suggestion display mode is changed to the icon TA3 of the second expectation level display mode or the icon TA4 of the third expectation level display mode. As a result, when the icon in the development suggestive display mode is displayed, it is executed after a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) has elapsed since the execution of N reach was started during the execution of the special figure fluctuation effect. It is possible to entertain the third icon change effect.

Further, according to the pachinko game machine PY1 of the first embodiment, when the first icon change effect in which the on-board movable body 55k is moved is executed, the icon TA1 in the normal display mode changes to the first expectation level display mode. , the icon TA3 in the second expectation level display mode, or the icon TA4 in the third expectation level display mode. As a result, when the first icon change effect in which the on-board movable body 55k is moved is executed, the icon TA1 in the normal display mode is changed to the icon TA2 in the first expectation level display mode, and the icon TA2 in the second expectation level display mode. It is possible to make the user pay attention to which of the icon TA3 and the icon TA4 in the third degree of expectation display mode will be changed to the corresponding icon TA in the degree of expectation display mode. Therefore, the on-board movable body 55k is moved, and the change in the display mode of the icon TA makes it possible to entertain the player by giving them a sense of anticipation for a big win.

Further, according to the pachinko game machine PY1 of the first embodiment, when the movable body effect of the first effect mode is executed in the first icon change effect of the first effect mode, the icon TA1 of the normal display mode is changed to the first icon change effect of the first effect mode. The icon TA is changed to one of the icon TA2 in the expectation level display mode, the icon TA3 in the second expectation level display mode, or the icon TA4 in the third expectation level display mode. On the other hand, in the first icon change effect of the second effect mode, when the movable body effect of the second effect mode is executed, the icon TA1 of the normal display mode changes to the icon TA3 of the second degree of expectation display mode or the third The icon is changed to the icon TA4 in the degree-of-expectation display mode. As a result, it is possible to amuse the player by making him or her expect to see which icon TA in which degree of expectation display mode will be changed by the movement of the on-board movable body 55k in the first icon change effect. .

Further, according to the pachinko game machine PY1 of the first embodiment, in the first icon change effect, the movable body effect of the first effect mode, or the second effect with a higher expectation of big hit than the movable body effect of the first effect mode. After making the player pay attention to whether or not the movable body effect of the effect mode is executed, it is possible to make the user pay attention to the degree of expectation display mode when the display mode of the icon TA changes from the normal display mode. As a result, it is possible to predict whether or not the player will win a big win, depending on the presentation mode of the movable body presentation executed in the first icon change presentation and the display mode of the icon TA, thereby making the game enjoyable.

Further, according to the pachinko game machine PY1 of the first embodiment, when the movable body effect is executed, the icon TA in the normal display mode is moved from the icon display area 50e to the icon change area 50h. Then, the icon TA1 in the normal display mode displayed in the icon change area 50h is the icon TA2 in the first expectation level display mode, the icon TA3 in the second expectation level display mode, or the icon TA3 in the third expectation level display mode. The icon TA4 is changed to one of the icons TA. As a result, it becomes easier for the player to pay attention to the change in the display mode of the icon TA moved to the icon change area 50h, and the player can be visually entertained.

Further, according to the pachinko game machine PY1 of the first embodiment, when the movable body effect is executed, the on-board movable body image KG (the first on-board movable body image KG) simulating the on-board movable body 55k is displayed on the display unit 50a. KG1 and the image KG2 of the movable body on the second board are displayed. While the board movable body image KG is being displayed on the display unit 50a, the icon TA1 in the normal display mode, the icon TA2 in the first expectation level display mode, the icon TA3 in the second expectation level display mode, or the third expectation level display mode. The icon TA is changed to any one of the icons TA4 in the degree display mode. As a result, the movable body image KG (the first movable body image KG1 and the second movable body image KG2) displayed on the display unit 50a is displayed in the normal display mode. It is possible to give an impression that the change of the icon TA1 is related. Therefore, in the first icon change effect, the display mode of the icon TA is changed by the on-board movable body 55k and the on-board movable body image KG (the first on-board movable body image KG1 and the second on-board movable body image KG2). It is possible to visually entertain the player more until the change is made.

Further, according to the pachinko game machine PY1 of the first embodiment, the production branch point indicating either the battle mode in which the main character and the horse character battle in the special figure variation performance, or the joint fighting mode in which the main character and the horse character fight together. When the battle development suggestive effect is executed in the branch effect executed in , then it proceeds to the battle reach. On the other hand, a joint fighting development suggesting production is performed in a branching production that is executed at the time of production branching showing either a battle mode in which the main character and the horse character battle in the special figure fluctuation production, or a joint fighting mode in which the main character and the horse character fight together. When executed, it will advance to joint struggle reach. As a result, it is possible to grasp which SPSP reach is to be advanced in the special figure fluctuation performance by the battle development suggesting performance or the joint battle development suggesting performance executed at the time of performance branching during execution of the branch performance. Therefore, by making the player interested in the development-suggesting effect in the branch effect at the time of the effect branching, it is possible to excite and entertain the player.

Further, according to the pachinko game machine PY1 of the first embodiment, during the execution of the branching effect, the super-hot suggestive effect is executed instead of the battle development suggesting effect, and the branching effect is being executed when proceeding to the battle reach. The joint struggle development suggesting production is executed at the beginning, and the expectation for the big hit is higher than in the case of proceeding to the joint struggle reach (see FIG. 59). As a result, even when proceeding to battle reach, it is possible to expect the execution of the super hot suggestive effect instead of the battle development suggestive effect at the time of the effect branch. Therefore, at the time of the production branch, by making them interested in whether any of the battle development suggestion production, joint struggle development suggestion production, or intense hot suggestion production is executed, the special figure fluctuation production is enjoyed. becomes possible.

Further, according to the pachinko game machine PY1 of the first embodiment, during execution of the branching effect, the super-hot suggestive effect is executed instead of the joint struggle development suggesting effect, and the branching effect is being executed when proceeding to the joint battle reach. The joint struggle development suggesting production is executed at the beginning, and the expectation for the big hit is higher than in the case of proceeding to the joint struggle reach (see FIG. 59). As a result, when the super-hot suggestion production is executed at the time of the production branch and progresses to the joint struggle reach, expectations can be given by being a bigger hit than when the joint struggle development suggestion production is executed and progressed to the joint struggle reach. It becomes possible. Therefore, when the super hot suggestion production is executed at the time of production branching and progresses to joint fighting reach, it is possible to enjoy the special figure fluctuation production with peace of mind.

Further, according to the pachinko game machine PY1 of the first embodiment, in either case of progressing to the SPSP reach out of the battle reach or the joint fight reach, the jackpot in the case where the super-hot suggestive effect is executed during execution of the branch effect Expectations are about 93% and about 94%. As a result, the degree of expectation for a big win is substantially the same in the case of progressing to either the SPSP reach out of the battle reach or the joint fight reach when the super hot suggesting effect is executed at the point of effect branching. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to remarkably increase the expectation for a big win when the super-hot suggestion performance is executed at the time of the performance branch during the execution of the branch performance. Therefore, at the time of the performance branching during the execution of the branching performance, the player is made to pay attention to which of the battle development suggesting performance, the cooperative fighting development suggesting performance, or the super hot suggesting performance is executed, and the player's heart is thrilled. becomes possible.

Further, according to the pachinko game machine PY1 of the first embodiment, before the development suggestive effect is executed at the time of the effect branching, the battle pre-suggestion cut-in effect suggesting progress to the battle reach or the progress to the joint fight reach. A joint fight pre-suggestion cut-in effect that suggests is executed. As a result, before the development suggestion production is executed at the time of the production branch, the battle development suggestion production, the joint fight, are grasped in advance, either the battle reach or the joint struggle reach. It is possible to entertain which of the development suggestive effect or the super-hot suggestive effect is to be executed.

10. Modification Next, a modification of the pachinko game machine PY1 of the first embodiment will be described. In the description of the modified example, the same reference numerals are given to the same configurations as those of the pachinko game machine PY1 of the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted. Of course, the configurations according to the modified examples may be combined as appropriate. In addition, technical features in the above-described first embodiment and modifications below can be deleted as appropriate if they are not described as essential in this specification.

In the first embodiment, winning of a game ball to the first starting port 11 and winning of a game ball to the second starting port 12 correspond to the "predetermined condition", but it is not limited to this. For example, another starting port different from the first starting port 11 and the second starting port 12 may be provided, and winning of a game ball to the other starting port may correspond to the "predetermined condition". It should be noted that the winning of a game ball to another starting port may trigger a lottery for special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) (big hit lottery, ie acquisition and determination of a big hit random number, etc.).

Although the jackpot game of the first embodiment corresponds to the "special game state", it is not limited to this. The jackpot game and other game states may correspond to the "special game state". Also, a jackpot game or another game state may correspond to the "special game state". Here, the other game state may be any one of a high-probability high-base game state, a high-probability low-base game state, or a low-probability high-base game state. Further, the other game state may be two game states out of a high-probability high-base game state, a high-probability low-base game state, or a low-probability high-base game state. In addition, other game states may be a high-probability high-base game state, a high-probability low-base game state, and a low-probability high-base game state.

The battle reach and the joint fight reach of the first embodiment corresponded to the "suggestion effect". However, it is not limited to this. For example, if it is an effect that suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit, a specific effect image displayed on the display unit 50a of the image display device 50, a specific sound output from the speaker 52, a frame lamp 53 or a board lamp 54 may be illuminated in a specific lighting mode, pending icon notices, cut-in notices, step-up notices, notices using effect images, and the like may correspond to the "suggestive effects" of the present invention.

The pending icon HA and the icon TA in the first embodiment correspond to the "predetermined icon". However, it is not limited to this. For example, the pending icon HA or the icon TA may correspond to the "predetermined icon".

In the first embodiment, the icon TA5 in the change suggesting display mode is changed to the icon TA6 in the battle development suggesting display mode or the icon TA7 in the joint struggle development suggesting display mode. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the icon TA other than the icon TA5 of the change suggesting display mode may be changed to the icon TA6 of the battle development suggesting display mode or the icon TA7 of the joint struggle development suggesting display mode. The icons TA other than the icon TA5 in the change suggestion display mode include the icon TA1 in the normal display mode, the icon TA2 in the first expectation level display mode, the icon TA3 in the second expectation level display mode, and the icon TA3 in the second expectation level display mode. The icon TA4 in the 3-expectation degree display mode may be used.

In the second icon change effect of the first embodiment, the first icon change trigger image HE1 is displayed on the display section 50a. However, it is not limited to this. For example, if the second icon change effect is different from the third icon change effect in which the second icon change trigger image HE2 is displayed, what kind of effect image is displayed on the display unit 50a and the board lamp 54 is displayed. It may be an advance notice effect such as lighting in a specific lighting mode.

The icon TA5 in the change suggestive display mode of the first embodiment is composed of a character image of "preparing" and a triangular effect image. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the icon TA may be of any display form as long as the icon TA is of a display form indicating that the second icon change effect is to be executed.

The icon TA6 in the battle development suggestive display mode of the first embodiment is composed of a character image of "battle" and a triangular effect image. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the icon TA may be of any display mode as long as it is the icon TA of the display mode indicating that the battle reach is progressed during execution of the special figure variation effect.

The icon TA7 in the joint struggle development suggestive display mode of the first embodiment is composed of a text image of "joint struggle" and a triangular effect image. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the icon TA may be of any display mode as long as it is the icon TA of the display mode indicating progressing to the joint fighting reach during execution of the special figure fluctuation effect.

The icon TA5 in the change suggestive display mode of the first embodiment is the icon TA indicating that the second icon change effect is to be executed. However, it is not limited to this. For example, even if the icon TA5 in the change suggestive display mode is the icon TA suggesting that the second icon change effect will be executed, that is, the icon TA indicating the possibility that the second icon change effect will be executed. good.

The icon TA6 of the battle development suggestive display mode of the first embodiment is the icon TA of the display mode indicating that the battle reaches the battle reach during execution of the special figure variation effect. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the icon TA6 of the battle development suggestive display mode suggests that the battle reach is progressed during execution of the special figure fluctuation production, that is, it indicates that there is a possibility of progressing to the battle reach during the execution of the special figure fluctuation production. It may be the icon TA.

The icon TA7 in the joint struggle development suggestive display mode of the first embodiment is the icon TA in the display mode indicating that the joint fight reach is advanced during execution of the special figure variation effect. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the icon TA7 in the joint struggle development suggestive display mode suggests that the joint struggle reach will be advanced during execution of the special figure fluctuation production, that is, it indicates that there is a possibility that the joint struggle reach will be advanced during the execution of the special figure fluctuation production. It may be the icon TA.

In the first embodiment, the icon TA5 in the change suggesting display mode is changed to the icon TA6 in the battle development suggesting display mode, and then the icon TA6 in the battle development suggesting display mode is changed to the icon TA in the expectation level display mode (first After being changed to the icon TA3 in the 2nd degree of expectation display mode and the icon TA4 in the 3rd degree of expectation display mode, the battle reach progressed. However, it is not limited to this. For example, after the icon TA5 of the change suggesting display mode is changed to the icon TA6 of the battle development suggesting display mode during the execution of the special figure variation effect, the battle reach may proceed at any timing.

In the first embodiment, the icon TA5 in the change suggestion display mode is changed to the icon TA7 in the joint struggle development suggestion display mode, and then the icon TA7 in the joint struggle development suggestion display mode is changed to the icon TA in the degree of expectation display mode (the After being changed to the icon TA3 in the 2nd degree of expectation display mode and the icon TA4 in the 3rd degree of expectation display mode, the cooperative reach was advanced. However, it is not limited to this. For example, after the icon TA5 of the change suggestion display mode is changed to the icon TA7 of the joint fight development suggestion display mode during the execution of the special figure fluctuation effect, the unit fight reach may proceed at any timing.

The change-suggestion display mode of the icon TA5 in the first embodiment corresponds to the "specific display mode" of the present invention. However, it is not limited to this. Any display mode may correspond to the "specific display mode" as long as the display mode suggests that the first icon change effect is executed.

The battle development suggestive display mode of the icon TA6 of the first embodiment and the joint battle development suggestive display mode of the icon TA7 are the "special display modes" of the present invention. However, it is not limited to this. For example, any display mode may correspond to the "special display mode" as long as it is a display mode suggesting that the SPSP reach is executed.

In the first embodiment, after the icon TA5 in the change suggesting display mode is changed to the icon TA6 in the battle development suggesting display mode or the icon TA7 in the battle development suggesting display mode, the N reach ends, Through SP reach and branch production, it was shifted to battle reach or joint fight reach. However, it is not limited to this. For example, as soon as the icon TA5 in the change suggesting display mode is changed to the icon TA6 in the battle development suggesting display mode or the icon TA7 in the united struggle development suggesting display mode, it may be shifted to battle reach or united struggle reach. good. Also, for example, after the icon TA5 in the change suggesting display mode is changed to the icon TA6 in the battle development suggesting display mode or the icon TA7 in the joint struggle development suggesting display mode, when the N reach ends, the battle reach or It may be transferred to a joint battle reach. If the icon TA5 in the change suggesting display mode has been changed to the icon TA6 in the battle development suggesting display mode or the icon TA7 in the battle development suggesting display mode, the timing of transitioning to SPSP reach will interfere with the game. It may be changed as appropriate within a range that does not cause

There are three kinds of the first expectation level display mode of the icon TA2 of the first embodiment, the second expectation level display mode of the icon TA3, and the third expectation level display mode of the icon TA4. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the number of types of expectation display modes may be two or less, or may be four or more.

It corresponded to the "specific condition" that the execution of N reach was started during the execution of the special figure fluctuation production in the first embodiment and a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) passed. However, it is not limited to this. For example, a specific effect image is displayed on the display unit 50a of the image display device 50, a specific sound is output from the speaker 52, the frame lamp 53 and the board lamp 54 are illuminated in a specific light emission mode, and the like. may correspond to the "specific condition".

The second expectation level display mode in the first embodiment corresponds to the "first expected display mode", and the third expectation level display mode corresponds to the "second expected display mode". However, it is not limited to this. For example, the first expectation level display mode may correspond to the "first expectation display mode", and the second expectation level display mode may correspond to the "second expectation display mode". Further, for example, the first expectation level display mode may correspond to the "first expectation display mode", and the third expectation level display mode may correspond to the "second expectation display mode".

In the first embodiment, the icon TA6 in the battle development suggesting display mode or the icon TA7 in the joint struggle development suggesting display mode is replaced by the icon TA3 in the second expectation level display mode or the icon TA3 in the third expectation level display mode. Changed to TA4. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the icon TA6 of the battle development suggestive display mode or the icon TA7 of the united struggle development suggestive display mode is changed to the icon TA2 of the first degree of expectation display mode or the icon TA3 of the second degree of expectation display mode. Also good. Further, for example, the icon TA6 of the battle development suggestive display mode or the icon TA7 of the united struggle development suggestive display mode changes to the icon TA2 of the first expectation level display mode or the icon TA4 of the third expectation level display mode. May be.

The icon TA2 in the first expectation level display mode, the icon TA3 in the second expectation level display mode, and the icon TA4 in the third expectation level display mode in the first embodiment have the same round shape, but are colored. was different. However, it is not limited to this. For example, of the icon TA2 in the first expectation level display mode, the icon TA3 in the second expectation level display mode, or the icon TA4 in the third expectation level display mode, two types of the icon TA in the expectation level display mode The icons TA may have the same shape but different colors, and the icon TA of the remaining one type of expectation level display mode may be configured to be different in shape and color from the icons TA of the two types of expectation level display modes.

The icon TA2 in the first degree of expectation display mode, the icon TA3 in the second degree of expectation display mode, and the icon TA4 in the third degree of expectation display mode in the first embodiment are circular. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the shape of the icon TA2 in the first expectation level display mode, the icon TA3 in the second expectation level display mode, and the icon TA4 in the third expectation level display mode may be appropriately changed within a range that does not interfere with the game. can be changed to For example, a star shape, a square shape, a rhombus shape, or the like may be used.

The special figure fluctuation production of the first embodiment corresponds to "judgment result suggestion production" and "judgment result production". However, it is not limited to this. For example, if it is an effect that suggests the result of the big hit determination, a specific effect image displayed on the display unit 50a of the image display device 50, a specific sound output from the speaker 52, the frame lamp 53 and the board lamp 54 are specified. , cut-in notice, step-up notice, notice using an effect image, etc., may correspond to the "determination result suggesting effect" and "determination result effect" of the present invention.

N reach of the said 1st Embodiment corresponded to "specific reach production." However, it is not limited to this. For example, L reach, SP reach, SPSP reach, etc. may correspond to the "specific reach effect".

It corresponded to the "specific condition" that the execution of N reach was started during the execution of the special figure fluctuation effect in the first embodiment and a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) passed. However, it is not limited to this. As long as the condition includes the execution of N-reach, it may be appropriately changed within a range that does not interfere with the game. For example, the execution of N reach is started during the execution of the special figure fluctuation effect may correspond to the "specific condition". Further, for example, the fact that the execution of N reach is terminated during the execution of the special figure fluctuation effect may correspond to the "specific condition". Further, for example, in the pachinko game machine PY1 of the first embodiment, it may be possible to execute a pseudo-continuous effect in which the effect symbol EZ is varied and displayed a predetermined number of times in one special figure variation effect. In this case, for example, in the pseudo-continuous effect, when the variable display of the effect symbol EZ is performed three times, the execution of N reach is started during the second variable display of the effect symbol EZ in the pseudo-continuous effect, and a predetermined period of time is reached. After (for example, one second) has elapsed, the icon TA6 in the battle development suggestive display mode and the icon TA7 in the cooperative struggle development suggestive display mode displayed on the display unit 50a change to the icon TA in the degree of expectation display mode (first expectation The icon TA2 in the level display mode, the icon TA3 in the second level of expectation display mode, and the icon TA4 in the third level of expectation display mode. In this case, the elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) after the execution of N-reach is started during the second variable display of the effect symbol EZ in the pseudo-continuous effect may correspond to the "specific condition". .

In the second icon change effect of the first embodiment, during execution of the special figure variation effect, the icon TA5 in the change suggestion display mode displayed on the display unit 50a is replaced with the icon TA6 in the battle development suggestion display mode. Alternatively, it was an effect of changing to the icon TA7 of the joint struggle development suggestive display mode. However, it is not limited to this. For example, in the second icon change effect, the hold icon HA5 in the change suggestive display mode displayed on the display unit 50a is changed to the hold icon HA5 in the battle development suggestive display mode indicating that the game progresses to battle reach while the special figure variation effect is being executed. HA6, or it may be a look-ahead effect that changes to a holding icon HA7 of a joint fight development suggestive display mode indicating that the joint fight reach is advanced during the execution of the special figure fluctuation production.

In the third icon change effect of the first embodiment, during execution of the special figure variation effect, the icon TA6 of the battle development suggesting display mode or the icon TA7 of the joint struggle development suggesting display mode displayed on the display unit 50a to the icon TA2 in the second expectation level display mode or the icon TA3 in the third expectation level display mode. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the third icon change effect changes the hold icon HA6 of the battle development suggestive display mode or the hold icon HA7 of the joint fight development suggestive display mode displayed on the display unit 50a to the hold icon HA2 of the second expectation degree display mode, Alternatively, it may be a look-ahead effect of changing to the hold icon HA3 in the third expectation level display mode.

The on-board movable body 55k of the first embodiment corresponds to the "movable body". However, it is not limited to this. For example, the under-board movable body 56k may correspond to the "movable body". Further, for example, the on-board movable body 55k and the lower-board movable body 56k may correspond to the "movable body". Also, for example, the frame movable device 58 may correspond to the "movable body". Further, for example, the board top movable body 55k, the board bottom movable body 56k, and the frame movable device 58 may correspond to the "movable body".

In the first icon change effect of the first embodiment, execution of the movable body effect is completed, and the icon TA1 in the normal display mode is replaced with the icon TA in the expectation level display mode (the icon TA2 in the first expectation level display mode). , the icon TA3 in the second expectation level display mode, and the icon TA4 in the third expectation level display mode). However, it is not limited to this. For example, during the execution of the movable object effect in the first icon change effect, the icon TA1 in the normal display mode changes to the icon TA in the expectation level display mode (the icon TA2 in the first expectation level display mode, the second expectation level display mode). and the icon TA4 in the third expectation level display mode). Further, for example, at the same time as the execution of the movable body effect in the first icon change effect is completed, the icon TA1 in the normal display mode changes to the icon TA in the expectation level display mode (the icon TA2 in the first expectation level display mode, the second The icon TA3 in the degree of expectation display mode and the icon TA4 in the third degree of expectation display mode may be changed.

The normal display mode of the icon TA1 in the first embodiment corresponds to the "icon in a predetermined display mode" of the present invention. For example, a display mode other than the normal display mode of the icon TA may correspond to the "predetermined display mode" of the present invention. In this case, for example, the display modes other than the normal display mode include the expectation level display mode (first expectation level display mode, second expectation level display mode, third expectation level display mode), battle development suggestion display mode, and joint struggle suggestion mode. A display mode or the like may be used.

In the first icon change effect of the first embodiment, the icon TA1 in the normal display mode is replaced by the icon TA in the expectation level display mode (the icon TA2 in the first expectation level display mode, the icon TA2 in the second expectation level display mode, and the icon TA2 in the second expectation level display mode). TA3, changed to the icon TA4) in the third expectation degree display mode. However, it is not limited to this. For example, when the first icon change effect is executed, the suspended icon HA1 in the normal display mode is changed to the suspended icon HA in the expectation level display mode (the suspended icon HA2 in the first expectation level display mode, the suspended icon HA2 in the second expectation level display mode, and the suspended icon HA2 in the second expectation level display mode). HA3, may be changed to a hold icon HA4) of the third expectation level display mode.

The operation of the on-board movable body 55k from the standby position shown in FIG. 37(B) to the operating position shown in FIG. 37(C) in the first embodiment corresponds to the "first movable mode". The operation of the on-board movable body 55k from the standby position shown in FIG. 37(B) to the operating position shown in FIG. 37(D) in the first embodiment corresponds to the "second movable mode". However, it is not limited to this. For example, if the motion of the movable body 55k on the board differs between the movable body presentation of the first presentation mode and the movable body presentation of the second presentation mode, the motion of the movable body 55k on the board that is different from the first presentation mode is the first movable body mode" and "second movable mode".

In the above-described first embodiment, the operation of the on-board movable body 55k differs between the movable-body presentation of the first presentation mode and the movable-body presentation of the second presentation mode, and the movable body LED 55L provided for the movable body 55k on the board emits light. The colors were also different. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the movement of the on-board movable body 55k is different between the movable-body production of the first production mode and the movable-body production of the second production mode, but the luminescence color of the movable body LED 55L provided for the on-board movable body 55k is the same. can be

In the first icon change effect in the first effect mode of the first embodiment, when the movable body effect in the first effect mode is executed, the icon TA1 in the normal display mode changes to the icon TA3 in the second degree of expectation display mode. was easier to change to the icon TA2 in the first degree of expectation display mode. However, it is not limited to this. In the first icon change effect in the first effect mode of the first embodiment, when the movable body effect in the first effect mode is executed, the icon TA1 in the normal display mode changes to the icon TA2 in the first degree of expectation display mode. may be the same as the rate of change to the icon TA3 in the second expectation degree display mode.

In the first icon change effect in the second effect mode of the first embodiment, when the movable body effect in the second effect mode is executed, the icon TA1 in the normal display mode changes to the icon TA2 in the first degree of expectation display mode. , and changed to the icon TA3 in the second expectation level display mode or the icon TA4 in the third expectation level display mode. However, it is not limited to this. For example, in the first icon change effect in the second effect mode of the first embodiment, when the movable body effect in the second effect mode is executed, the icon TA1 in the normal display mode changes to the corresponding icon in the first degree of expectation display mode. It may be changed to icon TA2. In this case, the movable body effect of the second effect mode is executed, and the icon TA1 of the normal display mode is changed to the icon TA2 of the first expectation level display mode. A configuration may be adopted in which the percentage of change to the icon TA3 or the icon TA4 in the third expectation level display mode is high.

In the above-described first embodiment, the expectation of a big hit is higher in the movable body effect of the second effect mode than in the movable body effect of the first effect mode. However, it is not limited to this. For example, there may be three types of rendering mode of the movable body rendering, ie, a first rendering mode, a second rendering mode, and a third rendering mode. In this case, for example, among the three types of presentation modes, the third presentation mode has the highest expectation of the movable body presentation, followed by the second highest expectation of the movable body presentation, followed by the first. The degree of expectation for a big hit in the movable body presentation of the presentation mode may be low. In this case, for example, when the movable body effect of the first effect mode is executed in the first icon change effect, the icon TA1 of the normal display mode is replaced with the icon TA2 of the first expectation degree display mode, The icon TA is changed to one of the icon TA3 in the 2nd degree of expectation display mode or the icon TA4 in the 3rd degree of expectation display mode, and the icon TA is changed to the 2nd effect in the first icon change effect. When the movable body effect of the aspect is executed, the icon TA1 in the normal display aspect is replaced with either the icon TA3 in the second expectation level display aspect or the icon TA4 in the third expectation level display aspect. When the icon TA is changed to the expectation degree display mode and the movable body effect of the third effect mode is executed in the first icon change effect, the icon TA1 of the normal display mode is changed to the third expectation degree display mode. may be changed to the corresponding icon TA4. As a result, in the first icon change effect, it is possible to entertain the user by making them interested in which of the three types of movable body effects will be executed. Become.

The icon display area 50e of the first embodiment (for example, see FIGS. 42A and 46A) corresponds to the "predetermined display position". However, it is not limited to this. For example, if the icon TA1 in the normal display mode is different from the display position for changing the icon TA in the expectation level display mode in the first icon change effect, some display area in the display unit 50a may be changed to the "predetermined It may correspond to "display position".

The icon change area 50h of the first embodiment (for example, see FIGS. 42A and 46A) corresponds to the "specific display position". However, it is not limited to this. For example, if the icon TA1 in the normal display mode is changed to the icon TA in the expectation level display mode in the first icon change effect, the icon display area 50e and the icon change area of the display unit 50a are displayed. A display area different from 50h may correspond to the "specific display position".

The icon TA1 in the normal display mode displayed in the icon change area 50h of the first embodiment is changed from the icon TA in the expectation level display mode (the icon TA2 in the first expectation level display mode, the second expectation level display mode). , and the icon TA4 in the third expectation level display mode). However, it is not limited to this. For example, the icon TA1 in the normal display mode displayed in the icon change area 50h is changed to the icon TA2 in the first expectation level display mode or the icon TA3 in the second expectation level display mode. The configuration may be such that the icon TA4 in the 3-expectation degree display mode is not changed.

In the first embodiment, the on-board movable body image KG (the first on-board movable body image KG1 and the second on-board movable body image KG2) is displayed on the display unit 50a at the same time when the execution of the movable body production ends. (See FIGS. 40 and 41). However, it is not limited to this. For example, the on-board movable body image KG (the first on-board movable body image KG1 and the second on-board movable body image KG2) may be displayed on the display unit 50a during execution of the movable body effect. In this case, the display of the on-board movable body image KG (the first on-board movable body image KG1 and the second on-board movable body image KG2) on the display unit 50a ends after the execution of the movable body effect ends. Also good. Further, for example, at the same time when execution of the movable body effect ends, display of the on-board movable body image KG (the first on-board movable body image KG1 and the second on-board movable body image KG2) on the display unit 50a ends. Also good.

In the above-described first embodiment, while the on-board movable body image KG (the first on-board movable body image KG1 or the second on-board movable body image KG2) is being displayed on the display unit 50a, the icon TA1 in the normal display mode is expected. The icon TA in the level display mode (the icon TA2 in the first level of expectation display mode, the icon TA3 in the second level of expectation display mode, and the icon TA4 in the third level of expectation display mode). However, it is not limited to this. For example, when the on-board movable body image KG (the first on-board movable body image KG1 or the second on-board movable body image KG2) is not displayed on the display unit 50a, the icon TA1 in the normal display mode is the first expectation level. The display mode is changed to the icon TA2, and the first expectation degree display mode is displayed while the on-board movable body image KG (the first on-board movable body image KG1 or the second on-board movable body image KG2) is being displayed on the display unit 50a. The icon TA2 may be changed to the icon TA3 in the second expectation degree display mode.

The movable body image KG1 on the first board and the movable body image KG2 on the second board in the first embodiment corresponded to the "movable body image". However, it is not limited to this. For example, a movable body image simulating a board-mounted movable body 55k that is held in the operating position shown in FIG. A movable body image simulating a board-mounted movable body 55k that is held in the operating position shown in 37(D) and that is equipped with a movable body LED 55L that is lit in a red emission color is referred to as "movable body image".

The SPSP reach of the first embodiment corresponds to the "expected transition effect". However, it is not limited to this. For example, if it is possible to shift to a specific effect suggesting a degree of expectation for a big hit other than the ready-to-win effect in the special figure fluctuation effect, the specific effect may correspond to the "expectation transition effect".

The battle reach of the first embodiment corresponds to the "low-expectation transition effect", and the joint fight reach corresponds to the "high-expectation transition effect". However, it is not limited to this. For example, the N reach may correspond to the "low expectation transition effect", and the L reach may correspond to the "high expectation transition effect". Further, for example, the L reach may correspond to the "low expectation transition effect", and the SP reach may correspond to the "high expectation transition effect". In addition, for example, the SP reach may correspond to the "low expectation transition effect", and the SP SP reach may correspond to the "high expectation transition effect".

The battle development suggesting effect and the joint struggle development suggesting effect in the first embodiment corresponded to the "expectation suggesting effect". However, it is not limited to this. If it is an effect that suggests the transition to the SPSP reach, a specific effect image displayed on the display unit 50a of the image display device 50, a specific sound output from the speaker 52, and the frame lamp 53 and the board lamp 54 are specified. An effect such as light emission in a light emitting mode, cut-in notice, step-up notice, notice using an effect image, and the like may correspond to the "expected suggestive effect" of the present invention.

The battle development suggestive effect in the first embodiment corresponds to the "low expectation suggestive effect", and the joint battle development suggestive effect corresponds to the "high expectation suggestive effect". However, it is not limited to this. For example, if it is an effect suggesting a transition to battle reach, a specific effect image displayed on the display unit 50a of the image display device 50, a specific sound output from the speaker 52, the frame lamp 53 and the board lamp 54 are displayed. Effects such as light emission in a specific lighting mode, cut-in notices, step-up notices, notices using effect images, and the like may correspond to the "low-expectation suggestive effects" of the present invention. Further, for example, if it is an effect suggesting a transition to a joint fighting reach, a specific effect image displayed on the display unit 50a of the image display device 50, a specific sound output from the speaker 52, a frame lamp 53 or a board lamp The effect of causing the 54 to emit light in a specific lighting mode, the cut-in notice, the step-up notice, the notice using the effect image, etc. may correspond to the "high-expectation suggestive effect" of the present invention.

Of the joint fight reach or the battle reach in the special figure fluctuation production in the above-described first embodiment, the production branch time point that branches to any reach corresponds to the "predetermined branch time point" of the present invention. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the normal loss in the special figure fluctuation production, or the production branch time to branch to any of N reach, may correspond to the "predetermined branch time" of the present invention. Also, for example, the production branch point of time branching into any reach out of N reach, L reach and SP reach in the special figure fluctuation production may correspond to the "predetermined branch point" of the present invention. In addition, for example, L reach, SP reach, or branch effect in the special figure fluctuation effect, the production branch point of branching to any one may correspond to the "predetermined branch point" of the present invention.

In the first embodiment, the super hot suggestive effect in which the super hot suggestive effect image GE indicating "super hot" is displayed on the display unit 50a corresponds to the "specific effect". However, it is not limited to this. For example, in the case of an effect suggesting the possibility of a big win instead of the effect suggesting the development of a battle or the effect suggesting the development of a joint struggle, a specific effect image displayed on the display unit 50a of the image display device 50 is output from the speaker 52. A specific sound, an effect such as making the frame lamp 53 or the board lamp 54 emit light in a specific light emission mode, a cut-in notice, a step-up notice, a notice using an effect image, etc., correspond to the "specific effect" of the present invention. can be

In the above-described first embodiment, the super-hot suggestion effect in which the super-hot suggestion effect image GE indicating "super hot" is displayed on the display unit 50a has a higher expectation for a big hit than the battle development suggestion performance and the joint struggle development suggestion performance. Met. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the super-hot suggestive effect may have the same or substantially the same big-win expectation level as the battle development suggestive effect or the joint struggle development suggestive effect.

In the above-described first embodiment, in the branching production, instead of the battle development suggesting production, the super-hot suggesting production is executed, and when proceeding to the battle reach, the joint struggle development suggesting production is executed in the branching production, and the joint struggle is performed. It was a composition with a higher expectation of a big hit than when proceeding to reach. However, it is not limited to this. For example, special effects other than prior suggestive cut-in effects, super hot suggestive effects, and developmental suggestive effects may be executed in the branch effects. In this case, for example, in the branching production, instead of the battle development suggesting production, a super-hot suggestive production is executed and the battle reaches the battle, and in the branching production, the joint struggle development suggesting production and the special production are executed. The degree of expectation for a big hit may be substantially the same or the same as in the case of advancing to the joint struggle reach. The special effect includes a specific effect image displayed on the display unit 50a of the image display device 50, a specific sound output from the speaker 52, a specific lighting mode for the frame lamp 53 and the board lamp 54, and so on. A cut-in notice, a step-up notice, a notice using an effect image, or the like may be used.

In the above-described first embodiment, in the branching production, instead of the united struggle development suggesting production, the super-hot suggesting production is executed, and in the case of proceeding to the joint struggle reach, the joint struggle development suggesting production is executed in the branching production, and the joint struggle It was a composition with a higher expectation of a big hit than when proceeding to reach. However, it is not limited to this. For example, a special effect other than a pre-suggestive cut-in effect, a super-hot suggestive effect, or a developmental suggestive effect may be executed in the branch effect. In this case, for example, in the branch production, instead of the joint struggle development suggestion production, a super hot suggestion production is executed, and a special production is further executed to proceed to the joint struggle reach, and in the branch production, the joint struggle development suggestion production is performed. It may be a configuration in which the expectation of a big hit is higher when it is executed and progresses to the joint fighting reach.

In the above-described first embodiment, in the branching production, a super hot suggestion production is executed instead of the battle development suggesting production, and the battle reach progresses, and in the branching production, the super hot suggestion production is executed instead of the joint struggle development suggesting production. was executed and the expected degree of jackpot was substantially the same as when proceeding to the joint struggle reach. However, it is not limited to this. In the branch production, a super hot suggestion production is executed instead of the battle development suggestion production, and the jackpot expectation (for example, 90%) when proceeding to the battle reach, and the branch production is intense instead of the joint struggle development suggestion production. The degree of expectation for a big hit (for example, 90%) may be exactly the same as in the case where the hot suggestion effect is executed and the player advances to the cooperative reach. As a result, from the player's point of view, in the branching production, a super-hot suggestion production is executed instead of the battle development-suggestion production, and the battle reach progresses, and in the branching production, it is super-hot instead of the joint struggle development-suggestion production. This is because it is possible to make the player feel that the degree of expectation for the big win is the same between the case where the suggestive effect is executed and the player advances to the cooperative reach.

In the first embodiment, during the execution of the branching production in the special figure fluctuation production, before the development suggesting production (battle development suggesting production, joint fighting development suggesting production) or the intense hot suggesting production is executed, the battle pre-suggestion A cut-in effect, or a cut-in effect suggesting a pre-joint fight was executed. However, it is not limited to this. For example, development suggestion production (battle development suggestion production, joint struggle development suggestion production) in special figure fluctuation production, or before the intense hot suggestion production is executed, at any timing in the special figure fluctuation production, battle pre-suggestion cut An in-effect or a cut-in effect suggesting prior cooperation may be executed.

In the first embodiment, the battle pre-suggestion cut-in effect in which the battle pre-suggestion cut-in effect image ZK1 is displayed on the display unit 50a and the joint battle pre-suggestion cut-in effect image ZK2 is displayed in the display unit 50a. The cut-in production corresponds to the "pre-transition suggestive production". However, it is not limited to this. For example, if it is an effect that suggests shifting to SPSP reach, either battle reach or joint fight reach, a specific effect image displayed on the display unit 50 a of the image display device 50 is output from the speaker 52 A specific sound, an effect such as making the frame lamp 53 or the board lamp 54 emit light in a specific light emitting mode, a step-up notice, a notice using an effect image, etc., correspond to the "pre-transition suggestive effect" of the present invention. Also good.

Further, in the above-described first embodiment, the first start port 11 (fixed start port) that does not change the ease with which a game ball enters, and the second start port 12 (variable Although the starting port and the starting port related to the electric tube 12D are provided, only one of them may be provided.

In the first embodiment, the special figure 2 determination process is performed preferentially over the special figure 1 determination process (variation display of special figure 2 is performed preferentially than the variation display of special figure 1) configuration and However, the special figure 1 determination process is performed preferentially over the special figure 2 determination process (the variation display of the special figure 1 is performed preferentially over the variation display of the special figure 2). In this case, the special figure 1 lottery should be a lottery that is more advantageous than the special figure 2 lottery and makes it easier to win a big hit.

Further, in the first embodiment, the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine, but it is also possible to apply it to other pinball game machines such as an arrange ball machine and a mammoth ball game machine.

In the above-described first embodiment, the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are variablely displayed in synchronism with the special symbol variable display. Instead, it may be composed of patterns other than three, such as two. For example, you may provide two designs divided by special figure 1 and special figure 2. Moreover, one pattern common to the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 may be provided. In these cases, the display unit 50a of the image display device 50 may be used for display, and the sub-control board 120 may be used for control. Further, in areas other than the game area 6 of the game board 1, an LED device for displaying symbols may be provided. In this case, the main control board 100 or the sub-control board 120 may control the LED device.

Further, in the above-described first embodiment, the main control board 100 performs basic control relating to the progress of the game, and the sub-control board 120 performs basic control relating to the progress of the presentation according to the progress of the game (game control). , the control of the game and the control of the effect are performed by different boards, but they may be configured to be performed by one board. In this case, the image control board 140 may be included in the one board, or may be provided separately from the one board.

11. Inventions shown in the above embodiments In the above embodiments, the following inventions (inventions according to means A1 to A6, inventions according to means B1 to B5, inventions according to means C1 to C5) are shown . In the following description of the invention, corresponding structural names and expressions in the above-described embodiments and reference numerals used in the drawings are added in parentheses for reference. However, the constituent elements of each invention are not limited to this appendix.

<Means A>
The invention according to means A1 is
Control to a special game state (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (there is a winning of a game ball into the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12). A game control means (game control microcomputer 101) capable of determining whether or not to
Production control means (production control microcomputer 121) capable of controlling a predetermined production,
A display unit (display unit 50a of the image display device 50) capable of displaying the effect,
The production control means is
It is possible to execute a suggestive effect (SPSP reach (battle reach, joint fight reach)) that suggests the possibility of being controlled to the special game state,
In the display unit, it is possible to display a predetermined icon (suspended icon HA, icon TA) indicating that the execution of the determination is suspended or that the determination has been performed;
The display mode of the predetermined icon is changed from a specific display mode (change suggestion display mode (see FIG. 31(E))) to a special display mode different from the specific display mode (battle development suggestion display mode (see FIG. 31(F)), It is possible to execute a change effect that changes to a joint struggle development suggestion display mode (see FIG. 31 (G))),
The specific display mode is a display mode that suggests that the change effect is executed,
The special display mode is a display mode that suggests that the suggestive effect is executed.
It is a gaming machine characterized by

According to the gaming machine of this configuration, the display mode of the predetermined icon indicating that the execution of the determination as to whether or not to be controlled to the special game state is suspended or that the determination has been executed is changed to a different effect. is changed from a specific display mode suggesting execution of a special display mode to a special display mode suggesting execution of a suggestive effect suggesting the possibility of being controlled to a special game state. As a result, after the predetermined icon in the specific display mode makes the player understand that the change performance will be executed, it is possible to make the player understand that the suggestive performance will be executed in the changed special display mode. . Therefore, the change in the display mode of the predetermined icon and the execution of the suggestive effect can be grasped by the display mode of the predetermined icon, and the player's feelings for the future development of the effect can be heightened and the interest in the game can be enhanced. becomes.

The invention according to means A2 is
In the gaming machine according to means A1,
The production control means is
executing the suggestion effect when the display mode of the predetermined icon is changed from the specific display mode to the special display mode in the change effect;
It is a gaming machine characterized by

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, the display mode of the predetermined icon is changed from the specific display mode to the special display mode, and the suggestive effect is executed. Therefore, the suggestive effect is executed by the predetermined icon in the special display mode. It is possible to get a firm grasp of As a result, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the display mode of the predetermined icon is changed from the specific display mode to the special display mode, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

The invention according to means A3 is
In the gaming machine according to means A1 or means A2,
The predetermined icon display mode includes an expectation display mode (first expectation display mode (see FIG. 31(B)) that suggests the possibility of being controlled to the special game state, a second expectation display mode (see FIG. 31B), and a second expectation display mode (see FIG. 31 (C)), there is a third expectation display mode (see FIG. 31 (D)),
The production control means is
When the predetermined icon in the special display mode is displayed and a specific condition (executing N reach during the execution of the special figure variation effect) is established, the display mode of the predetermined icon is displayed in the special display. changing from the mode to the expected display mode,
It is a gaming machine characterized by

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, the special display mode changed from the specific display mode of the predetermined icon in the change effect is changed to the expected display mode suggesting the possibility of being controlled to the special game state when the specific condition is established. be changed. As a result, it is possible to grasp the possibility of being controlled to the special game state by the changed expected display mode after the execution of the suggestive effect is grasped by the special display mode. Therefore, it is possible to make the player grasp not only the development of the effect but also the possibility of being controlled to the special game state by changing the display mode of the predetermined icon, thereby enhancing the player's feelings and increasing the interest in the game. It becomes possible.

The invention according to means A4 is
In the gaming machine according to means A3,
The expected display mode includes a first expected display mode (second expected display mode (see FIG. 31(C))) and a higher possibility of being controlled to the special game state than the first expected display mode. There is a second expectation display mode (third expectation display mode (see FIG. 31 (D))) that suggests that
The production control means is
When the specific condition is established when the predetermined icon in the special display mode is displayed, the display mode of the predetermined icon is changed from the special display mode to the first expected display mode or the second expected display mode. to change the form,
It is a gaming machine characterized by

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, when the specific condition is established, there is a possibility that the display mode of the predetermined icon is controlled from the special display mode to the first expected suggestive mode, or to the special game state rather than the first expected suggested mode. The display mode is changed to the second expected display mode that suggests high. As a result, it is possible to draw attention to which expected display mode the display mode of the predetermined icon will be changed from the special display mode to the first suggested suggested mode or the second expected display mode. Therefore, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by making the player more interested in the expected display mode that is changed from the special display mode.

The invention according to means A5 is
In the gaming machine according to means A4,
The predetermined icon of the first expected display mode and the predetermined icon of the second expected display mode are icons having the same shape and different colors (see FIGS. 31(C) and 31(D)),
It is a gaming machine characterized by

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, the player can determine whether the expected display mode changed from the special display mode is the first expected display mode or the second expected display mode by the shape and color of the predetermined icon. It is possible to make it easier to As a result, the player who glances at the display mode of the predetermined icon can easily grasp whether the predetermined icon display mode is the first expected display mode or the second expected display mode, thereby increasing the interest in the game. becomes possible.

The invention according to means A6 is
In the gaming machine according to any one of means A3 to means A5,
the predetermined icon is the icon (the icon TA) indicating that the determination has been made;
The production control means is
Making it possible to execute a judgment result suggestion production (special figure fluctuation production) that suggests the result of the judgment,
making it possible to execute the suggestive effect in the judgment result suggestive effect,
The specific condition includes execution of a specific reach effect (N reach) in the judgment result suggestion effect,
It is a gaming machine characterized by

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, when the specific condition including the execution of the specific ready-to-win effect in the judgment result suggesting effect is established, the display mode of the icon suggests that the suggesting effect is executed in the judgment result suggesting effect. The special display mode is changed to the expected display mode. This draws the player's attention to the execution of the specific ready-to-win performance in the judgment result suggestion performance, and makes the player more interested in the expected display mode in which the display mode of the icon is changed from the special display mode when the specific condition is established. By doing so, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

<Means B>
The invention according to means B1 is
Control to a special game state (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (there is a winning of a game ball into the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12). A game control means (game control microcomputer 101) capable of determining whether or not to
Production control means (production control microcomputer 121) capable of controlling a predetermined production,
a display unit (display unit 50a of the image display device 50) capable of displaying the effect;
a movable body (on-board movable body 55k),
The production control means is
In the display unit, it is possible to display a predetermined icon (suspended icon HA, icon TA) indicating that the execution of the determination is suspended or that the determination has been performed;
When the movable body is moved, the display mode of the predetermined icon is changed from the predetermined display mode (normal display mode (see FIG. 31(A))) to the first special display mode (first expectation level display mode (see FIG. 31 ( B)))), or a second special display mode (second expectation display mode (see FIG. 31 (C) )) can be changed to
It is a gaming machine characterized by

According to the gaming machine of this configuration, when the movable body is moved, the execution of the determination whether to be controlled to the special game state is suspended, or a predetermined value indicating that the determination has been performed The display mode of the icon is changed from a predetermined display mode to a first special display mode or a second special display mode suggesting that the control to the specific game state is more likely than the first special display mode. Thus, when the movable body is moved, attention is paid to whether or not the predetermined display mode of the predetermined icon displayed on the display unit is changed to the first special display mode or the second special display mode. becomes possible. Therefore, it is possible to anticipate the control to the special game state by the display mode of the predetermined icon that is changed by moving the movable body, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

The invention according to means B2 is
In the gaming machine according to means B1,
The movable mode of the movable body includes a first movable mode (movable mode of the on-board movable body 55k shown in FIGS. 37B to 37C) and a second movable mode different from the first movable mode ( 37(B) to 37(D) of the movable body 55k on the board),
The production control means is
When the movable body is moved in the first movable mode, the display mode of the predetermined icon can be changed from the predetermined display mode to the first special display mode or the second special display mode,
When the movable body is moved in the second movable mode, it is easier to change the display mode of the predetermined icon from the predetermined display mode to the second special display mode than to the first special display mode.
It is a gaming machine characterized by

According to the game machine having this configuration, when the movable body is moved in the first movable mode, the predetermined icon is expected to change from the predetermined display mode to the first special display mode or the second special display mode. becomes possible. On the other hand, when the movable body is moved in the second movable mode, it is possible to expect a change from the predetermined display mode of the predetermined icon to the second special display mode rather than the first special display mode. As a result, it becomes easier for the player to grasp which special display mode is to be changed, out of the first special display mode or the second special display mode, which is changed according to the movable mode of the movable body, so that the amusement of the game can be enhanced. becomes possible.

The invention according to means B3 is
In the gaming machine according to means B2,
The second movable mode is a movable mode (see FIG. 39) that suggests that the possibility of being controlled to the special game state is higher than the first movable mode,
It is a gaming machine characterized by

According to the game machine of this configuration, attention is paid to whether the movable mode of the movable body is the first movable mode or the second movable mode that is more likely to be controlled to the special game state than the first movable mode. , it is possible to draw attention to the special display mode in which the display mode of the predetermined icon is changed from the predetermined display mode. As a result, the possibility of being controlled to a special game state is grasped to some extent by the movement mode of the movable body and the special display mode of the predetermined icon, and then the player is made to pay attention to the display mode of the predetermined icon and enjoy the game. can be increased.

The invention according to means B4 is
In the gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to means B3,
The production control means is
In the display unit, the predetermined icon can be displayed at a predetermined display position (the icon display area 50e),
When the movable body is moved, the predetermined icon displayed at the predetermined display position is moved to a specific display position (the icon change area 50h) different from the predetermined display position,
making it possible to change the display mode of the predetermined icon displayed at the specific display position from the predetermined display mode to the first special display mode or the second special display mode;
It is a gaming machine characterized by

According to the game machine having this configuration, the display mode of the predetermined icon moved from the predetermined display position of the display section to the specific display position different from the predetermined display position by moving the movable body is changed from the predetermined display mode. It is changed to the first special display mode or the second special display mode. As a result, the movable body is moved, and the change in the display mode of the predetermined icon moved to the specific display position makes it possible to visually entertain the player, thereby enhancing the amusement of the game. .

The invention according to means B5 is
In the gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to means B4,
The production control means is
When the movable body is moved, a movable body image imitating the movable body (first board movable body image KG1, second board movable body image KG2) can be displayed on the display unit,
During display of the movable body image, the display mode of the predetermined icon can be changed from the predetermined display mode to the first special display mode or the second special display mode,
It is a gaming machine characterized by

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, when the movable body is moved, a movable body image simulating the movable body is displayed on the display unit, and during the display of the movable body image, the predetermined icon is displayed in a predetermined manner. The display mode is changed to the first special display mode or the second special display mode. As a result, when the movable body is moved, the movable body image displayed on the display unit and the change in the display mode of the predetermined icon can amuse the player and increase the interest in the game.

<Means C>
The invention according to means C1 is
Control to a special game state (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (there is a winning of a game ball into the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12). A game control means (game control microcomputer 101) capable of determining whether or not to
A production control means (production control microcomputer 121) capable of executing a judgment result production (special figure fluctuation production) that suggests the result of the judgment,
The production control means is
In the determination result effect, it is possible to shift to an expectation transition effect (SPSP reach (battle reach, joint fight reach)) that suggests the degree of expectation controlled to the special game state,
In the judgment result production, an expected suggestion production (development suggestion production) that suggests a transition to the expected transition production can be executed,
The expectation transition effect includes a low-expectation transition effect (battle reach) and a high-expectation transition effect (co-op reach), which suggests that the expectation of being controlled to the special game state is higher than the low-expectation transition effect. can be,
The expectation suggestion production includes a low-expectation suggestion production (battle development suggestion production) that suggests a transition to the low-expectation transition production (battle development suggestion production) and a high-expectation suggestion production (co-op development suggestion production) that suggests a transition to the high-expectation transition production. ) and
When the low-expectation suggestive effect is executed at a predetermined branch point in the determination result effect, the transition to the low-expectation transition effect is performed, while at the predetermined branch point, the high-expectation suggestive effect is executed. Transition to the high-expectation transition production,
It is a gaming machine characterized by

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, when the low-expectation suggesting effect suggesting the transition to the low-expectation transition effect is executed at a predetermined effect branch point in the determination result effect, the transition to the low-expectation transition effect is performed. On the other hand, when a high-expectation suggestive performance suggesting a transition to a high-expectation transition performance is executed at the predetermined performance branch point, it suggests that the degree of expectation to be controlled to the special game state is higher than the low-expectation transition performance. It will be shifted to a high-expectation transition production. As a result, at a predetermined branch point in the judgment result production, depending on the expected suggestion production to be executed, it is determined whether the judgment result production transitions to a low-expectation suggestion production or a high-expectation suggestion production. It is possible to comprehend. Therefore, by arousing interest in the expected suggestion performance executed at a predetermined branch point in the determination result performance, the determination result performance can be enjoyed, and the game interest can be enhanced.

The invention according to means C2 is
In the gaming machine according to means C1,
The production control means is
In the determination result effect, it is possible to execute a specific effect (super hot suggesting effect, see FIG. 65 (D)) that suggests the degree of expectation controlled to the special game state,
When the specific effect is executed instead of the low-expectation suggestive effect and the transition to the low-expectation transition effect is performed, compared to the case where the high-expectation suggestive effect is executed and the transition to the high-expectation transition effect is performed, Expectation to be controlled to the special game state is high (see FIG. 59),
It is a gaming machine characterized by

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, when the specific performance is executed instead of the low-expectation suggestive performance and the transition to the low-expectation transition performance is performed, the high-expectation suggestive performance is executed and the transition to the high-expectation transition performance is performed. The degree of expectation to be controlled to the special game state is higher than in the case of being controlled. As a result, it is possible to give a feeling of anticipation that the specific performance is executed and shifted to the low-expectation transition performance at the predetermined performance branch point of the determination result performance. Therefore, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by making them interested in whether or not the low-expectation suggestion performance, the high-expectation suggestion performance, or the specific performance is executed in the determination result performance. .

The invention according to means C3 is
In the gaming machine according to means C2,
When the specific effect is executed instead of the high-expectation suggestive effect and the transition to the high-expectation transition effect is performed, compared to the case where the high-expectation suggestive effect is executed and the high-expectation transition effect is performed, Expectation to be controlled to the special game state is high (see FIG. 59),
It is a gaming machine characterized by

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, when transitioning to either the low-expectation transition performance or the high-expectation transition performance, the low-expectation suggestive performance, Alternatively, even when the specific effect is executed instead of any of the high-expectation suggestive effects, the degree of expectation for being controlled to the special game state is high. As a result, it is possible to arouse the player's desire for the specific performance to be executed in place of the expected transition performance in the determination result performance, thereby enhancing the amusement of the game.

The invention according to means C4 is
In the gaming machine according to means C3,
A case where the specific effect is executed instead of the low-expectation suggestive effect and the transition to the low-expectation transition effect is performed, and a case where the specific effect is executed instead of the high-expectation suggestive effect and the transition to the high-expectation transition effect is performed. In the case where the expectation degree controlled to the special game state is the same or substantially the same (see FIG. 59),
It is a gaming machine characterized by

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, in the determination result performance, the specific performance is executed at a predetermined performance branch point regardless of whether the transition is to either the low-expectation transition performance or the high-expectation transition performance. If so, the expectations of being controlled to the special game state are the same or substantially the same. Thereby, if the specific effect is executed at the predetermined effect branch point of the judgment result effect, the transition to either the low expectation transition effect or the high expectation transition effect is performed in the determination result effect. However, it is possible to increase the degree of expectation for being controlled to the special game state. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in whether or not the specific effect will be executed at a predetermined effect branching point, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

The invention according to means C5 is
In the gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to means C4,
The production control means is
In the determination result effect, before executing the expected suggestion effect, a pre-transition suggestion effect (battle pre-suggestion cut-in effect (FIG. 64 (C-1), FIG. 65 (C )), making it possible to execute a cut-in effect that suggests a joint fight (see FIG. 64 (C-2)), FIG. 66 (C)),
It is a gaming machine characterized by

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, in the judgment result effect, before the expected suggestive effect is executed, the pre-transition suggestive effect that suggests the transition to the expected transition effect is executed, thereby allowing the player to transition to the low expectation. It is possible to let the user know in advance which of the performance and the high-expectation transition performance will be shifted to. As a result, in the judgment result production, it is possible to enjoy the expected suggestive production and the expected transition production in a state in which it is understood in advance that the production will be shifted to a low-expectation transition production or a high-expectation transition production, It is possible to increase amusement in the game.

12. Second Embodiment A pachinko game machine according to a second embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 72 to 91. FIG. In the explanation of the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment, the same reference numerals are given to the same configurations as those of the pachinko game machine PY1 of the first embodiment, and the explanation thereof is omitted. Unless otherwise stated, the pachinko game machine PY1 of the basic embodiment described above is also applied to the second embodiment. The pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment is equipped with a function of preventing over-prize balls while allowing the so-called normal base to be displayed on the 7-segment display 300 of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the first embodiment.

It should be noted that the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment is a so-called V-Ken ST machine. In the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment, if there is V passage (passing to the specific area 16) during the jackpot game, the probability variable flag and the time reduction flag are turned ON at the end of the jackpot game (high probability high base state) ), both the variable probability counter and the time-saving counter are set to a predetermined value (160), and if there is no V passage during the big win game, only the time-saving flag is turned ON (to the low probability high base state) at the end of the big win game. , the time-saving counter is set to a predetermined value (eg, 160).

<Electrical configuration in the second embodiment>
First, based on FIGS. 71 and 72, the electrical configuration of the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment will be described. As shown in FIGS. 71 and 72, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of this embodiment includes a special figure lottery, a variable display of a special figure, a jackpot game, game state setting described later, a normal figure lottery, a variable display of a general figure, an auxiliary A game control board (hereinafter referred to as "main control board") 100 that controls (progress of the game) related to game profits such as games, and a game effect (special figure fluctuation effect, holding effect, operation) according to the progress of the game by the main control board 100 Production control board (hereinafter referred to as "sub control board") 120 for controlling production such as production, jackpot game production, etc.) and customer waiting production, and payout control board 170 for controlling payout of game balls. It is provided on the back side of the image display device 50 of the board 1 . The main control board 100 can be positioned as a game control section (main control section) that controls the game. In addition, the sub-control board 120 can be positioned as an effect control section (sub-control section) that controls the effects together with the image control board 140, the lamp control circuit 151, and the sound control circuit 161. In addition, the effect control unit includes at least a sub-control board 120, and various It is sufficient if the production can be controlled.

In addition, the pachinko game machine PY1 of this embodiment has a power board 190. As shown in FIG. The power board 190 supplies power to the main control board 100, the sub-control board 120, and the payout control board 170, and supplies necessary power to other devices via these boards. The power board 190 is provided with a RAM clear switch 119 that can be pressed. RAM clear switch 119 (specific operation means), when the power is turned on, the game information stored in the game RAM 104 of the game control microcomputer 101 described later (for example, game state information such as high probability state, the number of special figure pending and information such as the judgment result of the big hit) to the gaming CPU 102 (hereinafter referred to as "RAM clear"). As shown in FIG. 74, the RAM clear switch 119 is provided on a power board 190 arranged on the back side of the pachinko game machine of this embodiment. Therefore, the RAM clear switch 119 cannot be operated unless it is an employee of the amusement arcade who can open and close the front door 23 . In other words, the RAM clear switch 119 can be said to be an operating means that is substantially impossible for the player to operate. When the RAM clear switch 119 is pressed down, a detection signal indicating that the RAM clear switch 119 is ON is input to the game control microcomputer 101 . In this embodiment, the RAM clear switch 119 is provided on the power supply board 190, but the location of the RAM clear switch 119 can be changed as appropriate. can be

A backup power supply circuit 192 is provided on the power supply board 190 . The backup power supply circuit 192 supplies power to the game RAM 104 of the main control board 100 and the performance RAM 124 of the sub control board 120, which will be described later, when power is not supplied to the pachinko game machine PY1 of this embodiment. do. Therefore, the information stored in the game RAM 104 of the main control board 100 and the performance RAM 124 of the sub control board 120 is retained even when the pachinko game machine of this embodiment is powered off. A power switch 191 is connected to the power board 190 . By turning ON/OFF the power switch 191, the power is turned on/off. A backup power supply circuit for the game RAM 104 of the main control board 100 may be provided on the main control board 100 , or a backup power supply circuit for the performance RAM 124 of the sub control board 120 may be provided on the sub control board 120 .

As shown in FIG. 71, on the main control board 100, a one-chip microcomputer for game control (hereinafter referred to as "game control microcomputer") 101 for controlling the progress of the game of the pachinko game machine PY1 of this embodiment according to a program is mounted. there is The game control microcomputer 101 includes a game ROM (Read Only Memory) 103 storing programs, tables, etc. for controlling the progress of the game, a game RAM (Random Access Memory) 104 used as a work memory, and A game CPU (Central Processing Unit) 102 for executing a program stored in a game ROM 103 is included.

The game ROM 103 stores programs for performing main control main processing, main side timer interrupt processing, and the like, which will be described later. In addition, the game ROM 103 contains a jackpot determination table, a jackpot pattern type determination table, a reach determination table, a special figure variation pattern determination table, a look-ahead determination table, a jackpot game control table, a hit determination table, and a normal figure variation pattern determination table. , Auxiliary game control table, etc. are stored. Note that the game ROM 103 may be externally attached.

The game RAM 104 is provided with the above-described special figure reservation storage unit 105, normal figure reservation storage unit 106, and the like. The game RAM 104 is provided with a non-erasable storage unit 107, and the non-erasable storage unit 107 is provided with a total number of winning balls storage unit 107a, a total number of shot balls storage unit 107b, and a difference number storage unit 107c. It is In the non-erasing storage unit 107, the game CPU 102 does not erase the stored contents even if the RAM clear is executed. The non-erasing storage unit 107 (total number of winning balls storage unit 107a, total number of shot balls storage unit 107b, difference number storage unit 107c) will be described in detail later.

The main control board 100 is also provided with a 7-segment display 300, a setting key cylinder 180, and a special reset switch 181 (special operating means) (see FIG. 74). As shown in FIG. 75, the 7-segment display 300 is a so-called 4-segment 7-segment display, and has a total of 32 lighting (light emitting) portions. Specifically, the 7-segment display 300 has a first display area 310, a second display area 320, a third display area 330, and a fourth display area 340 in order from left to right. The four display areas 310, 320, 330, and 340 are composed of eight lighting portions (LED elements) LB1 to LB8, LB9 to LB16, LB1 to LB8, LB9 to LB16, so as to represent numbers "0" to "9", respectively. It has LB17 to LB24 and LB25 to LB32. Display control of the 7-segment display 300 is performed by the game control microcomputer 101 .

The setting key cylinder 180 functions as operating means when setting a set value corresponding to the probability of judging a big win. The inside of the setting key cylinder 180 is rotated between an initial position and a rotational position with a setting key (not shown) inserted. Therefore, in the pachinko game machine PY1 of the present embodiment, the setting key cylinder 180 is rotated to the rotation position, and the power is turned on while pressing the RAM clear switch 119, thereby setting a setting mode in which setting values can be set. can move to Then, in this setting mode, the setting value can be set to "1". However, in the pachinko game machine PY1 of this embodiment, only one type of set value "1" is provided. Therefore, the set value cannot be changed from "1". When the setting key cylinder 180 is rotated from the rotating position to the standby position while the setting mode is set, the setting mode is terminated and the RAM is cleared.

The main control board 100 is also provided with a special reset switch 181 that can be pressed. As shown in FIG. 74, the special reset switch 181 is provided on the main control board 100 arranged on the back side of the pachinko game machine PY1 of this embodiment. Therefore, the special reset switch 181 cannot be operated unless it is an employee of the game arcade who can open and close the front door 23 . That is, the special reset switch 181 can be said to be an operating means that is substantially impossible for the player to operate. The function of the special reset switch 181 will be detailed later. Also, the main control board 100 is mounted with a game I/O (Input/Output) port section 118 for inputting and outputting data and signals.

Various sensors MS and actuators MA are connected to the main control board 100 via a predetermined relay board (not shown). Therefore, signals output from various sensors MS are input to the main control board 100 . The main control board 100 also outputs signals to various actuators MA.

The various sensors MS connected to the main control board 100 include a first starting opening sensor 11a, a second starting opening sensor 12a, a general winning opening sensor 10a, a gate sensor 13a, a first big winning opening sensor 14a, a second It includes a big winning hole sensor 15a, a specific area sensor 16a, and a non-specific area sensor 17a.

The first starting hole sensor 11 a detects a game ball that has entered the first starting hole 11 . The second starting hole sensor 12 a detects a game ball that has entered the second starting hole 12 . The general winning hole sensor 10 a detects a game ball that has entered the general winning hole 10 . The general winning hole sensor 10 a is provided for each general winning hole 10 . The gate sensor 13 a is provided at the gate 13 and detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 13 . The first big winning hole sensor 14 a detects a game ball that has entered the first big winning hole 14 . The second big winning hole sensor 15 a detects a game ball that has won the second big winning hole 15 . The specific area sensor 16a detects a game ball that has passed through the specific area 16 (entered the specific area 16). The non-specific area sensor 17a detects a game ball that has passed through the non-specific area 17 (entered the non-specific area 17). When each sensor detects a game ball, it outputs a signal to the main control board 100 according to the content of the detection.

Although not shown in FIG. 72, the various sensors MS include an outlet sensor for detecting all game balls flowing down the game area 6 (total number of shot balls). Here, the game balls that have flowed down to the outside of the game area 6 are discharged to the outside of the pachinko game machine of this embodiment through a discharge path (not shown) provided at the bottom of the game board mounting frame 2A. Therefore, the outlet sensor is provided in the discharge path. Further, the various sensors MS include a magnetic sensor for detecting illegal magnetism. The magnetic sensor detects magnetism generated when a player uses a magnet or the like to illegally enter game balls into various prize winning openings 10, 11, 12, and 14. FIG. Each of the sensors described above outputs a signal corresponding to the content of the detection to the main control board 100 when the game ball is detected.

The various sensors MS include a front door open sensor for detecting opening of the front door 23 with respect to the outer frame 22, and a front frame sensor for detecting opening of the front frame 23m with respect to the game board mounting frame 2A. . When the front door open sensor detects that the front door 23 is opened, it outputs a signal corresponding to the content of the detection to the main control board 100 . When the front frame sensor detects that the front frame 23m is open, it outputs a signal to the main control board 100 according to the content of the detection. The types and number of sensors connected to the main control board 100 can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game.

The various actuators MA connected to the main control board 100 include an electric tuning solenoid 12s, a first big winning solenoid 14s, a second big winning solenoid 15s and a distribution solenoid 16s. The electric chew solenoid 12s drives the electric chew opening/closing member 12k of the electric chew 12D. The first big winning opening solenoid 14s drives the normal AT opening/closing member 14k of the first big winning device 14D. The second big winning opening solenoid 15s drives the VAT opening/closing member 15k of the second big winning device 15D. The distribution solenoid 16s drives the distribution member 16k of the distribution device 16D.

The type and number of actuators connected to the main control board 100 can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game.

Further, the main control board 100 is connected to the display devices 8 (special figure display device 81, normal figure display device 82, and special figure reservation display device 83). Display control of these display devices 8 is performed by a game control microcomputer 101 .

The main control board 100 also transmits various commands to the payout control board 170 and receives signals from the payout control board 170 for payout monitoring. The payout control board 170 includes a card unit CU (which is installed adjacent to the pachinko game machine of this embodiment and enables ball lending based on information such as the inserted prepaid card) and a prize ball payout device. 73 are connected, and a launcher 72 is connected via a launch control circuit 175 . The firing device 72 includes a handle 72k (see FIG. 1).

The payout control board 170 drives the prize ball motor 73m of the prize ball payout device 73 based on the signal from the game control microcomputer 101 and the signal from the connected card unit CU to pay out the prize balls. , Paying out rental balls. The game balls to be paid out are detected by the prize ball sensor 73 a for counting the game balls, and a detection signal by the prize ball sensor 73 a is output to the payout control board 170 .

The shooting device 72 is also provided with a touch switch 72a capable of detecting contact with a handle 72k (see FIG. 1) by a person such as a player. When the player operates the handle 72 k , the touch switch 72 a detects the player's contact with the handle 72 k and outputs a detection signal to the payout control board 170 . Also, the firing device 72 is connected with a firing volume knob 72b capable of detecting the rotation angle (operation amount) of the handle 72k. The shooting device 72 drives the shooting solenoid 72s so that the game ball is shot with the strength according to the rotation angle of the handle 72k detected by the shooting volume knob 72b. In addition, in the pachinko game machine of this embodiment, one game ball is shot every about 0.6 seconds while the rotation operation to the handle 72k is maintained.

Also, the payout control board 170 is connected to the external terminal board 160 . That is, the external terminal board 160 is connected to the main control board 100 via the payout control board 170 . The external terminal board 160 transmits the outer end signal transmitted from the main control board 100 to the external unit GU (data counter, hall computer, etc.) provided outside the pachinko game machine of this embodiment. The information included in the outer end signal includes, for example, information indicating whether a jackpot has been won, information on the game state, and information indicating an error or irregularity (abnormality). Although the external terminal board 160 transmits the outer end signal to the external unit GU by parallel communication, the outer end signal may be transmitted by asynchronous serial communication (common asynchronous serial communication port). Also, the main control board 100 is connected to the external terminal board 160 via the payout control board 170, but the main control board 100 is connected to the external terminal board 160 via a board other than the payout control board 170 (for example, a relay board). Alternatively, the main control board 100 and the external terminal board 160 may be directly connected.

<Display on 7-segment display>
Next, the display on the 7-segment display 300 (see FIG. 75) in the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment will be described. In the 7-segment display 300, the normal base, which is the ratio of the normal total prize balls won by the player in the normal game state and the normal shot balls fired by the player in the normal game state, is expressed as a percentage (%) value. Is displayed. In the 7-segment display 300, a base other than the normal base (time-saving base, which is the ratio of the total number of time-saving prize balls acquired by the player in the time-saving state and the number of time-saving balls fired by the player in the time-saving state, jackpot game The jackpot base, which is the ratio of the total number of jackpot prize balls won by the player in the jackpot state and the number of jackpot shot balls fired by the player in the jackpot gaming state, is not displayed.

Here, the game control microcomputer 101 always counts the number of normal shot balls, the total number of normal prize balls, and the total number of shot balls. The total number of shot balls is the number of shot balls shot by the player in all game states (normal game state, jackpot game state, high probability base state, low probability height base state, etc.). The total number of shot balls is calculated by counting the detection of the outlet sensor by the game control microcomputer 101 . The normal number of shot balls is calculated by the game control microcomputer 101 counting the detection of the discharge port sensor only in the normal game state. The normal total number of prize balls is calculated by counting the number of prize balls paid out in the normal game state by the game control microcomputer 101 .

The information on the number of normal shot balls counted for display on the 7-segment display 300, the information on the total number of normal winning balls, and the information on the total number of shot balls are stored in the non-erasable storage section 107 (FIG. 72) of the game RAM 104. reference) in a specific storage area (not shown). Therefore, even if the RAM is cleared, the information on the number of normal shot balls, the information on the total number of normal winning balls, and the information on the total number of shot balls are maintained (not erased). Thus, even if the RAM is cleared, the game control microcomputer 101 can calculate the normal base by using the normal number of shot balls when the power is cut off and the normal total number of prize balls when the power is cut off. Then, the game control microcomputer 101, regardless of the game state (normal game state, jackpot game state, high probability high base state, low probability high base state, etc.), the normal base value of the 7-segment display 300 It is displayed in the right two digits (third display area 330 and fourth display area 340 (see FIG. 75)).

Here, the normal base is calculated by dividing the total number of shot balls every 60000 shots. In other words, the normal base calculated from when the power is turned on for the first time after shipment from the factory until the total number of balls shot reaches 60,000 is the first normal base. After that, when the total number of balls shot exceeds 60,001, the initial normal base value is stored as the previous normal base value. The normal base calculated from 60,001 to 120,000 shots is the current normal base. After that, when the total number of shots exceeds 120,001, the normal base value of the previous round is stored as the normal base value of the previous round, and the current normal base value is stored as the normal base of the previous round. be. Then, the normal base calculated from 120,001 to 180,000 total shot balls becomes the current normal base.

After that, when the total number of shots exceeds 180,001, the value of the normal base 2 times before is stored as the normal base value 3 times before, and the value of the normal base value 1 time before is used as the normal base value 2 times before. stored, and the value that was the current normal base is stored as the previous normal base. Then, the normal base calculated when the total number of shot balls increased from 180,001 to 240,000 becomes the current normal base. After that, when the total number of shots exceeds 240,001, the value that was the normal base 3 times before is erased, the value that was the normal base 2 times before is stored as the normal base 3 times before, and the value that was the normal base 3 times before The value that was the normal base is stored as the normal base two times ago, and the value that was the current normal base is stored as the normal base one time ago. Then, the normal base calculated from 240,001 to 300,000 total shot balls becomes the current normal base. Thereafter, similarly, the normal base is calculated every 60,000 total shots, and the values of the normal base up to three times before are stored.

In this way, the game control microcomputer 101 stores the current normal base, the previous normal base, the second previous normal base, and the third previous normal base in the non-erasing storage section 107 of the game RAM 104 at maximum. I can let you. In this case, the game control microcomputer 101, on the 7-segment display 300, the current normal base ⇒ 1st previous normal base ⇒ 2nd previous normal base, ⇒ 3rd previous normal base ⇒ current normal base 5 The display is switched every second.

Specifically, in the 7-segment display 300, when "bL" is displayed in the left two digits (the first display area 310 and the second display area 320 (see FIG. 75)), the right two digits (the third display area 330 and a fourth display area 340) the current normal base is displayed. Therefore, a person who sees "bL" in the left two digits can understand that the value (normal base) indicated by the right two digits is the current normal base.

Then, when 5 seconds have passed since the display of the current normal base started, the 7-segment display 300 displays "b1" in the left two digits and displays the previous normal base in the right two digits. be done. Therefore, a person who sees "b1" in the left two digits can understand that the value (normal base) indicated in the right two digits is the normal base one time before.

Then, when five seconds have passed since the display of the previous normal base started, the 7-segment display 300 shows "b2" in the left two digits and the two previous normal base in the right two digits. is displayed. Therefore, a person who sees "b2" in the left two digits can understand that the value (normal base) indicated in the right two digits is the normal base two times before.

Then, when 5 seconds have passed since the display of the normal base two times before was started, the 7-segment display 300 shows "b3" in the left two digits and the normal base three times ago in the right two digits. is displayed. Therefore, a person who sees "b3" in the left two digits can understand that the value (normal base) indicated in the right two digits is the normal base three times before.

Then, when 5 seconds have passed since the display of the normal base three times before was started, as described above, the 7-segment display 300 displays "bL" in the left two digits and the current display in the right two digits. is displayed and so on.

Also, on the 7-segment display 300, if the total number of shot balls has been 300 or less since the power was turned on for the first time after shipment from the factory, "--" is displayed in the right two digits. That is, when the total number of shot balls is 300 or less, the normal base value is not displayed, and when the total number of shot balls exceeds 300, the normal base value is displayed. In this way, when the total number of shot balls is 300 or less, the value of the normal base denominator (the number of normal shot balls) is too small to avoid displaying the unreliable normal base value. there is Even if the total number of shot balls is 300 or less, the left two digits of the 7-segment display 300 repeat the display of "bL" ⇒ "b1" ⇒ "b2" ⇒ "b3" every 5 seconds. .

Also, in the 7-segment display 300, when the number of normal shots has been 6000 or less since the power was turned on for the first time after shipment from the factory, the left two digits indicate "bL", "b1", "b2", and "b3". ” flashes. After that, when the number of normal shot balls exceeds 6000 after the power is turned on for the first time after shipment from the factory, "bL", "b1", "b2", and "b3" indicated by the left two digits are lit. In this way, when the person who confirms the normal base on the 7-segment display 300 is shown the blinking mode of the left two digits, the normal base value indicated by the right two digits has not yet sufficiently converged. It is possible to have the user grasp that the value is not a value. In other words, when the lighting mode is shown in the left two digits to a person who checks the normal base, the value of the normal base shown in the right two digits is a value that converges to some extent. It is possible to

Also, in the 7-segment display 300, when the setting mode is entered after the power is turned on, the setting value (“1”) is displayed in the fourth display area 340. FIG. After that, when the setting key cylinder 180 is rotated from the rotating position to the standby position, the setting mode is terminated and the setting value (“1”) is no longer displayed in the fourth display area 340 . Thus, the setting value is displayed in the fourth display area 340 of the 7-segment display 300 only while the setting mode is set.

Also, in the 7-segment display 300, an initial display is performed after the power is turned on until the display of the normal base is started. As described above, when the setting mode is entered after the power is turned on, the initial display is performed after the setting mode ends. In the initial display on the 7-segment display 300, all lighting portions LB1 to LB32 (see FIG. 75) included in the first display area 310 to the fourth display area 340 are lit. That is, the 7-segment display 300 indicates "8.8.8.8.". In this way, the 7-segment display 300 performs an initial display immediately after the power is turned on, indicating that the 7-segment display 300 operates normally.

<Over-prizing prevention function>
Next, the over-prize-ball prevention function in the pachinko game machine of 2nd Embodiment is demonstrated. In the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment, the game control microcomputer 101 can operate the over-prize preventing function so as not to award excessive prize balls to the player. Specifically, the over-prized ball prevention function is a function that makes the game unexecutable on the condition that the difference number of balls is 80000 (reference number) or more. Here, the difference number of balls (specific count number) is the difference between the total number of prize balls and the total number of shot balls. The total number of prize balls is the number of prize balls that the player acquires (pays out to the player) in all game states (normal game state, jackpot game state, high probability high base state, low probability high base state, etc.) is. The total number of prize balls means the total number of prize balls that the game control microcomputer 101 plans to put out to the player, but it means the total number of prize balls actually paid out to the player. can be The total number of shot balls is the number of shot balls shot by the player in all game states, as described above.

The game control microcomputer 101 counts the total number of prize balls at any time after the power is turned on, and the information on the counted total number of prize balls is provided in the non-erasing storage section 107 of the game RAM 104. It is stored in the total prize number storage unit 107a (see FIG. 72). In addition, the game control microcomputer 101 counts the total number of shot balls at any time after the power is turned on, and the information on the counted total number of shot balls is stored in the non-erasing storage section 107 of the game RAM 104. is stored in the total shot ball number storage unit 107b (see FIG. 72). Then, the game control microcomputer 101 subtracts the total number of fired balls from the total number of prize balls at any time after the power is turned on to calculate the difference number of balls, and the information on the calculated difference number of balls is It is stored in the difference number storage section 107c (see FIG. 72) provided in the non-erase storage section 107 of the RAM 104 for use.

Therefore, even if the RAM is cleared, the game control microcomputer 101 does not erase the information on the total number of winning balls, the information on the total number of shot balls, and the information on the number of difference balls stored in the non-erasing storage unit 107. . In this way, the game control microcomputer 101 can calculate the number of difference balls across dates using the total number of prize balls at the time of power cutoff and the total number of shot balls at the time of power cutoff. The game control microcomputer 101 treats the difference number of balls as a negative value when the value of the total number of shot balls is larger than the value of the total number of prize balls.

In this embodiment, when the over-prize ball prevention function is activated, the game control microcomputer 101 not only stops the game control process related to the game (the process of steps S102 to S108 described later, see FIG. 82), but also shoots the game ball. The firing control process (process of step S109 to be described later, see FIG. 82) is also stopped. Therefore, the player can immediately notice that the game cannot be played because the game ball is not shot even if the handle 72k is rotated. In addition, when the over-prize preventing function is activated, the game control microcomputer 101 stops the game control processing, and stops receiving signals corresponding to the detection contents from the various sensors MS, and displays 8 and 7 segments. The display control of the indicator 300 is no longer executed, the various actuators MA are no longer operated, and the outer end signal is no longer output to the external terminal plate 160 via the payout control board 170 .

After the over-prize preventing function is activated, the state in which the game cannot be played continues until the power is cut off. In this embodiment, the over-prize prevention function is canceled on the condition that the RAM is cleared. In other words, after the over-prize prevention function is activated, the employee of the game parlor cuts off the power supply by turning off the power switch 191 . The employee of the game arcade presses the RAM clear switch 119 when turning on the power switch 191 to turn on the power. As a result, the game control microcomputer 101 can execute the game control process and the launch control process related to the game by executing the RAM clear. Thus, in this embodiment, after the over-prize preventing function is activated, the game cannot be restarted only by turning the power OFF and ON (returning on), and the game can be restarted by executing the RAM clear. can.

Next, the timing at which the over-prized ball prevention function operates will be described with reference to FIG. The over-prized ball prevention function is activated when the advantageous game state advantageous to the player shifts to the normal game state on the condition that the difference number of balls is 80000 or more. In other words, at the timing when the difference number of balls reaches 80000, the over-prized ball prevention function does not necessarily operate. In this embodiment, the advantageous gaming state is a high-probability base state after a big win game or a low-probability base state after a big win game.

For example, it is assumed that the difference ball number reaches 70000 in the middle of the jackpot gaming state shown in FIG. 76(A). Of course, at this time, the over-prize preventing function does not operate. Next, it is assumed that the difference ball number reaches 80000 in the middle of the jackpot gaming state shown in FIG. 76(B). At this time, the over-prize preventing function does not operate. Subsequently, even at the timing of shifting from the big winning game state to the high-probability/high-base state, the over-prize preventing function does not operate. After that, as shown in FIG. 76(C), when it comes to the timing of shifting from the high-probability-high base state to the normal game state, the over-prize preventing function is activated. In this way, in this form, the game does not stop in the middle of the jackpot game state or the middle of the high-probability-high base state, and the game can be ended at a good timing for the player to end the advantageous game state. It is possible.

In this embodiment, information on the number of difference balls is stored in the number of difference number storage unit 107c of the non-erasing storage unit 107, and the number of difference number is not reset (cleared) by turning the power OFF and ON. As described above, even if the RAM is cleared when the power is turned on, the number of difference balls is not reset. This is based on the following reasons.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, there are situations where the power is turned off and on (returned on) or the RAM is cleared due to a bug, failure, serious fraud, or the like, even during business hours. In such a situation, if the number of difference balls is reset by turning on the power again or clearing the RAM, the provision of the over-prize preventing function would be meaningless. In other words, if a bug, malfunction, or serious fraud occurs, the player who restarts the game afterward may receive an unfair advantage that the over-prized balls prevention function will not operate easily. Therefore, in this embodiment, in order to prevent the player from receiving the above-described unfair advantage, turning on the power again or clearing the RAM does not reset the number of difference balls.

Next, the conditions for resetting the number of difference balls will be described with reference to FIG. In this form, there are two reset conditions for resetting the number of difference balls. The first reset condition is that the special reset switch 181 is pressed, as shown in FIG. 77(A). That is, when the game control microcomputer 101 receives a signal based on pressing operation of the special reset switch 181, it clears the difference number information stored in the difference number storage section 107c of the non-erasing storage section 107. do. In addition, when the information on the number of difference balls stored in the number of difference balls storage unit 107c is reset (cleared), the information on the number of total prize balls and the total number of prize balls stored in the total number of prize balls storage unit 107a The information on the total number of shot balls stored in the number-of-shot-balls storage unit 107b is also reset, but hereinafter, this is simply referred to as "resetting (clearing) the number of difference balls". In addition, in FIG. 77(A), when the special reset switch 181 is pressed down in the customer waiting state, the number of difference balls is reset. However, when the special reset switch 181 is pressed, the difference ball number is reset.

The second reset condition is that the customer waiting state continues for one hour (predetermined time), as shown in FIG. 77(A). That is, if the game is not played for one hour after shifting to the customer waiting state, the game control microcomputer 101 deletes the difference number information stored in the difference number storage section 107c of the non-delete storage section 107. clear. The customer waiting state is a game state in which the game is not executed and the special symbols are stopped and displayed.

The above two reset conditions are provided for the following reasons. For example, as shown in FIGS. 77A and 77B, it is assumed that the difference ball number reaches 70000 in the jackpot game state by a certain player's game. After that, when a certain player shifts from the jackpot game state to the normal game state through the high probability/high base state, the game is finished. In this case, if the number of remaining balls increases slightly (within 10000), the over-prize prevention function can be activated for the player who starts the next game, which is extremely disadvantageous.

Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 77(A), pressing the special reset switch 181 resets the difference ball number. As a result, the employee of the game hall can press the special reset switch 181 at an arbitrary timing after finishing the game of a certain player to reset the number of difference balls. Also, as shown in FIG. 77(B), if the customer waiting state continues for one hour, it is determined that the player has finished the game, and the difference number of balls is automatically reset. As a result, it is possible to reset the difference number of balls without imposing an operation burden for the reset on the employee of the game arcade. Thus, by providing the above two reset conditions, it is possible to prevent the player who starts the next game from being extremely disadvantageous because the over-prize prevention function is activated immediately after starting the game. It is possible.

Next, an effect mode when the over-prized ball prevention function operates will be described with reference to FIG. 78(A). When the over-prize preventing function operates, as shown in FIG. 78(A), the red background image RE is displayed on the display unit 50a, and "Error X, over-prize error, please clear the RAM." is displayed. Also, a game stop sound is output from the speaker 52 . Furthermore, all the frame lamps 53 are lit in white, and all the board lamps 54 are extinguished. In this way, the effect mode shown in FIG. 78(A) enables the player to immediately recognize the situation in which the game cannot be executed. It should be noted that the presentation mode shown in FIG. 78(A) continues until the power is cut off. The presentation mode shown in FIG. 78(A) is canceled when the RAM is cleared, but is continued only by turning on the power again.

Here, in the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment, the case when illegal magnetism is detected will be described. When the magnetic sensor detects illegal magnetism, the magnetic sensor outputs a signal corresponding to the magnetic detection to the main control board 100 . As a result, the game control microcomputer 101 stops the game control process and the shooting control process related to the game, in the same way as when activating the over-prize preventing function. In this way, the state in which the game cannot be played due to the magnetism detection continues until the power is cut off. However, in this case, unlike the case where the over-prize preventing function is activated, the game control microcomputer 101 executes the game control process and the launch control process related to the game by turning the power OFF and ON (turning on the power again). can do.

Next, description will be given of the mode of presentation when illegal magnetism is detected with reference to FIG. 78(B). When the magnetic sensor detects illegal magnetism, as shown in FIG. 78(B), the red background image RE is displayed on the display unit 50a along with "Error 1: Abnormal magnetism detection. Power on again. Please” is displayed. Also, a game stop sound is output from the speaker 52 . Furthermore, all the frame lamps 53 are lit in white, and all the board lamps 54 are extinguished. In this way, comparing the presentation mode when the over-prize prevention function is activated (see FIG. 78(A)) and the presentation mode when illegal magnetism is detected (see FIG. 78(B)), the release method Other than the images, they are the same. Therefore, the employee or the player of the game hall is made to recognize that the game cannot be executed both when the illicit magnetism is detected and when the over-prize preventing function is activated. can be made easier.

Next, an effect mode when the difference ball number reaches 70000 will be described with reference to FIG. 79(A). As a precondition, it is assumed that the difference ball number reaches 70000 at the timing shown in FIG. 77(A). First, as shown in FIG. 79A, a round image G109 and a number-of-balls image G110 are displayed on the display section 50a. Then, when the difference ball number reaches 70000, a purple edge image EFa is displayed at the edge of the display section 50a, and an overpayment indicating "abnormal overpayment with 10000 remaining shots" at the bottom of the display section 50a. A ball notice image KY is displayed. By displaying the purple edge image EFa and the over-prize notice image KY, it is possible for the player to grasp the situation in which the over-prize prevention function is about to be activated. The display of the purple edge image EFa is continued even after the jackpot game state is over, but the display of the over-prize ball preview image KY is finished when the jackpot game state is finished. It should be noted that the over-prize ball preview image KY may continue to be displayed even after the jackpot gaming state ends.

Next, an effect mode when the difference ball number reaches 80000 will be described with reference to FIG. 79(B). As a precondition, it is assumed that the difference ball number reaches 80000 at the timing shown in FIG. 77(B). As shown in FIG. 79B, the display section 50a displays a round image G109 and a number-of-balls image G110. Then, when the number of difference balls reaches 80000, a red edge image EFb is displayed at the edge of the display section 50a, and a game stop notice image KH indicating "stop the game at the end of the rush" at the bottom of the display section 50a. is displayed. By displaying the red edge image EFb and the game stop notice image KH, it is possible for the player to know when the game is about to stop and when the game will be stopped. The display of the red edge image EFb is continued even after the jackpot game state is ended, but the display of the game stop notice image KH is ended when the jackpot game state is finished. It should be noted that the game stop notice image KH may be kept displayed even after the jackpot game state ends.

Here, after the difference ball number reaches 70000 at the timing shown in FIG. 77(A), the effect mode in the high probability/high base state is as shown in FIG. 80(A). That is, as shown in FIG. 80(A), the probability variation background image G105 is displayed on the display section 50a, and the effect symbol EZ is variably displayed. A purple edge image EFa is displayed at the edge of the display section 50a. This purple-rimmed image EFa allows the player to play while understanding that the number of difference balls has reached 70,000.

Also, after the number of difference balls reaches 80000 at the timing shown in FIG. 77(B), the effect mode in the high probability/high base state is as shown in FIG. 80(B). That is, as shown in FIG. 80(B), the probability variation background image G105 is displayed on the display section 50a, and the effect symbol EZ is variably displayed. A red edge image EFb is displayed at the edge of the display section 50a. This red edge image EFb allows the player to play while understanding that the number of difference balls has reached 80,000.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(A), a description will be given of an effect mode when the difference ball number is reset by pressing the special reset switch 181. FIG. In this case, an employee of the game arcade opens the front door 23 with respect to the outer frame 22 and presses down the special reset switch 181 . Therefore, the front door open sensor detects the opening of the front door 23, and the error canceling method image ER2 indicating "Error 2, please close the front door" is displayed on the display unit 50a as shown in FIG. 81(A). is displayed. At this time, a difference ball number reset notification image CLS indicating "the difference ball number has been reset" is displayed in the lower part of the display section 50a. As a result, it is possible for the employee of the game hall to understand that the number of difference balls has been reset.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(B), an effect mode when the customer waiting state continues for one hour will be described. In this case, the customer waiting demonstration video G100 is displayed on the display section 50a. At this time, a difference ball number reset notification image CLS indicating "the difference ball number has been reset" is displayed in the lower part of the display section 50a. As a result, it is possible for the employee of the game hall to understand that the number of difference balls has been reset.

<Operation of the game control microcomputer in the second embodiment>
Next, the operation of the game control microcomputer 101 in the second embodiment will be described. Note that counters, timers, buffers, and the like appearing in game control by the game control microcomputer 101 described below are provided in the game RAM 104 .

[Main Control Main Processing] In the power-on processing (S001) of the second embodiment, the game control microcomputer 101 executes RAM clear when a signal based on the pressing operation to the RAM clear switch 119 is input. When the RAM clear is executed, the game information stored in the game RAM 104 (for example, game state information such as a high probability state, information such as the number of special figure reservations and the result of judging whether a big hit is successful or not) is erased. Thereby, the game state is set to the normal game state (low probability low base state, low probability non-time saving state). However, even if the RAM is cleared, the information on the total number of prize balls stored in the total number of prize balls storage unit 107a, the information on the total number of shot balls stored in the total number of shot balls storage unit 107b, The information on the difference number of balls stored in the number storage unit 107c is not cleared.

[Main Side Timer Interrupt Processing] The main side timer interrupt processing (S005) in the second embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 82, in the main timer interrupt process (S005), first, it is determined whether or not the game stop flag is ON (S101). The game stop flag is turned on when the over-prize preventing function is activated. If the game stop flag is ON (YES in S101), the processing of steps S102 to S113 is passed. This makes the game unexecutable. On the other hand, if the game stop flag is OFF (NO in S101), the processes of steps S102 to S113 are executed. That is, it is in a playable state.

In addition, in the power-on process (S001) of the main control main process (FIG. 23) of the second embodiment, the game stop flag is switched to OFF when the RAM clear is executed in the ON state. On the other hand, the game stop flag remains ON unless the RAM clear is executed while it is ON. That is, the state of the game stop flag does not change only by turning on the power again. In this way, whether or not the game is restarted is determined depending on whether or not the RAM clear is executed after the game stop flag is turned ON by the operation of the over-prize preventing function.

When the game stop flag is OFF in step S101, an input process (S102) to be described later is executed. Then, after performing the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S103) for updating various random numbers, the sensor detection process (S104), and the normal operation process (S105) related to the operation of the electric chew 12D, the number of difference balls to be described later A measurement process (S106) and a special operation process (S107), which will be described later, are executed. Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 executes a sorting device control process (S108) for controlling the sorting device 16D, and executes a shooting control process (S109) for controlling shooting of game balls. It should be noted that the sorting device 16D is operated when a special game using the second big winning device 15D is performed. Further, by executing the shooting control process (S109), the player can shoot the game ball by rotating the handle 72k. On the other hand, if the shooting control process (S109) is not executed, the game ball cannot be shot even if the player rotates the handle 72k.

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 executes a 7-segment display control process (S110) for controlling the display of the 7-segment display device 300. FIG. Next, an error process (S111) is executed to determine an error (illegal) due to magnetic detection or an error due to the opening of the front door 23 or the front frame 23m. In the error processing (S111), it is determined whether or not the magnetic sensor has detected incorrect magnetism. Then, a magnetic sensor command is generated according to the result of the processing. In the error processing (S111), the front door open sensor or the front frame sensor determines whether the front door 23 or the front frame 23m is open. Then, a frame opening command is generated according to the result of the processing.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 performs output processing (S112), which will be described later, and executes other processing (S113). As other processing (S113), a power-off monitoring process when the power is turned off, a timer provided in the game RAM 104, and the like are performed. Further, as other processing (S113), a payout control processing for paying out prize balls to the player is performed. In the payout control process, a prize ball request signal is transmitted to the payout control board 170 in accordance with the winning of the game ball into each winning hole. That is, the payout control board 170 pays out prize balls based on the prize ball request signal. Then, the game control microcomputer 101 executes a power interruption monitoring process (S114) when the power supply is cut off, and ends this process. In the power interruption monitoring process (S114), when the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the power supply is cut off due to the drop in the monitoring voltage, the game information, the information on the total number of winning balls, the information on the total number of shot balls, and the number of difference balls. information, game stop flag information, etc. are stored in a predetermined storage area of the game RAM 104 . After that, prohibition of access to the game RAM 104 is set.

[Input Processing] As shown in FIG. 83, in the input processing (S102), first, it is determined whether or not the special reset switch 181 is ON, that is, whether or not a signal based on the pressing operation of the special reset switch 181 is received. (S201). If it is not ON (NO in S201), the process proceeds to step S204. On the other hand, if it is ON (YES in S201), non-erase clear processing is executed (S202). In the non-erase clear process (S202), the information on the total number of prize balls stored in the total number of prize balls storage unit 107a, the information on the total number of shot balls stored in the total number of shot balls storage unit 107b, and the number of difference balls The information on the difference number of balls stored in the storage unit 107c is cleared. Note that even if the non-erase clearing process (S202) is executed, the information on the total number of shot balls stored in the specific storage area (not shown) of the non-erase storage unit 107 is not cleared. This is because the information on the total number of shot balls is used for display on the 7-segment display 300 as described above.

Following step S202, a non-erase clear command is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 (S203), and the process proceeds to step S204. In this way, when the non-erase clear command is transmitted to the sub-control board 120, as shown in FIG. In step S204, other processes are executed and the process ends. In other processing (S204), the game control microcomputer 101, for example, takes in the detection signal from the lower tray full switch for detecting the fullness of the lower tray 35, and stores it in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 as lower tray full data. .

[Sensor detection process] In the sensor detection process (S104), the general winning opening sensor process, the gate sensor process, the second starting opening sensor process, the first starting opening sensor process, the first big winning opening sensor process, and the second big winning opening sensor process. Sensor processing, specific area sensor processing, and outlet sensor processing are sequentially performed. Then, commands generated in each process are set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 .

In the general winning opening sensor process, it is determined whether or not a game ball is detected by the general winning opening sensor 10a. Also, according to the result of the processing, a command for the general winning hole sensor is generated.

In the gate sensor process, it is determined whether or not the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 13a. When it is determined that the game ball is detected, the normal symbol random number indicated by the counter value of the normal symbol random number counter is acquired, and the acquired normal symbol random number is stored in the normal symbol reservation storage part 106 provided in the game RAM 104.例文帳に追加. In addition, when a predetermined number (for example, four) of normal symbol random numbers are stored in the normal pattern reservation storage unit 106, the newly acquired normal symbol random numbers are not stored. Also, a gate sensor command is generated according to the result of the processing.

In the second starting hole sensor process, it is determined whether or not the game ball is detected by the second starting hole sensor 12a. When it is determined that the game ball is detected, a special symbol 2 related random number consisting of a special symbol random number counter, a jackpot symbol type random number counter, a reach random number counter and a special symbol variation pattern random number counter is acquired, and the acquired special symbol 2 related random number is stored in the special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b provided in the game RAM 104. The special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b has a plurality of storage areas from the first area to the nth area (n is an integer of 2 or more, for example "4"), and the acquired special figure 2 related random number is the first They are stored in order from the area. In addition, when the Toku-zu 2 relation random number is stored up to the n-th area, the newly acquired Toku-zu 2 relation random number is not stored. In addition, the second look-ahead determination is performed using the obtained Toku-zu 2 related random number and the second look-ahead determination table. In addition, according to the result of the process, the special figure 2 reservation number command representing the number of special figure 2 relation random numbers (number of special figure 2 reservations) stored in the special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b and the second look-ahead determination Generate a command for the second starting port sensor including a second starting win command representing the result.

In the first starting hole sensor process, it is determined whether or not the game ball is detected by the first starting hole sensor 11a. When it is determined that a game ball is detected, a special symbol 1 related random number consisting of a special symbol random number counter, a jackpot symbol type random number counter, a reach random number counter and a special symbol variation pattern random number counter is acquired, and the acquired special symbol 1 related random number is stored in the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a provided in the game RAM 104. The special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a has a plurality of storage areas from the first area to the nth area (n is an integer of 2 or more, for example "4"), and the acquired special figure 1 related random number is the first They are stored in order from the area. It should be noted that, when the Toku-zu 1-related random number is stored up to the n-th area, the newly acquired Toku-zu 1-related random number is not stored. In addition, the first prefetching determination is performed using the acquired special figure 1 related random number and the first prefetching determination table. In addition, according to the result of the process, the special figure 1 reservation number command representing the number of special figure 1 relation random numbers (special figure 1 reservation number) stored in the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a and the first look-ahead determination Generate a command for the first start opening sensor including a first start win command representing the result.

In the first big winning hole sensor process, it is determined whether or not a game ball is detected by the first big winning hole sensor 14a. Also, a command for the first big winning hole sensor is generated according to the result of the processing.

In the second big winning hole sensor process, it is determined whether or not the game ball is detected by the second big winning hole sensor 15a. Also, a command for the second big winning opening sensor is generated according to the result of the processing.

In the specific area sensor process, it is determined whether or not a game ball is detected by the specific area sensor 16a. Also, a specific area sensor command is generated according to the result of the processing.

In the outlet sensor process, it is determined whether or not a game ball is detected by the outlet sensor.

[Differential ball number measurement process] As shown in Fig. 84, in the differential ball number measurement process (S106), first, the total number of prize balls count process for counting the total number of prize balls to be paid out to the player is executed (S301). Information on the counted total number of prize balls is stored in the total number of prize balls storage unit 107a (see FIG. 72). Next, based on the detection by the discharge port sensor, the total number of shot balls is counted (S302). Information on the counted total number of shot balls is stored in the total number of shot balls storage section 107b (see FIG. 72). Then, the total number of shot balls is subtracted from the total number of prize balls, and the number of difference balls is calculated (S303). Information on the calculated number of difference balls is stored in the number of difference number storage unit 107c (see FIG. 72).

Subsequently, in step S304, it is determined whether or not the over-prize notice flag is OFF. The over-prize notice flag indicates that the number of difference balls is 70000 or more. If it is ON (NO in S304), the process proceeds to step S308. On the other hand, if it is OFF (YES in S304), it is determined whether or not the difference number is 70000 or more (S305). If it is less than 70000 (NO in S305), the process proceeds to step S308. On the other hand, if it is 70000 or more (YES in S305), the over-prize ball notice flag is turned ON (S306), and the over-prize ball notice command is set in the output buffer of the game RAM104. As a result, when the over-prize ball notice command is transmitted to the sub-control board 120, the purple edge image EFa and the over-prize ball notice image KY are displayed on the display unit 50a as shown in FIG. 79(A). .

Subsequently, in step S308, it is determined whether or not the over-prize flag is OFF. The over-prize flag indicates that the number of difference balls is 80000 or more. If it is ON (NO in S308), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is OFF (YES in S308), it is determined whether or not the difference number is 80000 or more (S309). If the number is less than 80000 (NO in S309), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is 80000 or more (YES in S309), the over-prize flag is turned ON (S310). Then, the over-prize ball notification command is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 (S311), and this process is finished. As a result, when the over-prize ball notification command is transmitted to the sub-control board 120, as shown in FIG. 79(B), the red edge image EFb and the game stop notice image KH are displayed on the display section 50a.

[Special Action Processing] As shown in FIG. 85, in the special action processing (S107), the processing relating to the special figure display 81 and the big winning device (first big winning device 14D, second big winning device 15D) is divided into four stages. and assigns "special action status 1, 2, 3, 4" to each of those stages. Then, when the "special action status" is "1" (YES in S1301), the game control microcomputer 101 makes a special symbol standby including processing such as performing a jackpot determination and starting variable display of special symbols. Processing (S1302) is performed, and when the "special action status" is "2" (NO in S1301, YES in S1303), special design fluctuation processing including processing such as stopping display of special design (S1304) is performed, and when the "special action status" is "3" (NO in both S1301 and S1303, YES in S1305), a special symbol determination process (S1306) including processing such as shifting the game state is performed, When the "special action status" is "4" (NO in all of S1301, S1303 and S1305), special electric accessary product processing (S1307) including processing such as opening the big winning opening is performed. Note that the special operation status is "1" by default.

[Special Symbol Standby Processing] As shown in FIG. 86, in the special symbol standby processing (S1302), first, whether or not the number of reserved balls of the second starting port 12 (that is, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls) is "0". is determined (S1401). If the special figure 2 reserved ball number is "0" (S1401 YES), that is, if there is no memory of the random number counter value group acquired due to the winning of the second start port 12, the first start port 11 It is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls (that is, the number of reserved balls in special figure 1) is "0" (S1407). And, if the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is also "0" (YES in S1407), that is, if there is no memory of the random number counter value group acquired due to the winning of the first start port 11, the customer It is determined whether or not the wait flag is ON (S1416). The customer waiting flag indicates that the customer is waiting. If it is ON (YES in S1416), a customer waiting measurement process, which will be described later, is executed (S1419), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is OFF (NO at S1416), the customer waiting command is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 (S1417), the customer waiting flag is turned ON (S1418), and this processing is finished.

In step S1401, if the special figure 2 reserved ball number is not "0" (NO in S1401), that is, the storage of the random number counter value group acquired due to the winning of the second start port 12 (special figure 2 reservation information ) is one or more, special figure 2 jackpot determination processing (S1402) and special figure 2 variation pattern selection processing (S1403) are performed. After that, the game control microcomputer 101 decrements the number of special figure 2 reserved balls by 1 (S1404). Then, the storage location (storage area) of the various counter values in the special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b is shifted by one to the side to be read from the current position, and the special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b corresponds to the first reservation Clear the storage area to be used (S1405). Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 executes special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S1406), and proceeds to step S1413. In the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S1406), while setting the special operation status to "2", the fluctuation start command is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104, and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is started. In addition, the variation start command (also called the special figure 2 variation start command) set in the special figure 2 variation start process (S1406) includes the special figure stop pattern data set in the special figure 2 jackpot determination process (S1402). Information and information of the variation pattern set in the special figure 2 variation pattern selection process (S1403) (information including information on variation time) is included.

Also, if the number of special 2 reserved balls is "0" but the number of special 1 reserved balls is not "0" (YES in S1401 and NO in S1407), that is, there is no reservation information of special 2, If there is one or more memories of the random number counter value group acquired due to the winning of the 1 start port 11 (reservation information of special figure 1), special figure 1 jackpot determination processing (S1408) and special figure 1 fluctuation Pattern selection processing (S1409) is performed. After that, the game control microcomputer 101 decrements the number of special figure 1 reserved balls by 1 (S1410). Then, the storage location (storage area) of various counter values in the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a is shifted by one to the side read from the current position, and the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a corresponds to the fourth reservation The storage area to be read (the storage area farthest from the read side) is cleared (S1411). In this way, the first special figure reservation is digested in the order in which it was reserved. Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 executes special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (S1412), and proceeds to step S1413. In the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S1412), while setting the special operation status to "2", the fluctuation start command is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started. In addition, the variation start command (also called the special figure 1 variation start command) set in the special figure 1 variation start process (S1412) includes the special figure stop pattern data set in the special figure 1 jackpot determination process (S1408). Information and information of the variation pattern set in the special figure 1 variation pattern selection process (S1409) (information including information on variation time) is included.

When proceeding to step S1413, it is determined whether or not the customer waiting flag is ON, and if it is ON, the customer waiting flag is turned OFF (S1414). Then, a customer waiting counter clearing process for clearing (resetting) the value of the customer waiting counter to "0" is executed (S1415), and this process ends. The customer waiting counter is provided in the game RAM 104 and is used to measure the duration of the customer waiting state. It should be noted that the value of the customer waiting counter is cleared when the power is turned on again regardless of whether or not the RAM clear is executed.

[Customer Waiting Measuring Process] As shown in FIG. 87, in the customer waiting measuring process (S1419), first, a customer waiting counter increasing process for increasing the value of the customer waiting counter is executed (S1420). As a result, the game control microcomputer 101 can grasp the duration of the customer waiting state based on the value of the customer waiting counter. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the customer waiting state has continued for one hour or more. If it is determined not to continue (NO in S1421), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined to continue (YES in S1421), the non-erase clear process is executed (S1422), as in the process of step S202 described above (see FIG. 82). As a result, the information on the total number of prize balls stored in the total number of prize balls storage unit 107a, the information on the total number of shot balls stored in the total number of shot balls storage unit 107b, and the information on the total number of shot balls stored in the difference number storage unit 107c are stored. Information on the number of difference balls is cleared.

Subsequently, a non-erasing clear command is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 (S1423), and this process ends. In this way, when the non-erase clear command is transmitted to the sub-control board 120, the difference ball number reset notification image CLS is displayed in the lower part of the display section 50a as shown in FIG. 81(B).

[Special symbol determination process] As shown in FIG. 88, in the special symbol determination process (S1306), first, the special symbol stop time (stop time determined according to the special symbol variation pattern selected in step S1403 or S1409) has elapsed. It is determined whether or not it has been done (S1901). If the time has not elapsed (NO in S1901), this process ends immediately. As a result, the stop display of the special symbols is continued. On the other hand, if the stop time has elapsed (YES in S1901), a game state management process, which will be described later, is performed (S1902).

Next, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (S1903). If the jackpot flag is ON (YES in S1903), an opening pattern corresponding to the type of jackpot won is set (S1904). At this time, the value of a round counter that counts the number of unit open games (round games) executed during the jackpot game is set to the number of rounds corresponding to the type of jackpot won. Note that the setting of the release pattern (the set of data corresponding to the release pattern) may be performed for each round.

After step S1904, the game control microcomputer 101 performs game state reset processing (S1905). In the game state reset process (S1905), if the probability variation flag is ON, the probability variation flag is turned OFF, and if the time saving flag is ON, it is turned OFF. In other words, during execution of the jackpot game, it is controlled to the normal probability state and non-time saving state. Thereafter, in order to start the jackpot game, a jackpot opening command is set (S1906), and the opening of the jackpot game is started (S1907). Then, the special action status is set to "4" (S1908), and this processing ends.

Also, if the jackpot flag is not ON in step S1903 (NO in S1903), the jackpot game is not started, so the special action status is set to "1" (S1909), and this processing ends.

[Game State Management Processing] As shown in FIG. 89, in the game state management processing (S1902), first, it is determined whether or not the variable probability flag is ON (S2001). If it is ON (YES in S2001), the value of the probability variation counter that counts the number of variations of the special symbols executed during the high probability state is decreased by 1 (S2002), and whether the value of the probability variation counter is "0" Determine (S2003). If it is "0" (YES in S2003), the variable probability flag is turned OFF (S2004), and the process proceeds to step S2005. If the determination result in step S2001 or S2003 is NO, the process immediately proceeds to step S2005.

In step S2005, it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is ON. If it is ON (S2005 YES), the value of the time saving counter that counts the number of fluctuations of the special symbols executed during the time saving state is decreased by 1 (S2006), and it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter is "0" ( S2007). If it is "0" (YES in S2007), the time saving flag is turned OFF (S2008), and the process proceeds to step S2009. If the determination result in step S2005 or S2007 is NO, the process proceeds to step S2012.

In step S2009, it is determined whether or not the over-prize flag is ON. That is, it is determined whether or not the difference ball number is 80000 or more. If the over prize ball flag is not ON (NO in S2009), the process proceeds to step S2012. On the other hand, if the over prize ball flag is ON (YES in S2009), the game stop flag is turned ON (S2010), and the process proceeds to step S2011. In this way, when the difference ball number is 80000 or more and the high-probability high base state or the low-probability low base state ends, the game becomes unexecutable.

In step S2011, the game stop notification command is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104, and the process proceeds to step S2012. As a result, when the game stop notification command is transmitted to the sub-control board 120, the red background image RE and the error cancellation method image ERX are displayed on the display section 50a as shown in FIG. 78(A). Also, a game stop sound is output from the speaker 52 . Further, all the frame lamps 53 are lit in white, and all the board lamps 54 are extinguished.

In step S2012, a game state specification command including information on the current game state (information on whether the variable probability flag and the time saving flag are ON or OFF), information on the value of the variable probability counter and the value of the time saving counter, etc. The data is set in the output buffer of the RAM 104, and this processing ends.

[Output Processing] As shown in FIG. 90, in the output processing (S112), outer end signal output processing, which will be described later, is executed (S3001). Subsequently, as other output processing (S3002), commands set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 in each processing described above are output to the sub-control board 120 or the payout control board 170, and this processing ends.

[Outer End Signal Output Processing] As shown in FIG. 91, in the outer end signal output processing (S3001), it is determined whether or not the over-price announcement flag is ON (S3101). That is, it is determined whether or not the number of difference balls has reached 70,000. If the over-prize ball notice flag is not ON (NO in S3101), the process proceeds to step S3103. On the other hand, if the over-prize ball notice flag is ON (YES in S3101), the outer end signal output process for over-prize ball notice is executed (S3102), and the process proceeds to step S3102. In the outer end signal output process for overly awarded ball notice (S3102), the main control board 100 outputs an outer end signal indicating that the number of difference balls has reached 70000 (hereinafter referred to as "outer end signal for overly awarded ball notice"). , is transmitted to the external terminal board 160 via the payout control board 170 . As a result, the external terminal plate 160 transmits the over-prize-notifying outer end signal to the external unit GU (data counter, hall computer, etc.) by parallel communication. As a result, an employee of the game hall who is monitoring the hall computer is informed of a situation in which the over-prize prevention function can be activated when the number of remaining balls increases slightly (within 10000) in the pachinko machine of the second embodiment. It is possible to comprehend.

In step S3103, it is determined whether or not the over-prize flag is ON. That is, it is determined whether or not the number of difference balls has reached 80,000. If the over prize ball flag is not ON (NO in S3103), the process proceeds to step S3105. On the other hand, if the over-prize ball flag is ON (YES in S3103), an over-prize ball outer end signal output process is executed (S3104), and the process proceeds to step S3105. In the over-prize ball outer end signal output process (S3104), an outer end signal (hereinafter referred to as "over-prize ball outer end signal") indicating that the number of difference balls has reached 80000 is paid out from the main control board 100. It is transmitted to the external terminal board 160 via the control board 170 . As a result, the external terminal plate 160 transmits the over-prize-ball announcement outer end signal to the external unit GU by parallel communication. As a result, an employee of the game parlor who is monitoring the hall computer is told that the number of difference balls has reached 80000 in the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment and that the high-probability-high base state or the low-probability-low base state ends. It is possible to make the player grasp the situation in which the game becomes unexecutable.

In step S3105, it is determined whether or not the game stop flag is ON. In other words, it is determined whether or not the game is in an unexecutable state. If the game stop flag is not ON (NO in S3105), the process proceeds to step S3107. On the other hand, if the game stop flag is ON (YES at S3105), an outer end signal output process for game stop is executed (S3106), and the process proceeds to step S3107. In the game stop outer end signal output process (S3106), the outer end signal (hereinafter referred to as "game stop outer end signal") indicating that the game has become unexecutable due to the operation of the over-prize preventing function is mainly It is transmitted from the control board 100 to the external terminal board 160 via the payout control board 170 . Thereby, the external terminal board 160 transmits the game stop outer end signal to the external unit GU by parallel communication. As a result, it is possible for the employee of the game parlor who is monitoring the hall computer to grasp the situation in which the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment has become unexecutable due to the operation of the over-prize preventing function. .

In step S3107, it is determined whether or not the non-erase clear processing shown in step S203 or the non-erase clear processing shown in step S1422 has been executed. That is, the information on the total number of prize balls stored in the total number of prize balls storage unit 107a, the information on the total number of shot balls stored in the total number of shot balls storage unit 107b, and the information stored in the difference storage unit 107c It is determined whether or not the information on the difference number of balls has been cleared. If the non-erase clear process has not been executed (NO in S3107), the process proceeds to step S3109. On the other hand, if non-erase clear processing has been executed (YES in S3107), reset outer edge signal output processing is executed (S3108), and the process proceeds to step S3109. In the resetting outer edge signal output process (S3108), an outer edge signal indicating that the difference number of balls has been reset (hereinafter referred to as "reset outer edge signal") is sent from the main control board 100 via the payout control board 170. is transmitted to the external terminal board 160. Thereby, the external terminal board 160 transmits the resetting outer end signal to the external unit GU by parallel communication. As a result, it is possible for the employee of the game parlor who is monitoring the hall computer to grasp the situation in which the number of difference balls has been reset in the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment. A dedicated signal line is connected to the main control board 100, and through this dedicated signal line, an over-prize ball notice outer end signal, an over-prize ball outer end signal, and a game stop outer end signal , a reset outer end signal is transmitted from the main control board 100 to the external terminal board 160 via the payout control board 170 .

<Action and effect of the second embodiment>
As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, when the difference ball number is 80000 or more and the high-probability-high base state or the low-probability-low base state ends, the game becomes unexecutable. Therefore, for the player, the game is not suddenly stopped in the middle of the jackpot game state, or in the middle of the high-probability-high base state or the low-probability-high base state, and there is no particular big disadvantage. In this way, it is possible to provide the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment that does not award excessive prize balls while allowing the player to stop the game at a time when it is easy for the player to stop playing.

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, when the difference ball number is 80000 or more and the high base state (high probability base state, low probability height base state) ends, the game becomes unexecutable. Therefore, it is possible for the player to stop the game after the end of the high base state and before the number of balls in his possession decreases. In other words, after the transition from the high base state to the normal game state, the total number of shot balls increases, and a situation can be assumed in which the difference number of balls becomes less than 80,000. Therefore, it is possible to stop the game at the timing when the high base state ends so that the above situation does not occur.

By the way, if a certain player stops playing before the number of difference balls reaches 80,000, and the number of difference balls becomes 80,000 or more immediately after the player who plays later starts playing, it will be a terrible situation. situation. Therefore, according to the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, the measured difference number of balls is reset based on the establishment of the reset condition not triggered by turning on the power. Specifically, when the special reset switch 181 is pressed down, or when the customer waiting state continues for one hour, the difference number of balls is reset. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from being stopped immediately after starting the game for the player who has played the game later, thereby preventing a serious situation from occurring.

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, when the employee of the gaming hall presses the RAM clear switch 119 when the power is turned on, the gaming information (for example, information on the gaming state such as a high probability state, special figure pending information such as the number of wins and the judgment result of the jackpot) is erased, but the information of the number of difference balls stored in the difference number storage unit 107c is not erased. Therefore, even if the game information must be deleted due to a problem or the like during business hours, it is possible not to delete the calculated difference number of balls.

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, as described above, even if the RAM clear is executed, the measured difference ball number is not erased. However, when an employee of the game arcade presses the special reset switch 181, the measured difference ball number can be deleted. In this way, the employee of the game hall can delete the measured number of difference balls at any timing.

<Modified example of the second embodiment>
A modification of the second embodiment will be described below. In addition, in the description of the modified example of the second embodiment, the same reference numerals are given to the same configurations as those of the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment, and the description thereof is omitted. Of course, configurations according to modifications of the second embodiment may be combined as appropriate. Moreover, technical features in the second embodiment and its modifications can be deleted as appropriate unless they are described as essential in this specification. In addition, the configuration included in the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the basic embodiment described above and the configuration included in the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the first embodiment described above are the second embodiment and its It can be adopted for a game machine grasped from the modified example.

In the second embodiment, it is configured as a so-called V certain machine (a gaming machine controlled to a high probability state based on the passage of the game ball to the specific area 16 (V area)), but based on the type of the winning jackpot symbol It may be configured as a game machine in which the transition to the high probability state is determined by In addition, in the second embodiment, it is configured as a so-called ST machine (a game machine in which the high probability state ends according to the number of times the special symbol changes), but once it is controlled to the high probability state, the high probability state is reached until the next jackpot game starts. It may be configured as a game machine in which control to the probability state continues (so-called variable probability loop type machine) or a falling machine (a game machine in which the high probability state ends depending on the lottery result). Further, it may be configured as a game machine in which a small winning game is executed in which the big winning opening is opened for a maximum of 1.8 seconds when a small winning is won in a lottery of special symbols. In this case, the gaming machine may be configured such that a big winning game (second type big winning game) is executed when a game ball entering the big winning opening by executing the small winning game passes through a specific area in the big winning opening. . A jackpot game (type 1 jackpot game) is executed when a jackpot is won in a special pattern lottery, and a jackpot game (type 2 jackpot game) is executed when a game ball passes through a specific area in a big winning opening. It may be configured as a two-type jackpot game.

In the second embodiment, the number of difference balls is 80000 or more, and when transitioning from the high-probability base state (advantageous game state) to the normal game state (see FIG. 76), or the low-probability base state (advantageous game state ) to the normal game state, the over-prize preventing function is activated. However, the over-prize prevention function may be activated not only when the advantageous game state shifts to the normal game state, but simply when the advantageous game state ends. For example, when moving from a high-probability base state (advantageous playing state) to a low-probability-high base state, or when shifting from a high-probability-high base state to a high-probability-low base state, the over-prize ball prevention function is activated. You can do it.

Also, for example, as shown in FIG. 92, it is assumed that there were 4 (predetermined number), which is the maximum number of special figures 2 reserved, when shifting from the high probability high base state to the normal game state. The lottery of the special figure 2 is executed with priority over the lottery of the special figure 1, and is set more advantageous to the player than the lottery of the special figure 1. - 特許庁In this case, when the high probability/high base state shifts to the normal game state, the lottery of the special figure 2 will be executed four times, and it can be said that the player is still in an advantageous state. Therefore, in this case, it is assumed that the game is in an advantageous game state until all the special figure 2 reserves (special figure 2 remaining reserves) remaining when the game state is shifted to the normal game state are consumed. Then, when the special figure 2 remaining reservation is all digested (when all the fluctuation display and stop display of the second special symbol based on the special figure 2 remaining reservation are completed), the over prize ball prevention function operates (game may be disabled) (see FIG. 92). In addition, the special figure 1 lottery is preferentially executed over the special figure 2 lottery, and the order in which the game ball wins the first start opening 11 or the second start opening 12 A lottery or a lottery of the special figure 2 may be executed.

In particular, it is a 1 type 2 type mixing machine, and when a small win is won in the lottery of special figure 2, a 2 type big win game is practically always executed (a game ball can pass through a specific area). When configured, as shown in FIG. 92, it is preferable that the over-prize ball prevention function operates when the special figure 2 remaining reservation is all digested in the normal game state. Even if it shifts from a high base state (time saving state) to a normal game state, it is because 2 types of jackpot games are very easy to be performed until all special figure 2 remaining reservation is digested. That is, if the game becomes unexecutable due to the actuation of the over-prize preventing function at the timing when the high base state ends, the chance of winning the second kind of jackpot game is lost, which makes it difficult for the player. It should be noted that the upper limit number of special figure 2 pending is not limited to four, for example, may be one, it can be changed as appropriate.

In the second embodiment, the timing at which the over-prize prevention function operates is when the high-probability-high base state ends or when the low-probability-high base state ends. However, the over-prize prevention function may be activated only when the high-probability/high-base state ends. In this case, it is possible to stop the game only when the so-called "rush state (continuous period)" ends. Also, for example, when the number of difference balls is 80,000 or more and the state shifts to the customer waiting state, or when the customer waiting state continues for a certain period of time, the over-prize preventing function may be activated. Further, for example, the number of extra balls may be 80000 or more, and the over-prize preventing function may be activated at the timing when the jackpot gaming state is finished. Further, for example, at the timing when the difference number of balls becomes 80000 or more, the over-prized ball prevention function may be activated.

In the second embodiment, the first reset condition (see FIG. 77A) is that the special reset switch 181 (special operation means) is pressed down, or the second reset condition is that the customer waiting state continues for one hour (predetermined time). When the second reset condition (see FIG. 77(B)) is established, the difference number of balls is reset (erased). However, the reset conditions are not limited to those described above, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, as described above, at the timing when the jackpot gaming state ends or when the number of difference balls reaches 80000 or more, when the over-prize prevention function is activated, as shown in FIG. When shifting from the guaranteed high base state (advantageous game state) to the normal game state, the difference ball number may be reset. In this case, the number of difference balls is reset when the so-called "rush state (continuous period)" ends, so only when the number of difference balls reaches 80000 (reference number) during the rush state in one time , it is possible to activate the over-prize ball prevention function. In addition to the high-probability-high base state and low-probability-high base state, when shifting from an advantageous game state such as a jackpot game state or a high-probability-low base state to a normal game state, the number of difference balls may be reset. . Further, the difference number may be reset by pressing the RAM clear switch 119 or rotating the setting key cylinder 180 .

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 93(B), when the normal game state continues for a specific time (for example, 1 hour), the difference ball number may be reset. In this case, if the specific time (for example, one hour) continues in the normal game state, the situation advantageous to the player has not continued for a while. Therefore, in this case, by resetting the number of difference balls, it is possible to prevent the number of difference balls from reaching 80000 or more for a while. Note that the specific time described above is not limited to one hour, and can be changed as appropriate. Also, for example, when the number of variations of the special symbol reaches a specific number in the normal game state, the difference ball number may be reset. Further, for example, the difference ball number may be reset by turning the power OFF and ON (turning on the power again).

Further, for example, when the game control microcomputer 101 determines that it is a predetermined reference time (for example, 9:00 am), the number of difference balls may be reset. In this case, it is possible to automatically eliminate the difference number of balls without forcing the staff of the game hall to perform any operation. Note that the reference time described above is not limited to 9:00 am, and can be changed as appropriate.

In the second embodiment, a special reset switch 181 (special operation means) for resetting the number of difference balls is arranged on the main control board 100 (see FIG. 74). However, if a signal based on the operation of the special operation means is input to the game control microcomputer 101, the location of the special operation means for resetting the difference ball number can be changed as appropriate. Therefore, the special operation means may be arranged, for example, on the payout control board 170 or may be arranged on a dedicated board.

In the second embodiment, the measured difference number of balls was not displayed by the display means. However, the measured difference number of balls may be displayed by the display means. For example, the game control microcomputer 101 may display the measured difference ball number on the display device 8 (see FIG. 4) or the 7-segment display device 300 (see FIG. 75). In this case, for example, when the number of difference balls is 0 to 50000 (first range), the first mode is displayed on the display device 8 or 7 segment display 300, and the number of difference balls is 50001 to 70000. If it is (second range), display the second mode on the display device 8 or 7-segment display 300, and if the number of difference balls is 70001 to 80000 (third range), display The third mode may be displayed on the device 8 or 7 segment display 300 . Further, for example, the game control microcomputer 101 transmits information on the number of difference balls (or information on the number of total winning balls, information on the total number of shot balls) to the sub-control board 120, and the microcomputer 121 for effect control performs image display. A display means such as the device 50 may display the number of difference balls. Also, for example, the game control microcomputer 101 transmits to the sub-control board 120 information on the number of awarded balls paid out (or the number of awarded balls to be paid out) and information on detection of the outlet sensor. Then, the effect control microcomputer 121 may calculate the number of difference balls based on these pieces of information, and display the number of difference balls on display means such as the image display device 50 or the like.

Also, the game control microcomputer 101 may display the difference ball number on the 7-segment display 300 as in the modification shown in FIG. That is, in this modification, information on the number of difference balls is divided into four sections (predetermined sections) and stored in four storage areas of the number of difference number storage section 107c of the non-erased storage section 107, respectively. . In the first storage area, the number of difference balls up to the present time since the power was turned on this time is stored. In the second storage area, the difference number of balls from when the power was turned on last time (one time before) to when the power was cut off last time is stored. In the third storage area, the difference number of balls from when the power was turned on two times before (two times before) to when the power was cut off two times before is stored. In the 4th (N) storage area, the difference number of balls from when the power was turned on two last times (3 times before) to when the power was cut off two times before last is stored. In this way, each time the power is turned off and on, the measured ball difference number is shifted and stored, and the difference ball number stored in the fourth storage area is erased. It should be noted that the information on the difference number of balls stored in the first to fourth storage areas is not erased even if the RAM clear is executed.

Then, in this modification, the number of difference balls stored in the first storage area, the number of difference balls stored in the second storage area, the number of difference balls stored in the third storage area, 4 The number of difference balls stored in the th storage area is displayed in the right two digits (the third display area 330 and the fourth display area 340) of the 7-segment display 300 by switching in order in units of 1,000 balls. be. Specifically, the 7-segment display 300 displays, for example, "bL36" for 5 seconds, as shown in FIG. 94(A). This indicates that the current normal base is 36%. Next, as shown in FIG. 94(B), for example, "b134" is displayed for 5 seconds. This indicates that the normal base one time ago was 36%. Next, as shown in FIG. 94(C), for example, "b238" is displayed for 5 seconds. This indicates that the normal base two times ago was 38%. Next, as shown in FIG. 94(D), for example, "b235" is displayed for 5 seconds. This indicates that the normal base 3 times ago is 38%.

Subsequently, the 7-segment display 300 displays, for example, "cL20" for 5 seconds as shown in FIG. 94(E). As a result, it is indicated that the difference number of balls from the time when the power is turned on to the present time is 20000. Next, as shown in FIG. 94(F), for example, "c100" is displayed for 5 seconds. This indicates that the number of difference balls from the last time (one time before) when the power was turned on until the last time when the power was cut off is "0". When the number of difference balls is smaller than "0" because the total number of shot balls is larger than the total number of prize balls, "0" is displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 94(G), for example, "c265" is displayed for 5 seconds. This indicates that the number of difference balls from the time the power was turned on the second time (two times before) until the power was cut off the time before last is 65,000. Next, as shown in FIG. 94(H), for example, "c348" is displayed for 5 seconds. This indicates that the number of difference balls from the time when the power was turned on two times before last (three times before) to when the power was turned off two times before last is 48,000. After that, FIGS. 94A to 94H are repeatedly displayed every 5 seconds.

In the modified example described above, each time the power is turned off and on (returned on), the measured number of difference balls is shifted and stored, and the number of difference balls stored in the 4th (N) storage area. is deleted. However, each time the RAM is cleared, the measured ball difference number is shifted and stored, and the difference ball number stored in the 4th (N) storage area may be erased. . Alternatively, when the game control microcomputer determines that it is a predetermined specified time (for example, 9:00 am), the measured difference ball number is shifted and stored, and stored in the 4th (N) storage area. The difference number of balls that has been played may be deleted. It should be noted that N described above can be appropriately changed as long as it is a natural number of 2 or more.

In the modified example described above, as shown in FIG. 94, the 7-segment display 300 automatically switches the display of the number of difference balls every five seconds. However, the display of the difference number may be switched by operating a predetermined operation means such as pressing the RAM clear switch 119 or rotating the setting key cylinder 180 . Further, the display of the normal base and the display of the number of difference balls may be switched by operating a predetermined operation means.

In the second embodiment, when the number of difference balls reaches 70000 (predetermined number), the performance mode shown in FIG. However, the effect mode indicating that the over-prized ball prevention function is approaching the operation is not limited to the effect mode shown in FIG. 79(A), and can be changed as appropriate. For example, a special sound from the speaker 52 (for example, "The number of balls is 70000") or a special light emission mode of the light emitting means such as the board lamp 54 and the frame lamp 53 are approaching the operation of the over-prize prevention function. may be shown. Further, as the number of difference balls increases, it may be indicated that the over-prize prevention function is approaching the operation by means of an effect mode that changes in multiple stages.

In the second embodiment, when the difference ball number reaches 80000 (reference number), the game can be stopped by the effect mode shown in FIG. 79(B). However, the presentation mode indicating the situation in which the game may be stopped is not limited to the presentation mode shown in FIG. 79(B), and can be changed as appropriate. For example, a special voice from the speaker 52 (for example, "The number of balls is 80,000") or a special light emitting mode of the board lamp 54, the frame lamp 53, or the like may be used to indicate a situation in which the game may be stopped. good.

In the second embodiment, when the over-prized ball prevention function is activated, the game is rendered unexecutable by the effect mode shown in FIG. 78(A). However, the effect mode indicating the state in which the game cannot be executed is not limited to the effect mode shown in FIG. 78(A), and can be changed as appropriate. For example, an image indicating "game cannot be executed" may be displayed on the display unit 50a, or a special sound (for example, "game cannot be executed") may be output from the speaker 52. FIG.

In the second embodiment, even if the RAM is cleared, the information on the number of difference balls stored in the number of difference number storage unit 107c is not erased. However, even if the information on the number of difference balls is stored in a predetermined storage area (erasing storage section) of the game RAM 104 and the information on the number of difference balls is cleared when the RAM is cleared. good. That is, the conditions for resetting the number of difference balls include the execution of RAM clearing, or the reset condition for resetting the number of difference balls is limited to the execution of RAM clearing. Also good.

In the second embodiment, when the over-prize ball prevention function is activated, the game control microcomputer 101 not only stops the game control process (steps S102 to S108, see FIG. 82), but also shoots a game ball. The firing control process (the process of step S109, see FIG. 82) for causing it to be stopped was also stopped. However, when the over-prize prevention function operates, the game control microcomputer 101 may stop the game control process, but may not stop the shooting control process. However, in this case, the game ball flows down the game area 6 by the player's rotating operation to the handle 72k even if the over-prize ball prevention function is activated. Therefore, there is a problem that it is difficult to immediately grasp the situation in which the game cannot be executed. Therefore, by stopping both the game control process and the launch control process, it is possible for the player to immediately grasp the situation in which the game cannot be executed. Further, for example, when the over-prize preventing function is activated, the game control microcomputer 101 stops the firing control process, but may not stop the game control process. However, in this case, the game ball may still flow down the game area 6 at the timing when the over-prize ball prevention function is activated, and the game ball may enter various prize-winning holes and give the player a prize. There is a problem that spheres can be given. Therefore, by stopping both the game control process and the launch control process, it is possible to ensure that no prize balls are awarded to the player after the over-prize prevention function is activated.

In the second embodiment, the game control microcomputer 101 counted the total number of shot balls based on the detection of the outlet sensor. However, based on the detection of the sensors (first starting hole sensor, second starting hole sensor, general winning hole sensor, first big winning hole sensor, second big winning hole sensor 15a) that detect winning to various winning holes , the total number of shot balls may be counted. Alternatively, if a return ball prevention portion is provided at the upper end portion of the inner wall portion 1B, and a sensor capable of detecting game balls is provided in this return ball prevention portion, based on the detection of this sensor, the total The number of shot balls may be counted.

In the second embodiment, when the number of difference balls reaches 70000, the over-price announcement image KY is displayed as shown in FIG. 79(A). However, regardless of the number of difference balls, the game cannot be executed on the condition that the number of difference balls is 80000 or more in the customer waiting effect, the effect during the jackpot game (for example, the ending effect), the notice effect accompanying the variable effect, etc. A presentation explaining what will happen may be executed. This is because such an effect makes it possible to inform the players and employees of the game parlors in advance that the pachinko game machine has a function of preventing over-prized balls.

In the second embodiment, the information on the total number of winning balls, the information on the total number of shot balls, and the information on the number of difference balls are stored in the non-erase storage section 107 of the game RAM 104, so that even if the RAM is cleared, The information on the total number of prize balls, the information on the total number of shot balls, and the information on the number of difference balls are not deleted. However, by storing the information on the total number of winning balls, the information on the total number of shot balls, and the information on the number of difference balls in a non-volatile storage means (for example, FRAM (registered trademark)) provided separately from the game RAM 104, Even if the RAM is cleared, the information on the total number of winning balls, the information on the total number of shot balls, and the information on the number of difference balls may not be erased.

In the second embodiment, the difference ball number is counted at any time after the power is turned on. However, the timing to start counting the number of difference balls may be from the so-called first win (winning the jackpot in the normal game state). In this case, the minus amount of the number of difference balls (that is, the total number of shot balls) from when the power is turned on until the first hit is not counted. Therefore, it is possible to make the difference number of balls, which triggers the operation of the over-prize prevention function, the same as the number of balls held after the first hit.

In the second embodiment, the game control microcomputer 101 counts the total number of prize balls and the total number of shot balls separately, and subtracts the total number of shot balls from the total number of prize balls to calculate the number of difference balls. . However, the difference ball number may be measured (counted) using only the difference ball counter for counting the difference ball number. That is, every time there is a prize ball, the value of the prize ball is added to the difference ball counter. Also, each time a game ball is shot (every time the discharge port sensor detects it), the value of the difference ball counter is decremented. In this way, the number of difference balls may be measured without separately counting the total number of prize balls and the total number of shot balls. In this case, the value of the differential ball counter may be set to always be "0" or more so as not to become negative. Then, as described above, it is possible to make the difference number of balls, which triggers the operation of the over-prize prevention function, substantially the same as the number of balls held after the first hit.

In the second embodiment, the over-prize preventing function is activated under the condition that the number of difference balls (specific count number) is 80000 (reference number) or more. However, the number of difference balls (reference number), which is the reference for activating the over-prize prevention function, is not limited to 80000, and may be 50000, 100000, or 120000, and can be changed as appropriate.

In the second embodiment, the specific measurement number that triggers the activation of the over-prize preventing function is the number of difference balls, which is the difference between the total number of prize balls and the total number of shot balls. However, the specific count number can be changed as appropriate if it is based on the number of prize balls awarded to the player from the viewpoint of not giving excessive prize balls. For example, the specific measurement number may be a game state such as a jackpot game state, or a difference ball count limited to a certain period such as a consecutive game period. Also, for example, the specific measurement number is the total number of prize balls in all game states, the total number of prize balls limited to a certain game state such as a jackpot game state, or the total number of prize balls limited to a certain period such as a consecutive period. It can be. Also, for example, the specific count may be based on all gaming states, limited to a certain gaming state such as a jackpot gaming state, or limited to a certain period of time such as a consecutive game period.

In the second embodiment, the pachinko game machine is configured as a non-enclosed pachinko machine in which the game balls housed inside flow down the game area 6 and then are discharged to the outside of the pachinko game machine. However, the pachinko gaming machine may be configured as an enclosed pachinko machine that can circulate and enter the game area again after the game balls housed inside flow down the game area. In this case, a frame control board corresponding to the payout control board 170 is provided with a 7-segment display. Therefore, the 7-segment display may display the number of difference balls (specific count number). In addition, a 6-digit 7-segment display that displays the number of balls held is placed at the bottom of the front door. Therefore, the 6-digit 7-segment display may display the difference ball number (specific count number). It should be noted that "measurement" in this embodiment has the same meaning as counting.

<Invention shown in the second embodiment>
The above-described second embodiment and its modifications show inventions of the following means. In the description of the means described below, the corresponding structural names and expressions in the above-described embodiments, etc., and the reference numerals used in the drawings are added in parentheses for reference. However, the constituent elements of each invention are not limited to this appendix.

<Means X>
The invention according to means X1 is
In a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment) comprising game control means (game control microcomputer 101) capable of controlling a game,
The game control means is
It is possible to measure a specific count number (number of difference balls) based on the number of prize balls given to the player,
When the specific count number is equal to or greater than a predetermined reference number (80000) and the advantageous gaming state (high-probability-high base state, low-probability-high base state) that is advantageous to the player ends (see FIG. 76), the game is disabled (stops game control processing and launch control processing).

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, when the specific count number based on the number of prize balls is equal to or greater than the reference number and the advantageous game state ends, the game becomes unexecutable. Therefore, for the player, the game is not suddenly stopped in the middle of the advantageous game state, and it is not a particularly large disadvantage. Thus, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls.

The invention according to means X2 is
In the gaming machine described in means X1,
The game control means is
When the specific count number is equal to or greater than the reference number and the advantageous game state (high-probability-high base state, low-probability-high base state) shifts to a normal game state, the game is controlled to be unexecutable. It is a game machine.

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, when the specific count number based on the number of winning balls is equal to or greater than the reference number and the advantageous game state is shifted to the normal game state, the game becomes unexecutable. Therefore, it is possible to stop the game at a timing when it is easy for the player to stop the game.

The invention according to means X3 is
In the gaming machine described in means X1,
The game control means is
When it is determined to be a hit by the hit determination process, a winning game (jackpot game) can be executed,
The specific count number is equal to or greater than the reference number, and the hit determination process that has been suspended by a predetermined number (for example, four) when the advantageous game state is shifted to the normal game state is completed in the normal game state. This gaming machine is characterized by controlling the game to be unexecutable (see FIG. 76) when it is pressed.

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, when the specific count number is equal to or greater than the reference number, and the advantageous game state is shifted to the normal game state, the hit determination process may be suspended for a predetermined number. In this case, it is regarded as a substantially advantageous game state until the hit determination processing that has been suspended for a predetermined number is completed in the normal game state, and the game is stopped when the substantially advantageous game state ends. Is possible.

The invention according to means X4 is
In the gaming machine described in means X1,
Equipped with an entrance (second starting port 12),
The game control means is capable of controlling a ball-entering easy state (high base state) in which a game ball is more likely to enter the ball-entering opening than in a normal game state,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the advantageous gaming state is the easy ball-entering state.

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, when the specific count number is equal to or greater than the reference number and the easy-to-enter state in which the game ball enters the ball-entering opening more easily than in the normal game state ends, the game becomes unexecutable. . Therefore, it is possible for the player to stop the game after the easy-ball-entering state ends and before the number of balls in his possession decreases.

By the way, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-209170, the player may acquire excessive prize balls by continuing the game. In this case, the game machine does not prevent the player from receiving excessive prize balls. Therefore, the invention according to the means X1 to X4 is capable of measuring a specific count number based on the number of prize balls given to the player in the game machine described in JP-A-2017-209170. 2, when the specific count number is equal to or greater than a predetermined reference number and the advantageous game state advantageous to the player ends, the game is controlled to be unexecutable. As a result, it is possible to solve the problem of providing a gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls to the player (to produce an effect).

<Means Y>
The invention according to means Y1 is
In a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment) comprising game control means (game control microcomputer 101) capable of controlling a game,
The game control means is
It is possible to measure a specific count number (number of difference balls) based on the number of prize balls given to the player,
Based on the specific count becomes a predetermined reference number (80000) or more, the game may be controlled to be unexecutable (game control processing and firing control processing are stopped) (see FIG. 76),
Based on the establishment of the reset conditions not triggered by power-on (the first reset condition that the special reset switch 181 is pressed and the second reset condition that the customer waiting state continues for one hour), the specific measurement number measured This gaming machine is characterized by erasing (see FIGS. 77(A) and (B)).

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, the game becomes unexecutable when the specific count number based on the number of prize balls becomes equal to or greater than the reference number. As a result, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls. However, if a certain player stops playing the game before the specific count reaches the reference number, and the player who plays the game later starts playing, the specific count becomes equal to or greater than the reference number. It becomes a terrible situation. Therefore, the measured specific number of measurements is erased based on the establishment of a reset condition not triggered by power-on. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from being stopped immediately after starting the game for the player who has played the game later, thereby preventing a serious situation from occurring.

The invention according to means Y2 is
Equipped with operable special operation means (special reset switch 181),
The game machine is characterized in that the reset condition is that the special operation means is operated (see FIG. 77(A)).

According to the gaming machine of this configuration, for example, after a certain player has finished playing, the employee of the gaming parlor operates the special operation means, and the measured specific count number is erased. As a result, it is possible for a player who plays the game later to prevent the game from being stopped immediately after starting the game.

The invention according to means Y3 is
In the gaming machine according to means Y1,
The game control means can be controlled to a customer waiting state after stopping and displaying an identification pattern (special pattern) indicating the result of the hit determination process,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the reset condition is that the customer waiting state continues for a predetermined time (for example, one hour) (see FIG. 77(B)).

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, when the customer waiting state continues for a predetermined period of time, assuming that the player has changed, the measured specific count number is erased. As a result, it is possible for a player who plays the game later to prevent the game from being stopped immediately after starting the game.

The invention according to means Y4 is
In the gaming machine according to means Y1,
The game machine is characterized in that the reset condition is to shift from an advantageous game state (high probability/high base state) advantageous to the player to a normal game state (see FIG. 77(A)).

According to the gaming machine of this configuration, when the advantageous game state that is advantageous for the player shifts to the normal game state, the measured specific counting number is erased. In this way, once the situation in which the advantageous game state continues is over, it is possible to prevent the specific count number from exceeding the reference number for a while.

The invention according to means Y5 is
In the gaming machine according to means Y1,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the reset condition is that a specific time (for example, one hour) continues in the normal game state (see FIG. 77(B)).

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, if the specific time continues in the normal game state, the situation advantageous to the player does not last for a while. Therefore, in this case, it is possible to prevent the specific number of measurements from exceeding the reference number for a while by deleting the specific number of measurements.

By the way, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-209170, the player may acquire excessive prize balls by continuing the game. In this case, the game machine does not prevent the player from receiving excessive prize balls. Therefore, the invention according to the means Y1 to Y5 is a gaming machine described in JP-A-2017-209170. , the game may be controlled to be unexecutable based on the number of specific measurements exceeding a predetermined reference number, and the specific measurement measured based on the establishment of a reset condition not triggered by turning on the power. The difference is that the number is erased. As a result, it is possible to solve the problem of providing a gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls to the player (to produce an effect).

<Means Z>
The invention according to means Z1 is
A game control means (game control microcomputer 101) capable of controlling a game;
In a game machine (pachinko game machine of the second embodiment) comprising an operable specific operation means (RAM clear switch 119),
The game control means is
It is possible to measure a specific count number (number of difference balls) based on the number of prize balls given to the player,
The game may be controlled to be unexecutable (game control processing and launch control processing are stopped) based on the specific count number becoming a predetermined reference number (80000) or more,
A game characterized in that game information relating to a game is erased (RAM clearing is executed) based on the operation of the specific operation means when the power is turned on, but the measured specific measurement number is not erased. machine.

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, the game becomes unexecutable when the specific count number based on the number of prize balls becomes equal to or greater than the reference number. As a result, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not award an excessive number of prize balls. Here, when the employee of the game parlor operates the specific operation means when the power is turned on, although the game information related to the game is erased, the measured specific measurement number is not erased. Therefore, even in a situation where the game state related to the game must be erased due to a malfunction or the like during business hours, it is possible not to erase the measured specific measurement number.

The invention according to means Z2 is
In the gaming machine according to means Z1,
Equipped with operable special operation means (special reset switch 181),
The game control means is
The game machine is characterized in that the measured specific count can be erased (see FIG. 77(A)) based on the operation of the special operation means.

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, the measured specific measurement number is erased by the employee of the gaming facility operating the special operation means. As a result, even if the game state related to the game is not erased, the employee of the game hall can erase the measured specific measurement number at an arbitrary timing.

The invention according to means Z3 is
In the gaming machine according to means Z1 or means Z2,
The game control means is
The game machine is characterized in that when it is determined that it is a predetermined reference time (for example, 9:00 am), the measured specific count can be erased.

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, when the predetermined reference time comes, the measured specific count is erased. Therefore, it is possible to automatically erase the measured specific number of measurements without having the employee of the game arcade perform any operation.

The invention according to means Z4 is
In the gaming machine according to means Z1 to means Z4,
The game control means is
The specific number of measurements is stored in order by being classified for each predetermined period (period from power-on to power-off) from 1st to N (4)th,
Along with erasing the specific number of measurements for the Nth predetermined period, the specific number of measurements for the first to (N-1)th predetermined period is erased, and the specific number of measurements for the second to Nth predetermined period is erased. , and the measurement of the specific number of times in the first predetermined period is started.

According to the gaming machine with this configuration, it is possible to store the specific counts for each predetermined period from the 1st to the Nth. On top of that, as the number of specific measurements in the N-th predetermined period is erased, the number of specific measurements in the first to (N-1)th predetermined periods is the number of specific measurements in the second to N-th predetermined periods Shifted as counts. Then, the measurement of the specific number of measurements for the first predetermined period is started. In this way, it is possible to automatically update the number of specific measurements for each predetermined period from the 1st to the Nth without having the staff of the game arcade operate it.

By the way, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-209170, the player may acquire excessive prize balls by continuing the game. In this case, the game machine does not prevent the player from receiving excessive prize balls. Therefore, the invention according to the means Z1 to Z4 is capable of measuring a specific count number based on the number of prize balls given to the player for the game machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-209170. , the game may be controlled to be unexecutable based on the specific count number being equal to or greater than a predetermined reference number, and the game information related to the game may be controlled based on the specific operation means being operated when the power is turned on. is erased, but the specific number of measurements that have been made is not erased. As a result, it is possible to solve the problem of providing a gaming machine that does not award excessive prize balls to the player (to produce an effect).

13. Third Embodiment Hereinafter, a pachinko game machine of a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 95 to 103. FIG. In the description of the pachinko game machine of the third embodiment, the same components as those of the pachinko game machine PY1 of the first embodiment and the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof is omitted. The pachinko game machine of the third embodiment is equipped with a function (referred to as an advantageous setting function) that allows the game parlor (hall) side to intentionally set a game state advantageous to the player. Unless otherwise stated, the pachinko game machine PY1 of the basic embodiment described above is also applied to the third embodiment.

The pachinko game machine of the third embodiment is a so-called one-kind-two-kind machine. In the pachinko game machine of the third embodiment, when a small win is won in the lottery of special figure 2 (lottery related to the second start port 12), a small win game for opening the second big winning port 15 is executed, and a small win When the game ball passes through the specific area 16 in the second big winning hole 15 during the game (when there is a so-called V passage), a jackpot game including a round game for opening the first big winning hole 14 is executed a plurality of times. .

<Types of stop symbols>
First, the types of stop symbols in the third embodiment will be described. The pachinko game machine of the third embodiment determines the special symbol random number acquired based on the winning to the first start port 11 or the second start port 12 according to the jackpot determination table shown in FIG. It determines whether it is a big hit or not, and whether it is a small hit or not. As shown in FIG. 95 (A), in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) based on the winning of the first starting port 11, a jackpot (so-called 1st kind jackpot) is won with a predetermined probability, but a small You don't get elected. On the other hand, in the lottery of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) based on the winning to the second starting port 12, the small hit is always won. That is, in the lottery of the special figure 2, the jackpot (so-called 1 type jackpot) is not elected, and there is no loss.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the third embodiment, when it is determined that the jackpot is won, the pattern type random number (jackpot pattern type random number) is determined according to the jackpot pattern type determination table shown in FIG. to decide. In the lottery of special figure 1, "special figure 1_jackpot design S" is determined at a rate of 50%, and "special figure 1_jackpot pattern T" is determined at a rate of 50%. In addition, the result of the lottery of the special figure 2 does not include the jackpot (1 type jackpot). If the type of the winning jackpot pattern is different, the opening pattern of the jackpot opening in the first jackpot game and the setting regarding the game state after the jackpot game are different (see FIG. 96). This point will be described later.

In addition, the pachinko gaming machine of the third embodiment determines the type of the small winning symbol by determining the symbol type random number according to the small winning symbol type determination table shown in FIG. do. Specifically, in the lottery of special figure 2, at a rate of 80%, "special figure 2_small winning pattern s" is determined, and at a rate of 20%, "special figure 2_small winning pattern t" is determined. If the type of the winning small winning pattern is different, the opening pattern of the big winning opening in the small winning game or the two-kind big winning game and the setting regarding the game state after the big winning game are different (see FIG. 96). This point will be described later.

Further, when the pachinko gaming machine of the third embodiment determines that neither the big hit nor the small win has been won (that is, when it is determined to be lost), the symbol type random number is changed to the losing symbol type shown in FIG. 95 (D). By judging according to the judgment table, the type of the missing symbol is determined. In the lottery of special figure 1, at a rate of 80%, "special figure 1 _ lost pattern S" is decided, at a rate of 10%, "special figure 1 _ lost pattern T" is decided, at a rate of 10%, " Special Figure 1_Losing Design U” is determined. In addition, loss is not included in the result of the lottery of special figure 2. The difference in the types of the losing symbols affects the settings regarding the game state after the stopping symbols are displayed (see FIG. 97). This point will be described later.

In addition, the pachinko game machine of the third embodiment determines the reach random number according to the reach determination table shown in FIG. It is possible to decide whether to The probability that it is determined that there is a reach differs depending on whether or not the gaming state is a normal time-saving state, which will be described later. When it is not in the normal working hours state, the probability of being determined to be reachable is higher than when it is in the normal working hours state.

Next, types of big wins, types of small wins, and types of losses will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 96 and 97. FIG. As described above, the results of the special symbol lottery (the lottery of the special figure 1 and the lottery of the special figure 2) include "big hit", "small hit", and "loss". At the time of the "big win", the special figure display 81 stops displaying the "big win pattern". The jackpot patterns include "special figure 1_jackpot pattern S" and "special figure 1_jackpot pattern T". Also, at the time of "small win", the "small win symbol" is stop-displayed on the special figure display 81. - 特許庁The small winning design includes "special figure 2_small winning design s" and "special figure 2_small winning design t". At the time of "missing", the special symbol display 81 stops displaying the "losing symbol". There are “special figure 1_losing pattern S”, “special figure 1_losing pattern T”, and “special figure 1_losing pattern U” as the losing pattern.

When a special symbol lottery wins a big win, a "big win game" is executed to open the first big win port 14 in an opening pattern corresponding to the type of the stopped and displayed big win symbol. When a small win is won, a "small win game" is executed to open the second big winning hole 15 in an opening pattern corresponding to the type of the stopped and displayed small win symbols. Then, when the game ball enters the specific area 16 in the second big winning hole 15 during execution of the small winning game, the first big winning hole 14 is opened in an opening pattern corresponding to the type of the winning small winning pattern. A "jackpot game" to be opened is executed. A jackpot game executed based on the fact that the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot winning is called a first-class jackpot game, and a jackpot game executed based on passing through the specific area 16 is called a second-class jackpot game.

In this form, the jackpot game includes multiple round games (unit open games), the opening (also referred to as OP) before the first round game starts, and the ending after the final round game ends. (also referred to as ED). Each round game starts with the end of the OP or the end of the previous round game and ends with the start of the next round game or the start of the ED. The closing time (interval time) of the big winning hole between round games is included in the open round game before closing.

In addition, in this form, the small winning game is a small winning opening game that opens the second big winning opening 15, the opening (interval before opening) before the small winning opening game is started, and the small winning opening game is completed. Later ending (post-closure interval).

As a result of the special symbol lottery, when a jackpot is won (that is, when a type 1 jackpot is won), a jackpot game (type 1 jackpot game) for opening the first jackpot 14 is executed. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 96, there are two types of jackpot symbols (jackpot symbols stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display 81a) that can be won in the first special symbol (special figure 1) lottery. Specifically, in the special figure 1 lottery, there is a possibility of winning "special figure 1_jackpot pattern S" and "special figure 1_jackpot pattern T".

As shown in FIG. 96, "special figure 1_jackpot pattern S" and "special figure 1_jackpot pattern T" are 4R (round) jackpots, and the number of openings of the first big prize opening 14 per 1R is one. Yes, and its maximum open time is 29.5 seconds. The game state after the end of the jackpot game differs depending on the game state at the time of winning.

Here, the game state of this embodiment will be briefly described. The pachinko game machine of the third embodiment can be controlled to a non-time-saving state and a time-saving state in which settings related to the ease of entering the second start port 12 are different from the non-time-saving state. In the time-saving state, the normal time-saving state in which the game ball is easy to enter the second start port 12, and the slight time-saving state in which the game ball is less likely to enter the second start port 12 than in the normal time-saving state (non- normal working hours). The ease of entering the second starting port 12 in the slightly reduced working hours state is not much different from the non-working reduced state. That is, in this form, the normal time-saving state is a high-base state in which a large number of balls can be expected to enter the second starting port 12, and the slight time-saving state and the non-time-saving state are unlikely to enter the second starting port 12. Low base state. Details of the game state will be described later.

The game state after the jackpot game when the ``jackpot pattern S'' is won is a non-time-saving state if the game state at the time of winning is a non-time-saving state or a normal time-saving state, but the game state at the time of winning is a slight time-saving state. If so, it's a very short time. The number of times of time saving in the slightly time saving state is set to 800 times. Time saving number of times is the upper limit execution number of special figure fluctuations in the time saving state. When the number of executions of the special figure variation in the minute time saving state reaches 800 times, the minute time saving state ends. In this case, it is set to a non-time saving state.

On the other hand, the time saving state after the jackpot game when winning the "jackpot pattern T" is a non-time saving state, regardless of whether the game state at the time of winning is a non-time saving state, a slight time saving state, or a normal time saving state. state.

Further, when a small win is won as a result of the special symbol lottery, a small win game is executed in which the second big prize winning port 15 is opened once. When the game ball enters the second big winning port 15 opened by the small winning game, and the game ball passes through the specific area 16 in the second big winning device 15D, the big winning is won, and the first prize is won. A jackpot game (two types of jackpot game) for opening the big winning hole 14 is executed. When this jackpot game (jackpot game triggered by passing through the specific area 16) is executed, the opening of the second big prize opening 15 as a small jackpot game corresponds to the first R. In addition, if there is no passage of the game ball to the specific area 16 in the small winning game, the big winning game is not executed. A jackpot game or a small hit game may be called a special game. In addition, in the special game, there may be a round in which the big winning opening is opened multiple times during one round.

In this form, as shown in FIG. 96, there are two types of small winning patterns that can be won in the special figure 2 lottery (small winning symbols stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display device 81b). Specifically, in the lottery of special figure 2, there is a possibility of winning "special figure 2_small winning pattern s" and "special figure 2_small winning pattern t".

The “small winning symbol s” and the “small winning symbol t” are small winnings that can always pass through the specific area 16 (also referred to as V passing) as long as the game is played correctly. That is, in this form, the small hit election based on the lottery of the special figure 2 has substantially the same meaning as the big hit election.

In the small winning game based on the small winning symbols of each type, the second big winning opening 15 is opened once for 1.8 seconds. As long as the game is played correctly, it is possible to win a plurality of prizes while the second big prize opening 15 is open. It is controlled to the passage permitting state (the state shown in FIG. 3(B)).

In the jackpot game (two-type jackpot game) executed based on the passage of the game ball to the specific area 16, even in the two-type jackpot game based on the "small hit pattern s", the two-type jackpot game based on the "small hit pattern t" Also in the game, the first big winning port 14 is opened once per 1R from the 2nd R to the 10th R with a maximum opening time of 29.5 seconds.

The game state after the end of the two types of jackpot games based on the "small winning pattern s" is a non-short-time state if the game state at the time of winning is a non-short-time state or a short-time state, and a normal short-time state if it is a short-time state. state. The number of times of time saving in the normal time saving state is set to 100 times.

On the other hand, the game state after the end of the two-type jackpot game based on the "small hit pattern t" is any of the non-time-saving state, the slight time-saving state, and the normal time-saving state at the time of winning. It is in a non-short-time state. It should be noted that the lottery of the special figure 2 in this form is mainly in the normal time saving state, and there is almost no lottery of the special figure 2 in the non-time saving state and the slight time saving state.

Moreover, when it is determined that the game is lost as a result of the special symbol lottery, the type of the lost symbol is determined. As shown in FIG. 97, there are three types of loss patterns (loss patterns stopped and displayed on the special-figure 1 indicator 81a) determined by the lottery of the special-figure 1. Specifically, in the special figure 1 lottery, it is determined to be one of "special figure 1_losing pattern S", "special figure 1_losing pattern T", and "special figure 1_losing pattern U". In addition, it will not be determined to be lost in the lottery of special figure 2.

"Special figure 1_loss pattern S" is a normal loss that does not affect the transition of the game state, but "special figure 1_loss pattern T" and "special figure 1_loss pattern U" serve as control triggers for the time saving state. It is a special loss (an example of a specific result). That is, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a special loss (also referred to as a time saving loss), the game control microcomputer 101 controls the game state after the stop display of the losing symbol to a time saving state. However, if it is already in the time-saving state (normal time-saving state or slight time-saving state) at the control timing to the time-saving state based on the special loss (that is, if the time-saving flag is ON), the setting of the game state is not changed. In other words, special losses are treated in the same way as normal losses.

More specifically, the game state after the stop display of the “losing pattern T” in the non-time saving state is the normal time saving state, and the number of times of time saving is set to 100 times. In addition, the game state after the stop display of the “loss pattern U” in the non-time-saving state is a slightly time-saving state, and the number of times of time-saving is set to 800 times.

<Game state>
Here, the game state of the pachinko game machine of the third embodiment will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 98(A), the probability of winning the normal symbol lottery in the time saving state (normal time saving state, slight time saving state) is the same as the winning probability of the normal symbols in the non time saving state. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the probability of being determined as winning in the normal symbol lottery is set to 65535/65536 in any of the game states of the non-time saving state, the normal time saving state, and the slight time saving state. In other words, in any game state, the normal symbol lottery is determined to be almost hit. In addition, in the time saving state, the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery may be higher than in the non-time saving state.

In addition, in the time-saving state (normal time-saving state, slight time-saving state), as shown in FIG. 98(B), the fluctuation time of normal symbols is shorter than that in the non-time-saving state. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the variation time of the normal symbol is 60 seconds in the non-time saving state, 1 second in the normal time saving state, and 30 seconds in the slight time saving state. It should be noted that the normal symbol stop time is 0.5 seconds in any game state.

In addition, in the time saving state (normal time saving state, slight time saving state), as shown in FIG. 98(C), the opening time of the electric chew 12D in the auxiliary game becomes longer than the non-time saving state. Specifically, in this form, the opening time of the electric chew 12D is 0.05 seconds per time in the non-time saving state, but it is 2.5 seconds in the normal time saving state and 0.1 seconds in the slight time saving state is.

Also, in the time saving state, as shown in FIG. 98(C), the number of times the electric chew 12D is opened in the auxiliary game may be greater than in the non-time saving state. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the number of times the electric chew 12D is opened is once in the non-time saving state and the slight time saving state, but twice in the normal time saving state.

Here, in the non-time-saving state, if the normal pattern lottery is executed, it will almost win, but the normal pattern fluctuation time is as long as 60 seconds, and the opening of the electric chew 12D in the auxiliary game is 0.05 seconds once. and very short time. Therefore, in the non-time-saving state, even if the game is played in the right-handed manner (the manner in which the game ball can pass through the gate 13), it is hardly expected to win the electric chew 12D.

On the other hand, in the normal time-saving state, if the normal symbol lottery is executed, it is almost a win, the normal symbol fluctuation time is as short as 1 second, and the opening of the electric chew 12D in the auxiliary game is 2.5 seconds. Twice is long enough. Therefore, in the normal time-saving state, winning a prize to the electric chew 12D can occur frequently by playing the game with the right hand. That is, it can be said that the normal time saving state is a game state in which it is easier to win the electric chew 12D than in the non-time saving state.

On the other hand, in the slightly reduced time state, if the normal symbol lottery is executed, it will almost win, but the normal symbol fluctuation time is as long as 30 seconds, and the opening of the electric chew 12D in the auxiliary game is 0.1 seconds. One time is short. Therefore, in the micro time saving state, various parameters related to the ease of winning the electric chew 12D (the winning probability of the normal pattern lottery, the normal pattern fluctuation time and stop time, the opening pattern of the electric chew 12D) are in a non-time saving state In comparison, although the setting is such that it is easy to win the electric chew 12D, it is almost impossible to expect to win the electric chew 12D even if the game is played with the right hand.

In this way, in the non-time-saving state and the slight time-saving state, it is not expected to win the electric chew 12D even if the player hits to the right, so the player proceeds with the game by hitting to the left. On the other hand, in the normal time-saving state, hitting to the right often results in winning prizes in the electric chew 12D, so the player proceeds with the game by hitting to the right. In addition, in the pachinko game machine of the present third embodiment, the game is played by hitting to the right even during the jackpot game.

Like the normal time saving state, the slight time saving state can be said to be a game state in which it is easy to win the electric chew 12D compared to the non-working time saving state, but it is more difficult to win the electric chew 12D than the normal time saving state. It is the game state of the setting. In addition, the slightly reduced working hours state is a game state closer to a non-working reduced state than the normal reduced working hours state, since winning of the electric chew 12D cannot be expected. In addition, the normal time saving state is an example of the specific game state, and the non-time saving state and the minute time saving state are examples of the non-specific game state.

By the way, in the normal time-saving state, the base, which is the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of balls fired, is higher than in the non-time-saving state. Therefore, the normal time saving state is also called "high base state", and the non-time saving state is also called "low base state". A short time state is also an example of a "low base state." In the high base state, you can aim for a big hit without greatly reducing the number of game balls you have. Note that the high base state is a state in which so-called electric support control (control for supporting winning to the second starting port 12 by the electric chew 12D) is being executed. Therefore, the high base state is also called an electric support control state. The low base state is also referred to as a non-electric support control state.

The winning probability in the normal symbol lottery, the normal symbol fluctuation time and stop time, the opening time and number of openings of the electric chew 12D, etc. can be appropriately changed within a range that does not interfere with the game performance.

<Special figure fluctuation pattern>
Next, determination of a special figure variation pattern (variation pattern of special symbols) will be described. The pachinko game machine of the third embodiment determines a special figure variation pattern according to a different special figure variation pattern determination table in the non-time saving state, the slight time saving state and the normal time saving state (see FIG. 99).

First, the special figure variation pattern determination table in the non-time saving state will be described based on FIG. 99(A). In the non-time-saving state, the game is progressed by hitting to the left, and the lottery of the special figure 1 is performed. The lottery result of the special figure 1 has a big hit and a loss. In the case of a big hit, select either a special figure variation pattern P80 to perform SP reach or a special figure variation pattern P81 to perform normal reach without developing into SP reach. On the other hand, in the case of losing, if it is a losing pattern S that is usually losing or a losing pattern U that is a control trigger for a minute time saving state, when it is determined that there is a reach, a special figure variation pattern that performs SP reach Select either P82 or special figure variation pattern P83 that performs normal reach without developing into SP reach, and when it is determined that there is no reach, depending on the number of retained balls, special figure variation in which reach is not formed Select pattern P84 or P85. In addition, when the losing pattern U is stopped and displayed in the non-time-saving state, it shifts to the slight time-saving state, but in this form, the slight time-saving state is the least advantageous gaming state for the player, so the losing pattern U is displayed in the non-time-saving state. When pulled, the same special figure variation pattern as when the losing pattern S is pulled is selected.

On the other hand, in the case of a loss, if the stop pattern is a loss pattern T that triggers the control of the normal time saving state, a special figure variation pattern P86 for performing a RUSH rush effect is selected. When the losing pattern T is stop-displayed in the non-time-saving state, it shifts to the normal time-saving state. The RUSH rush production is a production that suggests shifting to a normal working hours state. The RUSH rush effect will be described later.

Next, the special figure variation pattern determination table in the minute time saving state will be described based on FIG. 99(B). The short time state is a game state that is least advantageous for the player in this form. That is, in the present embodiment, the minute time saving state functions as a normal game state (normal game state). In the short working hours state, the game is advanced by hitting to the left, and the lottery of the special figure 1 is performed. When the lottery result of the special figure 1 is a big hit, either the special figure variation pattern P90 which performs SP reach or the special figure variation pattern P91 which performs normal reach without developing into SP reach is selected. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special figure 1 is lost, no matter what the lost pattern is, when it is determined that there is a reach, the special figure fluctuation pattern P92 to perform SP reach, or to SP reach Select any of the special figure variation patterns P93 that perform normal reach without developing, and when it is determined that there is no reach, select the special figure variation pattern P94 or P95 in which reach is not formed according to the number of retained balls. . Since the game state is not newly set even if the special losing (losing pattern T, losing pattern U) is drawn in the slightly reduced time state, when the special losing is drawn in the slightly reduced time state, the normal losing (losing pattern S) is drawn. I am trying to select the same special figure variation pattern as when.

Next, the special figure variation pattern determination table in the normal time saving state will be described based on FIG. 99(C). The normal time saving state is the most advantageous game state for the player in this form. The number of times of time saving in the normal time saving state is set to 100 times, a small win is always won in the lottery of the special figure 2, and V passage always occurs when a small win game is executed. Therefore, being controlled to the normal time-saving state means acquisition of the next big hit game (so-called Renso determination).

In the normal time-saving state, the game is played by hitting to the right, and the lottery of the special figure 2 is performed. As shown in FIG. 99(C), when the special figure 2 lottery is made in the normal time saving state, the special figure variation pattern P100 with a variation time of 13 seconds is selected as the special figure 2 variation pattern. When this special figure variation pattern is selected, immediate hit production is executed. In the immediate hit performance, the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2 and EZ3 are stop-displayed in a stop mode (double number) indicating winning as soon as the ready-to-win is formed within the fluctuation time of 13 seconds.

<Processing of game control microcomputer>
Next, processing performed by the game control microcomputer 101 in the third embodiment will be described. In the third embodiment, a game state management process shown in FIG. 100 is performed instead of the game state management process (see FIG. 89) described in the second embodiment. In addition, since the pachinko game machine of the third embodiment is not set to the high probability state, it does not perform processing related to the probability variation flag indicating the high probability state.

As shown in FIG. 100, in the gaming state management process (S1902) in the third embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not the time saving flag indicating the time saving state is ON (S2101), and if not ON, the process proceeds to step S2110. , If it is ON, the value of the time saving counter that counts the number of times of special figure fluctuation (variation display of special symbols) executed during the time saving state is decremented by 1 (S2102), and the value of the time saving counter is "0". It is determined whether or not there is (S2103). If not "0", the process proceeds to step S2110, and if "0", the time saving flag is turned OFF (S2104), the game state flag update process (S2105) is performed, and the process proceeds to step S2110.

In the game state flag update process (S2105), the value of the game state flag is set to a value corresponding to the current game state. As shown in the table in FIG. 100, the value of the gaming state flag is set to "0" if it is a non-time saving state, if it is a normal time saving state it is set to "1", If it is a slight time saving state " 2”. In this game state flag update process (S2105), since the time saving flag has just been turned OFF, the value of the game state flag is set to the value "0" corresponding to the non-time saving state.

In step S2110, it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is OFF. If the time saving flag is not OFF, the process proceeds to step S2130, but if the time saving flag is OFF, subsequently, it is determined whether or not the special symbol that is stopped and displayed is a special loss (S2111). Then, if it is not a special loss (loss pattern T or loss pattern U), the process proceeds to step S2130. See) is set in the time saving counter (S2113), the game state flag update process (S2114) is performed, and the process proceeds to step S2130.

In this game state flag update process (S2114), if the time saving flag is turned ON based on the lost pattern T, the value of the game state flag is set to the value "1" corresponding to the normal time saving state, and the lost pattern U If the time saving flag is turned ON based on, the value of the game state flag is set to the value "2" corresponding to the slight time saving state. By setting the value of the game state flag to "1", the game state is controlled to the normal time-saving state, and by setting the value of the game state flag to "2", the game state is controlled to be the slight time-saving state. . It should be noted that each time-saving state in the present form, that the special figure fluctuation of the predetermined upper limit number of executions (time-saving number of times) is performed, or the next jackpot game is executed end by the establishment of either end condition .

In addition, in this form, it is limited to when it is a non-work-time-saving state (when it is YES at step S2110) to be controlled by the time-saving state based on special loss. That is, even if a special loss is pulled in the slight time saving state, a new time saving state is not set. Here, in the present embodiment, in the gaming state management process (S1902), the process (steps S2101 to S2105) relating to whether to terminate the time saving state is performed first, and then the processing relating to whether to control the time saving state based on the special loss. (Steps S2110 to S2114) are performed. Therefore, for example, in the variation of the special figure 1 to be the final variation of the minute time saving state, when the special losing is stopped and displayed, the process of steps S2101 to S2105 is shifted from the minute time saving state to the non-time saving state, steps S2110 to S2114 It will be transferred from the non-time-saving state to the time-saving state by the processing of . In addition, the processing of steps S2110 to S2114 is configured to be performed prior to the processing of steps S2101 to S2105, so that even if a special loss is pulled in the final variation of the time saving state, it may be configured not to be controlled to a new time saving state. .

In step S2130, the game control microcomputer 101 sets the game state designation command including the information of the game state flag (that is, the information of the current game state) to the output buffer of the game RAM 104. FIG. By outputting this command, the sub-control board 120 is notified of the current game state information.

<Game flow in the third embodiment>
Next, the flow of game progress in the pachinko gaming machine of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko game machine of the third embodiment, the game state that is not the most advantageous for the player among the non-time saving state, the slight time saving state, and the normal working time saving state cannot be shifted to the normal working time saving state even if the losing pattern U is drawn. It is in a short time state. The non-time-saving state is a game state more advantageous than the slight time-saving state in that it can be shifted to the normal time-saving state by drawing the losing pattern U. In addition, since the normal time-saving state is a gaming state in which the acquisition of the jackpot game based on the special drawing 2 is substantially confirmed, it is the most It is an advantageous playing state.

In this form, the minute time saving state functions as a normal game state. As shown in FIG. 101, when it is a slightly short time state, production mode is usually set to production mode (detailed later). In the short time state, the game is advanced by hitting to the left, and the lottery of the special figure 1 is performed. The pachinko game machine of this form is configured so as not to directly shift from the minute time-saving state to the normal time-saving state. Therefore, when the player is in a slight time-saving state, the game proceeds with the aim of first shifting to a non-time-saving state. When the "big hit symbol S" is won in the short working time state, the game state after the big winning game is again set to the short working time state. On the other hand, when the "jackpot symbol T" is won, the game state after the jackpot game is set to the non-time-saving state. Also, when the number of executions of the special figure variation becomes 800 times (the number of times of time saving in the time saving state) without winning the jackpot in the time saving state, it is set to the non-time saving state.

The non-time-saving state is a game state that can be shifted to the normal time-saving state by drawing a special loss, and is one of the game states that are advantageous for the player. When it is a non-time saving state, production mode is set to chance production mode (detailed later). In the non-time saving state, the game is advanced by hitting to the left, and the lottery of the special figure 1 is performed. In this form, you will win a special loss with a probability of 1/5 in the lottery of special figure 1. At this time, it is distributed to the losing pattern T (the pattern that triggers the normal time saving state) with a probability of 1/2, and it is distributed to the losing pattern U (the pattern that triggers the slight time saving state) with a probability of 1/2. When the special loss won in the non-time-saving state is the losing pattern U, the game is played aiming at the shift to the non-time-saving state again in order to shift to the slight time-saving state.

On the other hand, when the special loss won in the non-time-saving state is the losing design T, it shifts to the normal time-saving state. The normal time saving state is a game state in which the acquisition of the jackpot game based on the lottery of the special figure 2 is substantially determined. When it is a normal time saving state, the production mode is set to the RUSH production mode (detailed later). In the normal time saving state, the game is progressed by hitting to the right, and the lottery of the special figure 2 is performed. In the lottery of special figure 2, a small hit is always won. At this time, it is distributed to the small winning pattern s (the pattern that triggers the normal time saving state) with a probability of 4/5, and to the small winning pattern t (the pattern that triggers the non-time saving state) with a probability of 1/5. be done. When the winning small win in the normal time saving state is the small winning pattern s, the normal time saving state is set again after the two-kind big winning game based on the passage of V, so that the so-called big win consecutive game is decided.

On the other hand, when the small hit won in the normal time-saving state is the small-hit symbol t, the non-time-saving state is set after the two-kind jackpot game based on V passage. In this non-time-saving state, if the losing pattern T can be drawn, it can be returned to the normal time-saving state. On the other hand, when the losing pattern U is drawn, the game shifts to a slight time-saving state. Thus, in the present embodiment, when the normal time saving state ends, it is set to the non-time saving state once without directly shifting to the slight time saving state. Therefore, the player can expect to be set to the normal time-saving state again, and the amusement of the game is improved.

In the non-time-saving state, when the jackpot is won based on the lottery of the special figure 1, even when the jackpot pattern S is drawn or when the jackpot pattern T is drawn, the gaming state after the jackpot game is finished is non-time-saving. state. As a result, the player is prevented from being discouraged by being set in a slight time-reduction state, which is more disadvantageous than the normal non-time-reduction state, even though the player has won a big win.

Here, the game state when the power is turned on will be described. When the power is turned on without the operation of the RAM clear switch 119, the game state when the power is turned on takes over the game state when the power is turned off. Therefore, when the power supply is turned off in the short working hours state after closing the shop on the previous day, the game state when the power is turned on when the shop opens remains in the short working hours state. On the other hand, when the power is turned on by operating the RAM clear switch 119, the flags and the like are initialized. That is, as shown in FIG. 101, when the RAM is cleared in response to power-on, the game state becomes a non-time saving state. As described above, the non-time-saving state is a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the slight time-saving state in that a transition to the normal time-saving state based on the losing pattern T can be expected. Therefore, it can be said that the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment can be set to an advantageous state for the player by the operation of an employee of the gaming hall (hall). That is, it can be said that the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment is equipped with an advantageous setting function. As a result, in this embodiment, a player aiming at the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment in a state where no one has played a game since the RAM is cleared by an employee of the gaming hall, etc., can use the pachinko machine of this embodiment when the amusement hall opens. You can expect to play the game machine. That is, it can be expected to improve the operation of the pachinko game machine of this embodiment immediately after the opening of the game hall (so-called first thing in the morning).

<Production example in the third embodiment>
Next, an example of an effect in the pachinko game machine of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 102 and 103. FIG. First, the presentation mode will be explained.

102(A), a "normal effect mode" in which a daytime background image is displayed on the display unit 50a, and a daytime background image, as shown in FIG. is displayed on the upper and lower portions of the display unit 50a. "RUSH production mode" displayed in is included.

The normal production mode (FIG. 102(A)) is a production mode that is set when it is in a very short working time state. Since the non-time-saving state in this form is a game state advantageous for a player as mentioned above, this slight time-saving state substantially functions as a normal game state. The setting of the normal production mode (in other words, the display of the background image in the daytime) functions as a suggestion that the time is short.

Chance production mode (FIG. 102(B)) is production mode set when it is in a non-time saving state. Since the non-time-saving state in this form can shift to the normal time-saving state based on the lost pattern T, it is a chance for the player to shift to the normal time-saving state. The setting of the chance production mode (in other words, the display of the band image OG including the character of the chance) functions as a suggestion that it is in a non-time saving state. Moreover, since it sets to a non-time-saving state when RAM clear is made, the setting of chance production mode also functions as a suggestion that RAM clear was made.

RUSH production mode (Fig. 102 (C)) is production mode that is set in the normal working hours state. When it is controlled to the normal time-saving state, the execution of the 2 types of jackpot games based on the lottery of the special figure 2 is confirmed, so the setting of the RUSH production mode (in other words, the display of the background image of the universe) is the normal time-saving state. In addition to functioning as a suggestion of the fact, it also functions as a suggestion of finalizing the execution of the jackpot game. In addition, in the normal time-saving state, the game is progressed with the aim of winning a prize to the second start port 12 by hitting to the right. A right-handed shot image G108 informing that the player should hit is displayed in the upper right part of the display section 50a.

Next, the advance notice effect in the normal effect mode will be described. In the pachinko game machine of the third embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 121 can execute a dialogue announcement effect for displaying a predetermined character together with a dialogue when the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are displayed in a variable manner. Dialogue The type of dialogue in the notice production includes dialogue that suggests that the expectation of a big hit is high (such as "chance") and dialogue that suggests that the expectation of a big hit is higher (such as "hot heat"). , There is a line (specific line) that suggests that the pachinko machine of this form is equipped with an advantageous setting function. The pachinko game machine of this embodiment can execute the effect shown in FIG. The production shown in FIG. 102(D) is a speech announcement production in which a mini-character with an apple motif says, "It might be easier to rush into RUSH first thing in the morning." Equipped with an advantageous setting function, in other words, it is possible to grasp that the first thing in the morning is set to a non-time-saving state by clearing the RAM, and that there is a possibility that it is easy to shift to the normal time-saving state. It should be noted that such a speech announcement effect for a specific speech functions as an explanation effect for explaining to the player that an advantageous setting function is installed. The explanation of the fact that the advantageous setting function is installed does not necessarily have to be performed as a speech announcement effect, and may be performed as an ending effect accompanying the ending of the jackpot game, or as a customer waiting effect. .

Next, the RUSH rush effect performed when shifting from the non-time saving state to the normal working time saving state will be described. When the winning design T is won based on the lottery of the special figure 1 in the non-time saving state, the game control microcomputer 101 selects the special figure variation pattern P86 (see FIG. 99(A)). And the production control microcomputer 121, when the special figure fluctuation pattern indicated by the special figure 1 fluctuation start command received from the game control microcomputer 101 is P86, performs the fluctuation production accompanied by the RUSH rush production. Specifically, the production control microcomputer 121 sets the production patterns EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 to the reach state as a RUSH rush production (FIGS. 103(A) and (B)), and then sets the middle production pattern EZ2 to the special pattern TZ. Stop display with a special eye. In this form, the special symbol TZ is an image containing characters (RUSH) of the name of the production mode (that is, RUSH production mode) corresponding to the destination game state (normal time saving state). In this case, the small symbols KZ1, KZ2 and KZ3 are stopped and displayed at specific stitches of "1, 3, 5". When the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are stopped and displayed with special eyes in this manner, it is suggested that the game is shifted to the normal time-saving state (RUSH performance mode). That is, the fact that the production patterns EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are stopped and displayed with a special eye is a production that suggests to the player that the shift to the normal time-saving state (pulling the losing pattern T) or a shift to the RUSH production mode. It functions as a production that suggests to do. The special stitches of the performance symbols EZ1, EZ2 and EZ3 and the specific stitches of the small symbols KZ1, KZ2 and KZ3 can be changed as appropriate.

<Effects of the third embodiment>
As described in detail above, according to the pachinko game machine of the third embodiment, the RAM clear operation (ON operation of the power switch 191 while pressing the RAM clear switch 119) by an employee of the game hall, etc. It is possible to set the time-saving state, and the non-time-saving state is advantageous to the player in that it can be shifted to the normal time-saving state by drawing the losing pattern T. That is, according to this embodiment, it is possible for an employee of the game arcade to set a game state that is advantageous to the player, and an improvement in service to the player can be expected.

Moreover, according to the pachinko game machine of 3rd Embodiment, RAM clear operation for setting to a non-time-saving state is operation possible only at the time of power-on. In other words, in this embodiment, it is possible to set the game state of the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment to a non-time-saving state when the power is turned on to open the game arcade. Therefore, it is possible to guide a player who expects to play a game in a non-time-saving state to a gaming machine that has not been played by anyone since the opening of the amusement arcade.

Moreover, according to the pachinko machine of the third embodiment, when it is set to the non-time saving state, it is set to the chance production mode (Fig. 102 (B)), so that the employees of the game hall etc. clear the RAM It is possible for a player to judge whether or not the game machine is a game machine that has been used, and thus it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine of the third embodiment, it is possible to suggest, by means of a dialog announcement effect, that there is a possibility that a gaming state that is advantageous to the player may be set by the operation of the employee of the gaming parlor or the like. (See FIG. 102(D)). Therefore, it is possible to inform the player that the game machine is equipped with an advantageous setting function.

<Modified example of the third embodiment>
A modification of the third embodiment will be described below. In addition, in the description of the modified example of the third embodiment, the same reference numerals are given to the same configurations as those of the pachinko game machine of the third embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted. Of course, configurations according to modifications of the third embodiment may be combined as appropriate. Also, technical features in the third embodiment and its modifications can be deleted as appropriate unless they are described as essential in this specification. In addition, the configuration included in the pachinko game machine PY1 of the first embodiment described above and/or the configuration included in the second embodiment described above can be used in the third embodiment and its modifications within a range that does not interfere with the game. It can be adopted in a game machine grasped from the example.

In the third embodiment, when a jackpot is won in a short time state, the game state after the big win game is not set to the normal short time state, but the winning in the short time state is controlled to the normal short time state. You may provide the jackpot pattern used as an opportunity.

In the third embodiment, there is one type of lost pattern (loss pattern U) that triggers the transition to the short working hours state, and the number of times of short working hours in the short working hours state is set to 800 times. A plurality of types of unsuccessful patterns may be provided, and the number of times of time saving in the slight time saving state may be varied according to the types of unsuccessful patterns. For example, if the time saving state is set based on a certain lost pattern, the number of times of time saving is set to a small number such as 30 times, and if the time saving state is set based on another losing pattern, the time saving number of times is 900 times, etc. If the number of times is set to be large, it is possible to provide a slightly time-saving state that easily shifts to a non-time-saving state and a state that does not easily shift to the non-time-saving state, and an improvement in the amusement of the game can be expected.

In the third embodiment, when the normal time saving state ends, it does not move directly to the short working time state, but is configured to be set to the non-short working time state once, but it is possible to directly move to the short working time state. There is a configuration (a configuration in which the game state after the jackpot game based on winning in the normal time-saving state is set to a short-time state, or a configuration in which the normal time-saving state is completed by digesting the number of time-saving states). good.

In the third embodiment, setting the chance production mode (displaying the band image OG containing the character of the chance) suggests that it is in a non-time-saving state, but suggests that it is in a non-time-saving state ( Suggestion that it is a game machine with RAM cleared) may be performed by other effects such as displaying a character image that is not displayed in a game state other than the non-time saving state. In this case, the production (suggestion production) that suggests that it is in a non-time-saving state does not have to be always performed if it is in a non-time-saving state, and is executed only when the production execution lottery is won It may be something that is done. In the third embodiment, the same daytime background image is displayed in both the non-working time saving state and the slightly working time saving state. When it is configured to do, it is possible to make it difficult to understand that the non-time-saving state has been controlled to the slight time-saving state based on the losing pattern U, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game. Since the state in which the band image OG including the character of chance is not displayed in the chance effect mode is the same as the normal effect mode, it can be said that both are set to the same effect mode.

In the third embodiment, even if it is controlled to a non-time-saving state by turning on the power with RAM clear, when it is controlled to a non-time-saving state in response to the end of the jackpot game state (state in which the jackpot game is being executed) Also, even if it is controlled to a non-time-saving state in response to the number of time-savings being consumed in a slight time-saving state, the same production mode (chance production mode) is set. It is set to the chance production mode only when it is controlled to the time saving state, and when it is controlled to the non-time saving state according to the end of the jackpot game state, or when the number of time saving times has been consumed in the slight time saving state Non-time saving When it is controlled to the state, it may be configured to be set to a production mode different from the chance production mode. Specifically, for example, if it is controlled to a non-time-saving state in response to the end of the jackpot gaming state, or if it is controlled to a non-time-saving state in response to the number of time-savings being digested in a slight time-saving state, It is good also as a structure set to the same production mode as a time saving state. With such a configuration, it is possible to give a special feeling to the state after the RAM is cleared, and to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

In the third embodiment, the RAM clear operation using the RAM clear switch 119 was a state setting operation for setting the non-time saving state, but the state setting operation is an operation without using the RAM clear switch 119 (RAM clear operation). For example, it is good also as a structure set to a non-time-saving state by providing the exclusive switch for setting to a non-time-saving state, and pushing the said exclusive switch. In this case, the period during which the dedicated switch can be effectively operated may be a period other than when the power is turned on. Specifically, for example, it may be configured to be set to a non-time-saving state by pressing a dedicated switch during a customer waiting state (a state in which a customer waiting effect is being performed). It should be noted that the dedicated switch is preferably mounted on the main control board 100 or otherwise provided at a position where the player cannot arbitrarily operate it. That is, like the RAM clear switch 119, the dedicated switch is preferably provided at a position where it cannot be operated unless the game machine frame 2 is opened.

In addition, in the third embodiment, it is configured as a so-called 1 type 2 type mixing machine capable of executing a jackpot game based on the passage of the game ball to the specific area 16 in the second big winning hole 15, but the so-called "ST machine" , or a "probability variable loop machine", it may be a game machine of a type other than a type 1 type 2 type mixed machine. In the case of a ST machine or a variable loop machine, it may be a so-called "symbol variable machine" that determines the transition to a high probability state with a high jackpot winning probability based on the type of special symbol that has been won, or a V attacker (specific area It may be a so-called “V probability changer” in which a transition to a high probability state is determined based on passage to a specific area in a large winning device having a . In addition, when configured as a "ST machine" or a "variable loop machine", it is configured to win a jackpot in both the special 1 lottery and the special 2 lottery, and the special 2 lottery is better than the special 1 lottery. A lottery may be advantageous in that a jackpot game with a large number of obtainable prize balls can be easily executed and the game state after the jackpot game is easily controlled to a high probability state. Also, even if a special loss is drawn in a high-probability state, the setting of the game state is not changed.

Further, in the third embodiment, the number of times of time saving in various time saving states can be appropriately changed within a range that does not interfere with the game. Further, in the above-described form, parameters in various time-saving states (normal pattern fluctuation time, stop time, electric chew opening pattern, etc.) can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game. Further, in the above embodiment, the types and distribution ratios of each big winning symbol, each small winning symbol, and each losing symbol can be appropriately changed within a range that does not interfere with the game.

Further, in the third embodiment, the machine is configured as a so-called 1 type 2 type mixing machine, but depending on the game characteristics to be realized, it may be a so-called hanemono (2 type machine) without a 1 type jackpot. That is, the lottery of the special figure 1 and the lottery of the special figure 2 may be configured so that the so-called "direct hit jackpot" cannot be won.

In the third embodiment, the upper limit number of times of variable display of special symbols in the time saving state (time saving number of times) is counted even if the variable display of special figure 1 is performed or the variable display of special figure 2 is performed Although it was set as the total upper limit execution number, apart from this total upper limit execution number, special figure 1 upper limit execution number that counts only the variation display of special figure 1, special figure that only the variation display of special figure 2 is counted FIG. 2 may be configured so that an upper limit number of times of execution is provided, and the time saving state ends when any number of times is satisfied. In addition, special figure 1 upper limit execution frequency and special figure 2 upper limit execution frequency can be set to a value different from the total upper limit execution frequency. In addition, without providing the total upper limit number of executions, a special figure 1 upper limit number of executions and a special number 2 upper limit number of executions are provided, and when either number is satisfied, the time saving state ends, or special figure 2 Only an upper limit number of times of execution may be provided, and when this number of times is satisfied, the time saving state may be terminated.

<Invention shown in the third embodiment>
Inventions of the following means are shown in the above-described third embodiment and its modifications. In the description of the means described below, the corresponding structural names and expressions in the above-described embodiments, etc., and the reference numerals used in the drawings are added in parentheses for reference. However, the constituent elements of each invention are not limited to this appendix.

<Means S>
The invention according to means S1 is
A prize winning opening (first starting opening 11, second starting opening 12) into which game balls can enter,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 101) for setting a game state based on the entry of a game ball into the winning hole;
With production control means (production control microcomputer 121) for setting the production mode for producing production,
The game state includes a first state (normal time-saving state) in which game balls are likely to enter the winning opening, and a second state (non-time-saving state) in which game balls are less likely to enter the winning opening than in the first state. state), and
The game control means may set the second state as the initial state,
When the second state is set as the initial state, the effect control means has a specific mode (chance effect mode) including a predetermined suggestive effect (for example, display of band image OG shown in FIG. 102(B)) as the effect mode. ) is a gaming machine characterized by setting

The invention according to means S2 is
A game machine according to means S1,
In the game state, there is a third state (slight time reduction state) which is different from the second state and in which the game ball is more difficult to enter the winning hole than in the first state,
The game control means can make a special determination of whether or not to set the first state (determination of whether or not to shift to the normal time saving state based on the losing pattern T),
The gaming machine is characterized in that the second state is more likely to be determined when the first state is set in the special determination than the third state.

The invention according to means S3 is
A gaming machine according to means S2,
The game control means changes the game state from the second state to the third state when a predetermined condition (stop display of the losing pattern U that triggers the transition to the short time state) is established in the second state. there is a
The game machine is characterized in that the effect control means continues the specific mode even if the game state changes from the second state to the third state in the specific mode.

By the way, in the gaming machine described in JP-A-2018-47326, after the jackpot game, it may be controlled to a time-saving state in which the game ball is likely to enter the starting port. However, there is room for improvement with respect to the effects in a gaming machine that can be controlled in a time-saving state. By installing the improved production, it can be expected to improve the interest of the game. Therefore, the invention according to means S provides a game machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2018-47326 that "a game ball enters a winning hole more easily than in the first state in which the game ball enters the winning hole." There are times when the difficult second state is set as the initial state, and when the second state is set as the initial state, a specific mode including a predetermined suggestive performance is set as the performance mode. As a result, it is possible to contribute to the enhancement of interest in the game through the performance.

11... First start port 12... Second start port 50... Image display device 50a... Display unit 55... Board movable device 55k... Board movable body 100... Main control board 101... Game control microcomputer 120... Sub control board 121 … Production control microcomputer HA … Hold icon TA … Icon PY1 … Pachinko game machine

Claims (1)

game control means capable of determining whether or not to control to a special game state advantageous to the player based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
Production control means capable of controlling a predetermined production,
and a display unit capable of displaying the effect,
The production control means is
In the display unit, it is possible to display a predetermined icon indicating that the execution of the determination is suspended or that the determination has been performed;
making it possible to execute a change effect for changing the display mode of the predetermined icon from a specific display mode to a special display mode different from the specific display mode;
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images